FSP 3000R7 Element Manager

User Manual

Product Release 10.3 Document Issue: B (July 2011)

Copyright © 2001-2011 ADVA Optical Networking All rights reserved. Hardware and software mentioned in this document includes software developed by ADVA Optical Networking ("ADVA Optical Networking"), the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org), Teodor Danciu (http://jasperreports.sourceforge.net), and/or other open source software. Some software was created using ORBacus for Java by Object-Oriented Concepts, Inc. Trademarks The terms “ADVA” and “FSP 3000” are trademarks or registered trademarks of ADVA Optical Networking in the United States, Germany and/or other countries. All other company products or services mentioned in this document may be trademarks or service marks of ADVA Optical Networking or their respective owner. Patents The content described in this document may be covered by patents or pending patent applications of ADVA Optical Networking. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. Disclaimers Nothing in this document shall be construed as granting any license or rights with respect to its content or the patents and trademarks mentioned above. The content of this document may include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors, and is subject to change at any time without notice. Reliance on this content is at the relying party's sole risk and will not create any liability or obligation for ADVA Optical Networking. Any references in this document to publications and/or Internet sites that are not from ADVA Optical Networking are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those publications and/or Internet sites. The materials within those publications and/or Internet sites are not part of the materials for any ADVA Optical Networking information, product, or service, and use of those publications and/or Internet sites is at your own risk. THE CONTENT OF THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL ADVA OPTICAL NETWORKING, ITS AFFILIATES, EMPLOYEES, OFFICERS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND BASED ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. THE SAME APPLIES FOR ANY HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE COVERED BY THIS DOCUMENT, UNLESS A SIGNED AGREEMENT WITH ADVA OPTICAL NETWORKING OR THE APPLICABLE PRODUCT LIABILITY LAW EXPRESSLY STATES OTHERWISE. ADVA Optical Networking Fraunhoferstr. 9a 82152 Martinsried/Muenchen Germany Phone +49(0)89-890665-0 Fax +49(0)89-890665-199 http://www.advaoptical.com

2

User Manual

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 List of Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Related Documents Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Purpose and Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Symbol and Message Conventions Obtaining Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documentation Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . Customer Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact ADVA Optical Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 21 21 22 24 24 26 27 27 27 28 28 29

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Chapter 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 32 33 33 34 35 37 37 39 43

Installing the Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Install on a Windows Platform. . . . . . . . . . How to Install on a Solaris Platform . . . . . . . . . . . How to Uninstall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Upgrade on a Windows Platform . . . . . . . . Starting the Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initializing the Element Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining NEs to Manage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Add a Single IP Connection . . . . . . . . . How to Discover all NEs in an IP Address Range

User Manual

3

How to Export and Import the Managed Elements List How to Modify IP Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Delete IP Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Trap Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Add Trap Recipient Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Modify Trap Recipient Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Delete Trap Recipient Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Element Manager User Accounts. . . . . . . . How to Add a User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Delete a User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Change Other Users’ Passwords . . . . . . . . . . How to Change Your Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

46 51 52 53 55 56 56 57 57 58 59 59

Chapter 2

Basics of the Element Manager. . . . . . . . 61
............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ Simultaneously . ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 72 73 74 75 75 76 77 77 77 78 78

4

User Manual

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . The Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Network Element Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . The Information Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Entity Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Tree View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Racks View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AID Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entity Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Equipment Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Parameter Pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Response Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Several NE Information Panes About Communicating with NEs . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Security Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centralized Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3

Provisioning NEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 83 85 86 87 88 92 93 96 99 100 101 107 112 113 115 116 119 120 121 123 123 123 125 127 128 128 130 131 132 133 139 140 141 142 143 144 147

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

About Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create a Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create an OTDR Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Clone a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create a Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Clone a Channel (Port). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Change a Service (Channel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create a Virtual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create an Ethernet Port (ETH) . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create a Virtual Ethernet Port (VETH) . . . . . . . How to Create an EOC Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create an SDH/SONET/OTN based ECC Channel How to Create an Ethernet based ECC Channel . . . . . . How to Create a PPP IP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create a Supervisory Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create an Optical Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create Equipment/Facilities Automatically. . . . . . . Managing Encryption Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Change the Crypto-Officer Password . . . . . . How to Specify the Module Authentication Password How to View the Key Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Maintenance Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Change the Session-Key Lifetime . . . . . . . . How to Force a Key Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Reset the Key Exchange Fail Counter . . . . . How to View the Key Exchange Fail Counter . . . . . . How to Update the Encryption Module Firmware . . . How to Switch Off Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View the Encryption-Off Timer . . . . . . . . . . How to Switch On Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Configure a Network Interface Loopback . . . Creating Protection Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create a Channel Protection Group . . . . . . . . . How to Create a Channel Card Protection Group . . . . .

User Manual

5

Chapter 4

Configuring NEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 221 222 223 224 224 225

Configuring Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Configure Parameters . . . . . . . . How to Configure System Parameters. . . How to Configure NE Mode . . . . . . . . . . Configuring DCN Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Configure a LAN IP Address . . . . How to Configure the System IP Address

6

User Manual

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

How to Create a Client Channel Card Protection Group . . . . . . . How to Create a Virtual Channel Protection Group . . . . . . . . . . How to Create an Ethernet Linear Protection Group . . . . . . . . . How to Create a Versatile Protection Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Delete a Protection Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating ADM and ROADM Cross Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View ADM and ROADM Cross Connections . . . . . . . . . . How to Create an ADM or ROADM Cross Connection . . . . . . . . . How to Create a 1 Way ADM or ROADM Cross Connect Primitive How to Enable a ROADM Cross-connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Delete a Bi-directional ADM or ROADM Cross Connection How to Delete 1 Way ADM or ROADM Cross Connect Primitives . Creating Flow Points, Bridges, and Cross Connections . . . . . . . . . . How to Create a Flow Point (FLW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View Flow Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create a Bridge (BRG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View Bridges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create a Flow Cross Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create a 1 Way Flow Cross Connect Primitive . . . . . . . . How to Delete a Bi-directional Flow Cross Connection . . . . . . . . How to Delete 1 Way Flow Cross Connect Primitives. . . . . . . . . How to View Flow Cross-connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating DCN Cross-Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Cross-connect PPP IP and EOC/ECC Interfaces . . . . . . . How to View ECC Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Delete Equipment/Facilities Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling Network Element User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a User Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying an User Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a User Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

152 156 158 162 164 165 166 168 175 179 180 181 183 184 189 191 194 196 199 201 203 206 208 208 210 212 214 214 216 217

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Configuring OSPF Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring OSPF for the System Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining OSPF for Ethernet PPP IP/LAN IP Interfaces . . . . . . Assigning/Removing Static Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning/Removing a Default Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Default Gateway via the IP Ethernet Interface . . Connecting the OSC and LAN IP Ethernet Interface . . . . . . . Configuring Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Enable/Disable the FTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Enable/Disable the FTP Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Enable/Disable Use of SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Configure Known Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to view Single Protection Group Settings (Method A) . . . How to View Single Protection Group Settings (Method B). . . How to View All Protection Group Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Make a Manual Protection Switch (Method A) . . . . . . How to Make a Manual Protection Switch (Method B) . . . . . . How to Make a Manual Ethernet Linear Protection Switch . . . How to Inhibit Protection Switch (Method A) . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Inhibit Protection Switch (Method B) . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Inhibit an Ethernet Linear Protection Switch . . . . . . . How to Configure APS Hold-Off Time (Method A) . . . . . . . . . How to Configure APS Hold-Off Time (Method B) . . . . . . . . . How to Change the Administrative State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the OTDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Node Channel Traces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Information About the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View Configured Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View Inventory for an Entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View Inventory for a NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View Interface Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View the Routing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View the OSPF Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Manually Set the Date, Time, and Time Zone . . . . Synchronizing NE time via NTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Configure an NE for Client-Only or Relay Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

228 230 232 233 235 237 238 239 239 241 242 242 245 246 247 248 249 250 252 254 255 256 258 259 260 261 262 267 268 270 271 272 273 274 275 277 278 280 282

User Manual

7

8

User Manual

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

How to Configure an NE for Server-Only Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Check NE to Remote NTP Server Connectivity . . . . . . . How to Disable Time Synchronization with NTP. . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Remote Syslog Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Add a Remote Syslog Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Edit a Remote Syslog Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Delete a Remote Syslog Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How To Configure Scheduled Equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Span Equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Provision Span Equalization in a New Network . . . . . . . . . How to Provision Span Equalization in an Existing Network . . . . . . How to Initiate Equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View the List of Qualified EDFAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View Span Equalization Status, Alarms, and Configuration . How to Configure Span Equalization Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Change Qualified EDFA Set Point and PPC . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Change Qualified EDFA Gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Change Qualified EDFA Administrative State . . . . . . . . . . How to Enable/Disable Dynamic Equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Configuring Trace Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View the Trace Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Configure the Trace Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Settings for SDH/SONET Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Settings for OTN Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Configure TCA Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Configure Tandem Connection Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Store Optical Power Reference Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Ethernet OAM/CFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Maintenance Domain (MD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Maintenance Association Network (MAnet) . . . . . . . . . Creating a Maintenance Association Component (MAcomp). . . . . . Creating a Maintenance End Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Modifying MAnet or MAcomp Configuration . . . . . . . . Viewing and Modifying MEP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting CFM Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Configure Loop-Backs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Cables in the Internal Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View Fibers in the Physical Connections Table . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Enter Fibers into the Physical Connections Table . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

286 288 289 290 292 293 294 295 297 299 301 303 305 306 308 309 311 314 315 316 316 318 319 320 321 322 324 325 326 329 333 337 341 345 349 351 353 354 355

Viewing Physical Termination Points . . . . . . . . . . How to Set the Automatic Laser Shutdown Mode . . . How to Force a Laser On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Set the Forced-Laser Fallback/Release Timer. How to Allow Forced Deletion of Entities . . . . . . . . . Enabling Use of SCU Ring Interconnection . . . . . . . . How to Change Equipment Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . How to Configure TIF Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

357 358 360 362 363 363 364 365

Chapter 5

Monitoring NEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 370 372 374 375 377 377 380 381 383 386 388 389 390 392 395 398 399 400 400 401 402 403 403 404

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Monitoring Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View Current Conditions for a Single Entity or NE . . How to View Current Conditions for All Entities in an NE . . . How to View the Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Manually Change an Individual Condition’s Severity. Changing Condition Severities with an Alarm Profile . . . . . . How to Modify the Alarm Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Reset an Alarm Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Export an Alarm Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Import a Alarm Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Set the Timer for the Fault Cause Persistency Filter . Monitoring Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View Channel Performance per NE. . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View Single Channel Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View ROADM Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View Reconfigurable Filter Performance . . . . . . . . . How to Reset Performance Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Print Historic Performance Records . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Export Historic Performance Records . . . . . . . . . . . How to View Physical Layer Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View Optical Power Reference Values. . . . . . . . . . . How to View Thresholds for Threshold Crossing Alerts . . . . Monitoring States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View States for an Entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to View States for an NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6

Maintaining NEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

About Software and Database Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

User Manual

9

Appendix A Appendix B

Communication Port Overview . . . . . . . 463 Description of States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Administrative States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Operational States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Secondary States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

10

User Manual

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

The Software Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling of Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software and Database Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Downgrade and Switchback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NE Software Version versus File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backing Up and Restoring the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Manually Back Up the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Set Up Scheduled Backup of the Database . . . . . . How to Restore the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Enable Automatic Database Restoration . . . . . . . . Updating NE Software in a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Install NE Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating the NE Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Schedule Activation of the NE Software . . . . . . How to Manually Activate the NE Software . . . . . . . . . Switching Back to Previous NE Software Version . . . . . . . Updating NE Software in a GNE-based Network . . . . . . . . . . Updating Firmware Packages in an NE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Update Firmware for a Single Module. . . . . . . . . . How to Update Firmware for Multiple Modules . . . . . . . . . Transferring Files To/From the NE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Upload Files from the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Download Files to the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rebooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rebooting the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-initiating a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About FTP and SCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Move Files to an External Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Move a Database Backup from an External Server.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

406 408 409 409 411 411 413 415 419 421 423 425 428 429 432 434 435 435 436 437 441 448 448 453 458 458 459 459 460 461

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 493 494 495 495 Installing and Starting a RADIUS Server . . 471 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 . . . . . . . . . . . Removing an SNMP Access Profile for an IP Subnet Configuring IP Subnet Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Configuring a RADIUS Server . . . . . . . . .3 80000014705 Issue: B. . . . . Adding a Restricted IP Subnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 User Manual 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 472 475 476 476 478 479 482 484 486 486 488 489 Setting up RADIUS Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining RADIUS User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining RADIUS Servers. . . . . . Index. . . . Modifying the Port for RADIUS Authentication Defining the Element Manager IP Addresses . . . . . . Removing a Restricted IP Subnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D FSP 3000R7 R10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Privilege Levels. . . . . . . Clearing a Default SNMP Access Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Default SNMP Access Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix C RADIUS Authentication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying an SNMP Access Profile for an IP Subnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling RADIUS Authentication . . . . . . . Enabling Restricted IP Subnets Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring SNMP Access Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an SNMP Access Profile for an IP Subnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .12 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab view . . . . . . Software Package . . . . . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Context Sensitive Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack View . . . . NE Software Switchback With Auxiliary Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tree View. . . . The Date and Time Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 80000014705 Issue: B. . Response Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FreeRadius Server Directory . . . . . . . . . . Element Manager Entity Pane. . . . . . . . . . . Connections between NEs and Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Toolbar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of Element Manager Main Screen. . . . Element Manager Entity Pane. . . . . . . . NE Software Activation Keeping Current Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Pane . . . . Alternative Layout . . . . . Status Bar Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switchback to Previous NE Software and Database . . . Example of RADIUS Dictionary File . . . . . . . . . User Accounts and Management Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routing Table. . . . . . . GNE-based Network Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of the Information Pane. . . . . Span Equalization Linear Network Example: Existing Network Fiber Jumpers and Physical Termination Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Software and Database File Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of Parameter pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entity Identification Examples . . . . .List of Figures Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 26: 27: 28: 29: 30: 31: Overview of SNMP Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Pane. . . Span Equalization Linear Network Example: New Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Network Element Pane Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NE Software Update. . . . . . . 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 69 70 72 73 74 74 75 76 218 274 278 299 302 353 406 408 410 410 410 411 435 492 493 FSP 3000R7 R10. . . . . . . . . . . . Default Layout . First-time Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of the Information Pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .14 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 15 . . . Communication Ports . . . . . . . .3 80000014705 Issue: B. . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Color Coding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Point Parameters for Port mode CTAG . . . . . . . . . Element Manager versus RADIUS Privilege Levels . . . . 82 104 109 187 188 188 193 281 370 463 495 FSP 3000R7 R10. . . . . . . Flow Point Parameters for all Port modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of AID addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port Role/Port Mode versus IEEE Provider Bridge . . . . . Remote NTP Server Synchronization Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bridge Parameters for all Port modes . . . . . . . 71 . . . . . Flow Point Parameters for Port mode STAG . . . . . . . .List of Tables Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: Entity AID Name Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port Role/Port Mode versus IEEE Provider Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .3 80000014705 Issue: B.16 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.

rack-mounting the equipment. provisioning. • Shipment Contents This document is used to check and verify the contents of each shipping box against the original purchase order. • Safety Guide This document describes important safety precautions that are to be read and observed before attempting to install. operating. DCN. Detailed System Description This document is a look-up resource. This is a procedure-oriented document. and management related features. and when using the built-in management tools. optical amplification. Control Plane. configuring or operating the FSP 3000R7. provision. • Installation and Commissioning Manual This document describes how to install an FSP 3000R7 node. It covers everything from unpacking the shipment. installing. Therefore. protection. configure or operate the FSP 3000R7. User Manual 17 .3 80000014705 Issue: B. provisioning. connecting optical fibers. FSP 3000R7 R10. Installing • Critical Warnings This document lists the most important safety requirements as well as input power restrictions for channel modules and pluggable transceivers. reconfigurable OADMs. • • Module and System Specification This document contains the technical specifications for the FSP 3000R7. Read this document before installing. read this document first.Related Documents Overview This section gives an overview of the complete suite of documents that is provided for the FSP 3000R7 system. or troubleshooting FSP3000R7 network elements. It describes the solutions and principles behind major features such as transport protocols. Refer to these documents when planning. Planning • • Product Description This document provides a basic product overview. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Deployment Rules This document contains the rules for deploying FSP 3000R7 optical amplifiers in an optical network. and when to read each document. and includes basic commissioning.

operate and monitor the FSP 3000R7. This is a procedure-oriented document. and maintenance of the OTDR unit. and maintenance of the OTDR unit. operations. Read this document in conjunction with the Management Data Guide in order to look-up configuration and management related details while following the procedures in the User Guide. • OTDR Installation. 18 User Manual . signal path description with block diagram. configurable. provisioning. operating. allowed placement and labeling of the modules. The Craft/Web Console User Manual helps you with the mechanics of using the tool to perform individual tasks on the FSP 3000R7. parameter values. Notice however that it is the User Guide that guides you to operate the FSP 3000R7. and read-only parameters for each module. as well as performance counters and alarms. and other management related data. troubleshooting.• Hardware Description This document describes physical details about each module such as front plate pictures and markings. • Management Data Guide FSP 3000R7 R10. • OTDR Installation. troubleshooting. Troubleshooting • Troubleshooting Guide This document describes how to troubleshoot the FSP 3000R7 hardware and software. Provisioning and Operations Manual This document covers installation. provisioning. This is a procedural document. This is a useful look-up reference both when planning and engineering a network and while following the procedures in the User Guide.3 80000014705 Issue: B. For more detailed guidance about the mechanics of using a management tool to perform individual tasks. Provisioning and Operating • Provisioning and Operations Manual This document covers provisioning. and monitoring of the FSP 3000R7 system. refer to the Management Data Guide. For details related to the supported configurations of each module. Working with Management Tools • Craft/Web Console User Manual This document is useful if you need more guidance in using the Craft or Web Console than the User Guide offers. Provisioning and Operations Manual This document covers installation. see the Element Manager User Manual or the Craft/Web Console User Manual. configuring. operations. configure. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential This document contains all provisionable. • TL-1 User Manual This document describes the TL-1 commands available to provision.

and maintenance of the OTDR unit. operations. and Operations Manual This document covers installation. • OTDR Installation. provisioning.• TL-1 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual This document describes how to troubleshoot the FSP 3000R7 when managing it via TL-1. Provisioning. FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B. troubleshooting. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 19 .

3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .20 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.

User Manual 21 . Updated description for Ethernet L2 facility creations and scheduled database backup.1 Document Number 80000003745 80000007377 Document Version Issue B Issue B Issue Date Mar 2009 Aug 2009 Details of Issue Small adjustments. configure. The FSP 3000R7 Element Manager User Manual is a detailed guide to using the FSP 3000R7 Element Manager to complete the tasks described in the FSP 3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual. It assumes that the personnel have a basic knowledge of the FSP 3000R7 product. and how it works.3 80000014705 Issue: B. operating and monitoring FSP 3000R7 Network Elements. or troubleshoot FSP 3000R7 Network Elements using the Element Manager. the FSP 3000R7 Element Manager will be referred to as the Element Manager. From this point and on. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Audience This user documentation is written for personnel that. FSP 3000R7 R10. For instructions on provisioning. This publication is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty for accuracy and completeness. Purpose and Scope The purpose of this user documentation is to describe how to install and use the FSP 3000R7 Element Manager.Preface The Preface gives general information for the effective use of the FSP 3000R7 Element Manager (Element Manager) User Manual.3 9. please refer to the Release Notes provided with your system. operate. see the FSP 3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual. configuring. Product Release 8. Document Revision History For an overview of the content of any one product release.

the main features it offers. OSPF configuration. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential 10. and the administrative state.3 80000014705 80000014705 Issue A Issue B June 2011 Aug 2011 Organization This user documentation is organized in three main parts. This includes installing the Element Manager and initializing it for management of the relevant Network Elements.4 10. Updated to cover new features in release. Part One This part describes how the Element Manager works.2 Document Number 80000008785 80000010471 80000012372 80000011744 80000013989 80000013989 Document Version Issue A Issue C Issue A Issue A Issue A Issue B Issue Date Nov 2009 Jul 2010 Jun 2010 Sep 2010 Oct 2010 Dec 2010 Details of Issue Updated to cover new features in release. Enhancements to descriptions of user name/password case-insensitivity for remote servers. and Ethernet OAM/CFM. Updated to cover new features in release. Updated with information about application file location.3 80000014705 Issue: B. its architecture and how it operates. use of IP header. Part Two This part describes how to use the Element Manager to carry out commands that are necessary when following the FSP 3000R7 ’s procedures for commissioning.3 10. FSP 3000R7 R10. by providing a general description of it. and EM user account password rules. and how to use the tools that it provides. Ethernet linear protection. configuring and monitoring FSP 3000R7 Network Elements.3 9.Organization Product Release 9.2 80000013989 Issue C Mar 2011 10. Updated to cover new features in release. Updated to cover new features in release.2 9. Enhancement to descriptions of viewing Ethernet OAM entities.1 10. This part consists of these sections: Chapter 1: Getting Started This section describes how to get started using the Element Manager.2 10. Chapter 2: Basics of the Element Manager This section gives an introduction to the Element Manager. This part consists of these sections: Chapter 3: Provisioning NEs 22 User Manual . Updated to cover new features span equalization.

Chapter 5: Monitoring NEs This section describes how to monitor the equipment state.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Chapter 6: Maintaining NEs This section contains instructions on how to maintain software on Network Elements as well as how to back-up and restore the Network Element configurations in the internal database. FSP 3000R7 R10.This section gives an introduction to provisioning of the FSP 3000R7. performance and physical layer measurements. Chapter D: Configuring a RADIUS Server This section describes how to configure a RADIUS server. and the instructions on how to configure editable parameters for the NE. faults). Chapter C: RADIUS Authentication Setup This section describes how to setup the Element Manager to use RADIUS authentication. channels and virtual channels to the internal database. for the free RADIUS server application FreeRADIUS. Chapter 4: Configuring NEs This section contains instructions on how to view the parameters that have been configured for the equipment and facilities in an NE. pluggable transceivers. by using the Element Manager. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Additional Supporting Documents Management Data Guide User Manual 23 . current conditions (for example. Part Three This part is the Appendix where you will find additional useful information about communication ports and different states for the network element. modules. events. This part consists of the following sections: Chapter A: Communication Port Overview This section gives an overview over ports used for communication between the Element Manager and Network Elements. It contains instructions for provisioning shelves. Chapter B: Description of States This section gives the description of all states the network elements can have.

Thus. All warnings are in boldface font. accessible via the Element Manager help menu. Info and Fault pages in the management tools Craft Console. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential blue font CAPITALIZED font courier [] | ^ 24 User Manual . FSP 3000R7 R10. Alternative elements are separated by a vertical bar. the procedures in the Element Manager User Manual do not always explain the attributes you can select for the fields. section. or on the World Wide Web via your partner login at: http://www. Elements in square brackets are optional. The parameters in the Management Data Guide are organized per module type. table or related documentation when appearing in main text areas.com/ Document Conventions This section lists the common typographical and symbol use for FSP 3000R7 documents. e.3 80000014705 Issue: B.advaoptical. Web Console and EM. the key combination ^D means that you have to hold down the Control key while you press the D key. For equipment and facilities there are tables containing parameters. Refers to the keys on your keyboard.g.Document Conventions All entities are characterized by a number of parameters. This document is available as a PDF. The symbol ^ represents the key labeled Control for example. Typographic Conventions The documentation follows these typographic conventions: Convention boldface font Description Indicates keywords and emphasized words when appearing in main text areas. or attributes. The Management Data Guide lists all attributes that may be displayed on the Config. Indicates a reference to a chapter. ENTER marked  Courier font is used to identify words that can be read from or typed into the command line interface. figure. instead you are referred to the Management Data Guide. faults and performance information.

Refers you to additional information. for example: <Esc> The escape key. b. 2. -> FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 25 . ““ • (bullet symbol) 1.. .. The markers in the text are arranged as continuous superscript numbers..3 80000014705 Issue: B. Footnote text (in smaller typeface) is placed at the bottom of a table and starts with a superscript number.. .g. Nonprinting characters.. marked  <username> This reference. is replaced by the appropriate user name. such as passwords. c. marked Esc <Enter> The Enter key.or a.Convention < > Description References are enclosed in angle brackets... the steps listed in a procedure Are used to point to table footnotes.. 2 etc. * or 1. including the angle brackets. Double inverted commas are used to enclose quoted text. These numbering styles are used in lists of items where the sequence of items is relevant. Used in bulleted list of items where the sequence of items is not relevant. 3. e.

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the risks caused by electricity. if the instruction is ignored or not followed correctly. This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the proper disposal of waste electrical or electronic equipment and its components. These risks could result in death or serious injury if the instruction is ignored or not followed correctly. A symbol that draws attention to the necessity and importance of carefully reading all instructions before any installation or operation takes place. malfunction. may result in minor or moderate injury. process interruption or negative impacts on surroundings. This symbol accompanies any statement supplemental information or helpful recommendation that should be observed. if the instruction is ignored or CAUTION not followed correctly. if the instruction is ignored or not followed correctly. These events can occur. Damage can occur. cautions and notes. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or damage to equipment. This risk may result in serious eye injury.Document Conventions Safety Symbol and Message Conventions The safety alert symbols with the appropriate signal words and the note signs below are used throughout this documentation to identify warnings. if the ESD-prevention instructions are ignored or not followed correctly. NOTICE This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the risk of equipment damage. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the possibility of equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge (ESD). This situation/condition.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Note 26 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. PS . WARNING This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to a potentially hazardous situation/condition. CAUTION This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the risk of possible laser radiation. Disregard of the instruction can threaten the environment.

advaoptical.3 80000014705 Issue: B.com/ Ordering Documentation ADVA Optical Networking customers can order the Element Manager documentation set and additional literature through a local ADVA Optical Networking sales representative. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential You can e-mail your comments/suggestions to: global-techdocu@advaoptical. or contact ADVA Optical Networking’s Technical Services. For more current product release information. Documentation Feedback We want our Element Manager documentation to be as helpful as possible. See Obtaining Technical Assistance and Contact ADVA Optical Networking for contact details. Feedback regarding the guide is therefore always welcome. use the following address: ADVA AG Optical Networking Technical Documentation Märzenquelle 1-3 98617 Meiningen-Dreissigacker Germany We appreciate and value your comments/suggestions to improve the quality of the guide. both on-site and at ADVA facilities in Germany and the USA Expedited repair service User Manual 27 . Obtaining Technical Assistance Product Maintenance Agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for ADVA Optical Networking products through your ADVA Optical Networking distribution channel.Obtaining Documentation World Wide Web You can access the most current ADVA Optical Networking documentation on the World Wide Web via the Customer Portal at: http://www. FSP 3000R7 R10.com To submit your comments/suggestions by mail. Our service options include: • • • • • 24 x 7 telephone support Web-based support tools On-site support Technical training. please refer to ADVA Optical Networking’s home page.

Middle East. and programs. easy-to-use tool for doing business with ADVA Optical Networking. and order ADVA Optical Networking training materials. download and test software packages. you will find information tailored especially for you.advaoptical. you can resolve technical issues with online support services. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential 28 User Manual . To contact ADVA Optical Networking by E-mail. networking services that provide immediate access to company information and resources at any time.com Technical Support Technical services are available to warranty or maintenance contract customers who need technical assistance with a product from ADVA Optical Networking that is under warranty or covered by a maintenance contract. In addition. including networking solutions. The broad range of features and services provided by the portal help customers and partners to streamline business processes and improve productivity.com FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B.com E-mail questions regarding the Customer Login to: Support@advaoptical. To access ADVA Optical Networking Technical Services. from anywhere in the world.Obtaining Technical Assistance • Extended hardware warranty service Customer Portal The ADVA Optical Networking Customer Portal provides a suite of interactive.com North America: Support-usa@advaoptical. Africa: Support@advaoptical. Access the Customer Portal via the ADVA Optical Networking home page at: http://www. This highly integrated internet application is a powerful. go to the ADVA Optical Networking home page at: http://www. Through the customer login. services.com and select the “Support” button. use one of the following addresses: Europe. including all contact information.com Asia: Support-asia@advaoptical.advaoptical.

com ADVA Optical Networking America Norcross. USA. China. +1 687 728 8600 info@advaoptical.3 80000014705 Issue: B.com FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 29 .com ADVA Optical Networking Asia Shenzhen. Germany.Contact ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Optical Networking Europe.com www. +86 755 8621 7400 info@advaoptical. Middle East and Africa Martinsried/Munich. GA.advaoptical. +49 (0)89 89 06 65 0 info@advaoptical.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .3 80000014705 Issue: B.30 Contact ADVA Optical Networking User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.

This includes installing the Element Manager and initializing it for management of the relevant Network Elements The Element Manager can be started as a standalone application or as an integrated application. Starting the Element Manager. which describes how to install the Element Manager on the management computer. FSP 3000R7 R10. which describes how to initialize the Element Manager so you are ready to manage Network Elements. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential In integrated mode the Element Manager manages only one NE and is launched by the FSP Network Manager (FSP NM) or some other Network Management System. Initializing the Element Manager. The following topics are provided: Installing the Element Manager. You can install the Element Manager under the following operating systems: • • • MS Windows XP / MS Windows 7 Solaris 10 Screen resolution minimum: 800 * 600 For both operating systems the system requirement are: User Manual 31 . In standalone mode the Element Manager can manage multiple NEs. which describes how to start the Element Manager.Chapter 1 Getting Started This section describes how to get started using the Element Manager. This section describes how to get started using Element Manager in standalone mode.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Installing the Element Manager This section describes how to install the Element Manager on your management computer.

Up to version 9. 34 How to Install on a Windows Platform This instruction describes how to install the Element Manager on a Windows platform for the first time. 32 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. If you wish to install an upgrade.3 and onwards the files are stored in an application data area. In response. read “How to Upgrade on a Windows Platform” on p. From version 9. The ALLUSERSPROFILE environment variable is: • • C:\Documents and Settings\All Users on Windows XP C:\ProgramData on Windows 7 Requirements • • Ensure that you have administrator/power user rights for the computer you want to install Element Manager on. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Start the Element Manager. 35.Installing the Element Manager • • • Free HD capacity: 500 MB 2 GHz Pentium Processor 1 GB RAM The following supporting topics are provided: “How to Install on a Windows Platform” on p. A description of this can also be found in the release notes for the Element Manager. The Element Manager stores application data as files on the file system. Start the installation program FSP_3000R7_Element_Manager_v10_3_x_for_Windows. 33 “How to Uninstall” on p. in the %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\FSP 3000R7 Element Manager folder.exe In response an installation wizard will open. 34 instead. 33 “How to Upgrade on a Windows Platform” on p. as described in “Starting the Element Manager” on p.3.2 the files were stored in the installation directory. Step 3 Step 4 Follow the instructions from the installation wizard until it is completed. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Ensure that the computer fulfils the system requirements.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 32 “How to Install on a Solaris Platform” on p.3. No previous version of the Element Manager should be installed on the computer. the License window will display.

Follow all the installation instructions displayed on the screen. Uninstall any previous version of the FSP 3000R7 Element Manager Copy the installation tar file to a directory on your local hard drive.Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 5 Enter the license name and license key into the License window and select OK. End of Procedure How to Install on a Solaris Platform This instruction describes how to install the Element Manager on a Solaris platform. use Add/Remove Programs in the Control Panel. A description of this can also be found in the release notes for the Element Manager. 35. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 FSP 3000R7 R10. as described in “Starting the Element Manager” on p. Step 6 Ensure that the user(s) of the installed Element Manager have write permission to the application data folder %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\FSP 3000R7 Element Manager. User Manual 33 . Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 End of Procedure How to Uninstall This section gives necessary information to uninstall the Element Manager on either system platform. using the command suUntar the archive. Start the Element Manager in the background. Enter a valid license key. You shall have received the license information together with the executable file and release notes. Ensure that the computer fulfils the system requirements. Become root. using the command tar xf <tar file> Start the installation script. • In order to uninstall Element Manager on a Windows platform./install In response instructions will be displayed on the screen. using the command . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Ensure that you have administrator/power user rights for the computer you want to install Element Manager on. You shall have received the license information together with the executable file and release notes.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

back up the files containing the user accounts and license. How to Upgrade on a Windows Platform This instruction describes how to upgrade an Element Manager installation on a Windows platform.lic to a safe location.3. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .3 to R9.3 or higher. End of Procedure 34 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.3.3.3 80000014705 Issue: B. During the un-installation and installation in the previous steps any existing personal shortcuts were handled as follows: • • The un-installation process did not remove them. remove the installation directory with the rm -r command.xml and em.Installing the Element Manager • In order to uninstall Element Manager on a Solaris platform.3.3 to R9. 32. Step 5 If you are upgrading from an Element Manager version prior to R9. but the Element Manager will be started with parameters from the previous installation. they may still work.xml and em. This is typically C:\Program Files\ADVA Optical Networking\FSP 3000R7 Element Manager. 33. Edit any existing personal shortcuts to the previously installed Element Manager version so they point to the newly installed Element Manager version. The installation process did not update them. Install the new Element Manager version as described in “How to Install on a Windows Platform” on p. Do as follows: a) Use Windows Explorer or similar to navigate to sub-folder dat in the Element Manager installation folder.lic to the %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\FSP 3000R7 Element Manager \dat folder. copy the backed up files users. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Un-install your current Element Manager version as described in “How to Uninstall” on p. b) Copy the files users. This means that the Element Manager may be started with wrong memory settings. Procedure Step 1 If you are upgrading from an Element Manager version prior to R9.3 or higher. Say Yes to overwrite the existing files. If you do not edit such personal shortcuts.

If you are starting the Element Manager in Unix: Type /<install directory>/runEm & In response. User Manual 35 . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 3 Enter a user name and a password.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Chapter 1 Getting Started Starting the Element Manager This instruction describes how to start the Element Manager in standalone mode. the Logon dialog appears. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 If you are starting the Element Manager in Windows: Select Start -> Programs -> FSP Element Manager 10_3_x -> FSP Element Manager.1. the user name ADMIN and the password CHGME. The default user account has administrator access rights. FSP 3000R7 R10.

In response the Logon dialog displays information during the authentication period. End of Procedure 36 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the Element Manager opens. the user’s privilege level and the authentication type that was used. the user that is logged in. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . displaying information about the Element Manager version.Starting the Element Manager Step 4 Select Logon to continue. After authentication has completed successfully.

Back-up the Element Manager user files users. how to modify these parameters and how to delete a connection to an NE.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 57. 53. Only the NEs that you activate are selectable for User Manual 37 .xml. The files are typically located in one of these two locations: • • Element Manager versions prior to R9. You may add a number of NEs to the list of managed elements without activating them for management. It also describes how to enter parameters for the connection to these NEs. They will allow you to easily re-install the Element Manager in case of a computer crash.3. and em. 39. nodes. How to do this is described in “How to Add a Single IP Connection” on p. Change the default user account and password. Define the users of the Element Manager. These are the files containing your Element Manager user accounts.xml. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential End of Procedure The following supporting topics are provided: Defining NEs to Manage Accessing Trap Recipients Working with Element Manager User Accounts Defining NEs to Manage This section describes how to define which NEs the Element Manager shall manage. How to do this is described in “Accessing Trap Recipients” on p. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Define which NEs you shall manage.3. 59.Chapter 1 Getting Started Initializing the Element Manager This procedure describes what you must do in order to be ready to manage Network Elements with the Element Manager.lic to a safe location. your managed nodes and your Element Manager license. How to do this is described in “How to Add a User Name” on p. Ensure that the NEs are set up to communicate with Element Manager.3 or higher %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\FSP 3000R7 Element Manager \dat Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 FSP 3000R7 R10.3: C:\Program Files\ADVA Optical Networking\FSP 3000R7 Element Manager Element Manager versions R9. How to do this is described in “How to Change Your Password” on p.

Therefore. A warning message will also appear in the Response Log. This allows you to keep a long list of NEs.Initializing the Element Manager management via the Managed Element pane. The Element Manager disregards traps with sender identities that do not match any of the NEs that it is connected to. Reducing the number of activated NEs reduces the memory consumption. this results in a high memory consumption. When the memory consumption passes 90% of the memory allocated to the Element Manager. without needing to connect to other ones than the ones you wish to manage at the moment. The NEs send traps using the NE’s system IP address as the trap sender identity. known IP address or by letting the Element Manager discover all NEs in an address range. the Element Manager must connect to NEs using the NEs system IP addresses. When the number of activated NEs is large. The following topics are provided: “How to Add a Single IP Connection” on p. a warning window appears. The window will provide guidance on recovering from this situation. 51 “How to Delete IP Connections” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Either by adding a specific. The latter is practical if you need to add several NEs. and the Status bar memory indicator will turn red. There are two ways to add IP connections in the Element Manager. 46 “How to Modify IP Connections” on p. 52 FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential 38 User Manual . 39 “How to Discover all NEs in an IP Address Range” on p. 43 “How to Export and Import the Managed Elements List” on p.

see “How to Modify IP Connections” on p. To open the Managed Elements window. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 39 . 51.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Chapter 1 Getting Started How to Add a Single IP Connection This instruction describes how to add a single Network Element to the Element Manager’s list of managed elements. In response. FSP 3000R7 R10. It is also possible to add new IP connections by selecting the Add button in the Managed Elements window. Procedure Step 1 From the Main Menu select File -> New. the Add Managed Element window appears.

in the Port field. Ensure that the IP address you enter is not a broadcast or subnet address. • If you select SNMPv1. the Element Manager sends the message again. However. This value must be larger than the timeout value. in the Polling Interval field. the polling interval value should be increased to reduce the total load on the network. • If you select SNMPv3. c) Enter the number of seconds the Element Manager shall wait for a response after sending a message to the NE. 40 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. and for ring group switching. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . in the Retry field. the OSPF router ID. b) Enter the UDP port number that the NE Software (SNMP agent) occupies for communicating with the Element Manager. If no response is received after this number of seconds. Normally the default value for this item is adequate. e) Use the Polling Status drop-down list to specify whether Element Manager shall poll the NE or not. in heavily loaded networks. Element Manager will use SNMPv1 settings when accessing the NE. Go to Step 7 and configure these settings. However. in the Timeout field. This is by default 161. in heavily loaded networks. you should also increase the polling interval value to reduce the total load on the network. If you do increase the number of retries. Do as follows: a) Enter the system IP address of the NE you want to connect to in the IP Address field.3 80000014705 Issue: B. This value must be less than the polling interval value. The Element Manager polling mechanism only checks whether the SNMP Agent responds to “Get” requests.Initializing the Element Manager Step 2 Enter the relevant SNMP parameters for the new managed Network Element in the SNMP Parameters section. d) Enter the maximum number of times the Element Manager shall retry sending a message. Step 3 Use the radio buttons in the SNMP Access section to specify how the Element Manager shall access the NE’s SNMP agent. Element Manager will use SNMPv3 settings when accessing the NE. If no response is recevied after this number of retries. and is used as the SNMP trap sender address. f) Enter the number of seconds there shall be between subsequent polling requests. the number of retries should be increased to ensure that contact with the NE is not lost. the network element concludes that the NE is not responding. Normally the default value for this item is adequate. The system IP address is the loop-back IP address for the NE. Go to Step 4 and configure these settings.

b) Enter the community string the Element Manager shall use when sending SNMP Set requests to the NE. User Manual 41 . in the Write Community field. FSP 3000R7 R10. Do as follows: a) Enter the community string the Element Manager shall use when sending SNMP Get requests to the NE. Step 5 Enter the relevant SNMP parameters for the new managed Network Element in the SNMPv1 Access section.Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 4 If you previously specified use of SNMPv1: The SNMPv1 Access section will appear in the Add Managed Element window. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 6 Step 7 Continue from Step 9. If you previously specified use of SNMPv3: The SNMPv3 Access section will appear in the Add Managed Element window. in the Read Community field.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

previously: The authentication type that will be used is MD5. Do as follows: a) Enter the user name the Element Manager shall use when sending SNMP Get and Set requests to the NE.3 80000014705 Issue: B. this means that authentication and encryption will not be performed. using the Security Level drop-down list. this means that authentication will be performed. • Auth No Priv. If you want to activate the new NE for management now: Do as follows: a) Select the NE from the list of NEs in the Managed Elements window. c) If you selected Auth No Priv or Auth Priv. in the User field. Enter the privacy password in the Privacy Password field. In response the NE’s activated state will be indicated by in the Managed Elements window and the NE will appear in the Managed Elements pane. Enter the authentication password in the Authentication Password field. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential End of Procedure 42 User Manual . • Auth Priv.Initializing the Element Manager Step 8 Enter the relevant SNMP parameters for the new managed Network Element in the SNMPv3 Access section. but no encryption. b) Select the Activate button. b) Select the security level. d) If you selected Auth Priv previously: The privacy type that will be used is AES 128. The following options are available: • No Auth No Priv. Step 9 Step 10 Select OK to finish adding NEs or Cancel to abort. FSP 3000R7 R10. this means that authentication and encryption will be performed.

the Managed Elements window opens. Only NEs running SNMPv1 are discovered. To add NEs running SNMPv3. 39. Each IP connection is configured individually.3 80000014705 Issue: B. and only NEs communicating over SNMPv1 can be added this way. Procedure Step 1 Select Configuration -> Managed Elements.Chapter 1 Getting Started How to Discover all NEs in an IP Address Range This instruction describes how to discover all NEs in a specific IP address range and add selected NEs to the Element Manager’s list of managed elements. User Manual 43 . see “How to Add a Single IP Connection” on p. In response. FSP 3000R7 R10. The right pane displays SNMP settings and polling details (on separate tabs) for the selected NE IP address. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The left pane lists any existing IP connections.

the Element Manager sends the message again. specify the parameters that Element Manager shall use when contacting the IP addresses specified above. This parameter directly influences how long time the discovery process will take. Step 3 Step 4 In the SNMP Configuration section. b) The discovery process will only be able to contact NEs that actually use this port. in the Timeout field. This parameter directly influences how long time the discovery process will take.3 80000014705 Issue: B. If no response is received. d) Enter the community string the Element Manager shall use when sending SNMP Get requests to the potential NE IP addresses. The maximum value accepted is 60 seconds. The maximum range is 255 addresses. in the Read Community field.Enter the number of seconds the Element Manager shall wait for a response after sending a message to the potential NE IP addresses. the Discovery window appears. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential In the Discovery Configuration section. The maximum number of retries is 3. . and the menu option Discovery. c) Enter the maximum number of times the Element Manager shall retry sending a message to the potential NE IP addresses. The discovery process will only be able to contact NEs that also use this community string. Do as follows: a) Enter the NE port that Element Manager shall use when contacting potential NEs. 44 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.Initializing the Element Manager Step 2 Select the button. in the Retries field. specify the address range by entering information in the Start Address and End Address fields. in the Port field.

by selecting the Start button. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Specify the SNMP parameters to use for the selected IP addresses. As soon as a NE is discovered. Step 8 Step 9 Select OK to apply the settings or Cancel to abort addition of the selected IP addresses. Step 7 FSP 3000R7 R10. the Element Manager will search the specified address range for NEs. Select the Add Selected button.3 80000014705 Issue: B. End of Procedure User Manual 45 . its IP address. The Port and Read Community parameters have already been found to work during the discovery process. name and description are displayed in the table in the lower part of the Discovery window. If you wish to terminate the discovery before it is finished. 39. Each of these parameters are described in “How to Add a Single IP Connection” on p. In response. Step 6 From the table of discovered NEs. Element Manager will not be able to contact the NE(s). If you change these. You can perform this step before the discovery process is entirely completed. close the Discovery window by clicking the button. Progress is indicated by a percentage below the table. The added IP addresses are now displayed in the table of the Managed Elements window. select the NE that you wish to monitor and configure via the Element Manager.Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 5 Start the discovery process. It is possible to select several NEs by <Shift> or <Ctrl> clicking.

The following instructions are provided Exporting the list Importing the list Exporting the list Procedure Step 1 Select Configuration -> Managed Elements.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Initializing the Element Manager How to Export and Import the Managed Elements List This section describes how to export and import the list of managed elements. In response. 46 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. the Managed Elements window opens. This allows one user to share his/her list of managed NEs with one or more other users. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .

In response. the Export Managed Elements window appears. End of Procedure FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 3 Enter a new file name and file location into the relevant fields and select Save.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 47 . and the menu option Export. Make a note of where you save the file so you can find it later.Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 2 Select the button.

the Managed Elements window opens. In response. Step 2 Select the button. the Import Managed Elements wizard appears. and the menu option Import. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .Initializing the Element Manager Importing the list Procedure Step 1 Select Configuration -> Managed Elements.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 48 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.

In response the Import Managed Elements wizard content changes.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 3 Select Browse to specify the location of the file you wish to import. Step 4 Step 5 Navigate to the file location and select the relevant file. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 49 . Select Open. FSP 3000R7 R10. In response the Import Managed Elements wizard content changes.

In response the Import Managed Elements wizard content changes. FSP 3000R7 R10. Select Finish to continue. or Cancel to cancel the import.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential End of Procedure 50 User Manual .Initializing the Element Manager Step 6 Select Next to continue. Step 7 Step 8 Specify which NEs you want to import by placing a check mark in the Import column.

Select an IP connection in the left pane. In response. the Managed Elements window opens.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The left pane lists all existing IP connections. Use the corresponding radio buttons above the left pane. The right pane displays SNMP settings and polling details for each selected NE IP address. Each IP connection is configured individually. Procedure Step 1 Select Configuration -> Managed Elements. SNMPv3 or both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 shall be displayed in the left pane.Chapter 1 Getting Started How to Modify IP Connections This instruction describes how to modify the connection settings for a managed NE. FSP 3000R7 R10. In response the SNMP settings and polling details for this NE are displayed in the right pane. Step 2 Specify whether NEs supporting SNMPv1. Step 3 User Manual 51 .

Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Modify each field as necessary. End of Procedure How to Delete IP Connections This instruction describes how to stop managing a NE.3 80000014705 Issue: B. End of Procedure 52 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.Initializing the Element Manager Step 4 Select Modify. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Select the NE that you wish to delete the connection to. Select OK to complete the modifications. 39. In response. Select Close to finish your work with IP connections. Select File -> Delete from the Main Menu Select OK to complete or Cancel to abort deletion. the Modify Settings window appears. The fields are described in “How to Add a Single IP Connection” on p.

FSP 3000R7 allows a maximum of ten IP addresses to be entered into an NE trap recipients table. the poll interval could be long. However. for example in order to reduce network traffic. 56 FSP 3000R7 R10. The following supporting topics are provided: “The Add Trap Recipient Window” on p. 56 “The Delete Trap Recipient Window” on p. 55 “The Modify Trap Recipient Window” on p. even if it does not receive the traps when they are sent. However. The NE will send traps to the IP addresses registered in the trap recipients table.Chapter 1 Getting Started Accessing Trap Recipients This instruction describes how to enter the management computer. then traps from that NE will not be registered by the Element Manager. The Element Manager polls the NE regularly and reads traps from it.3 80000014705 Issue: B. so the Element Manager will be kept up to date. The NE uses its system IP address as sender identification. or another computer. into an NE’s trap recipients table. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 53 . the Element Manager discards received traps that do not have a sender identity that it can find in its Managed Elements table. so if an NE is not added to the Managed Elements table with its system IP address.

3 80000014705 Issue: B. the Trap Recipients window appears. For SNMPv1 this is called Community and displays the community string in the SNMP traps to this trap destination. See “The Add Trap Recipient Window” on p. Modify and Delete as appropriate and as described in “The Modify Trap Recipient Window” on p. 56. Enter the management computer running the Element Manager by selecting the Add <management computer IP address> button. In response.Initializing the Element Manager Procedure Step 1 Select an NE and then select Configuration -> Trap Recipients from the Main Menu. The dialog window contains a table with three columns: Column Name Address Port Community / User Name Description Displays the IP addresses of the computers that are already in the NE’s trap recipients table. 56 and “The Delete Trap Recipient Window” on p. Displays the UDP port number that the NE sends traps through. The title bar of the dialog window shows the name of the NE. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . By default this is UDP port 162. Enter any relevant IP address by using the command buttons Add. Step 2 Step 3 Activate use of either SNMP version 1 or version 3 traps. Alternatively click the button. Step 4 54 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. by selecting the SNMPv1 or SNMPv3 radio buttons. For SNMPv3 this column is called User Name. 55. This column has a different name depending on which SNMP version you have selected.

Step 6 End of Procedure User Manual 55 .Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 5 Select Refresh to update the information in the trap recipients table or select Close to finish working with the trap recipients table.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The user name you enter here. set a value for Community. FSP 3000R7 R10. • For SNMPv1. modify this as needed. You should only choose SNMPv3 if SNMPv3 is used for the NE. In the Version drop-down list. has to be identical to the community that is used for the NE. • For SNMPv3. enter the IP address of the computer you wish to add to the trap recipient table. The community you enter here. select SNMPv1 or SNMPv3. Suggested value for Port is displayed. This instruction assumes that you have already opened the Trap Recipients window. End of Procedure The Add Trap Recipient Window This instruction describes how to enter information when adding an IP address to a NE’s trap recipients table. has to be identical to the user name that is used for the NE. set a value for User Name. The last field depends on which SNMP version you have selected. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 In the Address field. Select OK to apply or Cancel to abort. Procedure Step 1 Select the Add button or Add <management computer IP address> button.

Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant IP address in the trap recipients table (you may delete any IP address). © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential End of Procedure The Delete Trap Recipient Window This instruction describes how to delete an entry in an NE’s trap table. Select Delete.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 3 Select OK to apply or Cancel to abort. FSP 3000R7 R10. You may now modify the community string settings. This instruction assumes that you have already opened the Trap Recipients window.Initializing the Element Manager The Modify Trap Recipient Window This instruction describes how to modify a NE’s trap table entry. Step 3 Select Yes to delete or No to abort. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select an entry in the trap recipients table. Select Modify. This instruction assumes that you have already opened the Trap Recipients window. End of Procedure 56 User Manual .

58 How to Add a User Name A user with Administrator level user may add or delete user names for the Element Manager. with the following topics: “How to Change Your Password” on p. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The Current user section displays information about the user who is currently logged in.Chapter 1 Getting Started Working with Element Manager User Accounts Here you will find information about administering User Accounts in the FSP 3000R7 Element Manager. 57 “How to Delete a User Name” on p. Procedure Step 1 From the Main Menu select Security -> User Manager. FSP 3000R7 R10. In response.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the User Manager window appears. 59 “How to Change Other Users’ Passwords” on p. 59 “How to Add a User Name” on p. and which authentication was used when logging in. User Manual 57 .

This is sometimes necessary. Retype the password to confirm spelling. In response. Administrator is the security level for the first user. the User Manager window appears. By default Monitor is selected when you open this window. Retype Password Security Level Step 3 Select OK to finish or Cancel to abort. upon his/her first logon.g. Operator or Administrator. End of Procedure How to Delete a User Name A user with Administrator level may delete user names for the Element Manager. This may be changed later by the actual user. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 From the Main Menu select Security -> User Manager. This level can be Monitor. 58 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Select the user name to delete. Select the security level for the new user. Select Delete. Upon initial logon to the Element Manager. Any user who no longer is granted access to the Element Manager should also have his/her user name deleted. 77 for information on requirements to the password. e.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Initializing the Element Manager Step 2 Select the Add button. when a user has forgotten his/her password. See “About Security” on p. Select Yes in the Confirmation window. Field Name User Name Password Description Enter the user’s identity in the Element Manager. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Enter an initial password. the user name must have minimum 2 characters.

3 80000014705 Issue: B. End of Procedure User Manual 59 . Select Change to apply the changes. and retype it. or • From the Main Menu select Security -> User Manager and then select Change Password. FSP 3000R7 R10. Instead the administrator must delete the particular user name and add it again with a new password. In response the Change Password window opens. End of Procedure How to Change Other Users’ Passwords It is not possible for a user with Administrator level to change passwords for other user names directly.Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 4 Select Close to finish. How to Change Your Password All users should periodically change his/her password to prevent unauthorized access to the Element Manager. Procedure Step 1 Do one of the following: • From the Main Menu select Security -> Change Password. then enter your new password. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 2 Step 3 Enter your present password to prove your identification.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .60 Initializing the Element Manager User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

This color reflects the most severe of all current alarms of any of the underlying components.3 80000014705 Issue: B. power and fan may be selected with the mouse. which describes how you get help when working with the Element Manager. About Security.Chapter 2 Basics of the Element Manager This section gives an introduction to the Element Manager. the graphical view gives an overview over these by outlining the affected graphical component in color. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential About the Graphical User Interface. The following topics are provided: Overview. The operator may manage NEs in a simple and intuitive way using the Element Manager point-and-click graphical user interface. Graphical components representing NEs. Overview The Element Manager provides remote configuration and monitoring of one or more SNMP Network Elements (NEs). The appropriate management functions for a selected component are available in the Main Menu or the context sensitive popup menu. Getting Help. which describes how the Element Manager communicates with the NEs. which describes briefly how the Element Manager works. its architecture and how it operates. User Manual 61 . the main features it offers. It describes each component of the GUI. which describes the security features for the Element Manager. When alarms occur. FSP 3000R7 R10. which describes the Element Manager’s graphical user interface (GUI) in detail. the features it offers and how it communicates with the NEs. which information it displays and how to customize the display. ports. by providing a general description of it. About Communicating with NEs. The Element Manager can be used: • As a standalone application.

3 80000014705 Issue: B. The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is used.Overview • Integrated with the FSP Network Manager or other Network Management Systems (such as HP OpenView). . All Element Manager views are updated immediately upon receiving SNMP traps (event information) from NEs. Figure 1: Overview of SNMP Communication FSP Element Manager UDP port Computer Ethernet NE 1 NE 2 62 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. SNMP defines how a network management system shall communicate with an NE. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The Element Manager occupies a UDP (User Datagram Protocol) port for communication with NEs.

Chapter 2 Basics of the Element Manager About the Graphical User Interface The Graphical User Interface (GUI) has various areas as shown in the illustration below. Figure 2: Managed Example of Element Manager Main Screen Information pane Parameter pane Menu Bar FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Status bar Entities pane Equipment pane Response Log User Manual 63 .3 80000014705 Issue: B.

Unavailable commands are dimmed. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . a Network Element. Select a command by left-clicking. a related window with necessary information and controls related to the command will appear. shelf or a module. Figure 3: Context Sensitive Pop-up Menu Context sensitive pop-up menus give quick access to frequently used commands. 64 “The Toolbar” on p. 67 “Response Log” on p. In response to a command. Which commands are available in the present situation depends on the object you have selected. A dimmed command indicates that the command does not apply to the present situation or that you need to make a selection or complete another action before choosing the command.About the Graphical User Interface Each area is described in detail under the following topics: “The Menu Bar” on p. 66 “The Information Pane” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Each command is started on selection. 65 “The Network Element Pane” on p. These menus pop up when you select an object and click the right mouse button. 75 The Menu Bar The menu bar contains access to groups of related features via a submenu of executable commands. 64 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. 74 “Status Bar” on p.g. just as you would do from the Main Menu. e.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Configure trap recipients Closes all open windows Displays the previous open window Displays the next open window Displays the About dialog User Manual 65 .3 80000014705 Issue: B. It contains a set of tool buttons that give the operator quick access to commonly used commands. Figure 4: Overview of Toolbar Icons Displays the Equipment Window of the selected Network Element Displays the User Manager Change password for the present user Add or remove Managed Elements Updates stored management data of the selected NE Shows the inventory list for the whole NE Shows the list of current alarms of the selected NE or module Displays the Event Log Displays the Cross Connections window FSP 3000R7 R10. The Toolbar is displayed or removed by selecting View -> Toolbar from the Main Menu.Chapter 2 Basics of the Element Manager The Toolbar The Toolbar is a fixed area at the main window's top edge. By holding the mouse pointer over a button a ToolTip will appear with an description of the action the button represents.

This could be due to DCN problems or a heavily loaded NE. The icon is removed when the NE is resynchronized. When an NE is selected. Together these symbols and icons give information about the NE. For information about the alarm color coding. To enter the NE trap table see “Accessing Trap Recipients” on p. Below each symbol one or more icons are displayed together with the NE name or IP address. If no alarms are present. This icon indicates that the Element Manager does not get any response from the NE when it sends SNMP Get-Requests. This information in this view is continually updated. This icon indicates that the connected NE is unknown to the Element Manager. Element Manager indicates this by displaying an outline border on the NE symbol. The Element Manager has not been able to recover lost traps from the NE. This icon indicates that no event messages are sent from the NE to the Element Manager. This icon indicates that lost traps are detected. This may for example be the case if the agent software on the NE is not running. This occurs when the IP address of the computer running the Element Manager has not been entered in the NE trap table. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . NEs in the Network Element View are selected by pointing and clicking. If the Element Manager cannot get the NE name information. and are represented by symbols. This icon is always present and the color indicates the highest severity of the present alarms on this NE. The following symbols and icons are used in Network Element View: Figure 5: Overview of Network Element Pane Icons This icon indicates that the NE operates normally. It is recommended to resynchronize the NE to make sure the management data is up to date. To toggle between display of the NE name and the NE’s IP address.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The NE name shown is the sysName (according to RFC 1213) of the NE. the icon is green. 66 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. it displays the IP address of the NE instead. 53.About the Graphical User Interface The Network Element Pane All NEs you have defined connections to are shown in this view. see Table 10. select View -> Name or View -> Address from the Main Menu.

right-click on that NE’s tab in the Information pane and select Close. right-click on any NE’s tab in the Information pane and select Close All. Figure 6: Example of the Information Pane. To display information about an NE in the Information pane. In response the Information pane will display all information about this NE on one page. Alternatively you select the NE in Network Element pane and then select View -> Equipment from the Main Menu. You may display information for several NEs. To close all presently open Information panes.Chapter 2 Basics of the Element Manager The Information Pane The Information pane consists of the Entities pane. by sacrificing size of the Entities pane. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Figure 6 shows the standard layout of the Information pane. the Parameter pane and the Equipment pane. Use the Toggle Layout field of the Entities pane to do this. each will have one dedicated page in the Information pane. This layout can be toggled in order to get a larger view of the Parameter pane.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Default Layout FSP 3000R7 R10. User Manual 67 . double-click on the NE in Network Element View. To close the Information pane for one NE. Each page is selectable by a tab in the bottom of the Information pane.

72 “The Parameter Pane” on p. Alternative Layout The Entities pane. the Parameter pane and the Equipment pane are each described under the following topics: “The Entity Pane” on p. 72 68 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. 68 “The Equipment Pane” on p. 70 “AID Names” on p.About the Graphical User Interface Figure 7: Example of the Information Pane. the Tree tab and the Racks tab. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . 71 “Entity Position” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 69 “The Racks View” on p. Descriptions of these tabs and the information contained in them are described under the following topics: “The Tree View” on p. 73 The Entity Pane The Entity pane consists of two tabs.

Each entity is identified by its Access Identifier (AID) address and its type. Tree View click to toggle layout click to collapse indication of entity’s operational state or secondary state. 72. Figure shows an example of the Tree view. Figure 9: Entity Identification Examples AID name alarm ball entity position Entity type symbol for graphical identification of the entity. 71. OTU or LANIP. This does not indicate that it indeed can be provisioned.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Use the list to select the entities that you wish to work with. If however a pluggable transceiver is physically in place. 72. see “AID Names” on p. The entity type can for example be NCU. click to expand FSP 3000R7 R10. a colored condition ball indicates the current condition with the highest severity that is present for that entity. In front of each entity. User Manual 69 . For an overview of AID names. In some cases. the Entities pane will display the equipped pluggable transceiver in this list. Figure 8: Element Manager Entity Pane. The color code is described in “Monitoring Faults” on p. the configuration of a module may not allow provisioning of a pluggable transceiver for a port. The AID address consists of the entity’s AID name and the position of the entity in the system. 369. AID names are described in Table 1 and entity positions in “Entity Position” on p. and for an overview of the positions entities can have see “Entity Position” on p.Chapter 2 Basics of the Element Manager The Tree View The Tree view of the Entities pane displays equipment and facilities in a hierarchical list.

The view is only used to navigate to the shelves and see their position relative to each other. Figure 10: Element Manager Entity Pane. The Racks view shows the order of the shelves from the bottom and up and does not show any empty spaces between the shelves. Rack View The view shows the position of the shelves in the racks. it is grey. 70 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. When a shelf is selected. 72. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Set the appropriate values in the Modify window that appears.About the Graphical User Interface The Racks View The Racks view is a graphic representation of the shelves and racks of the Network Element. If you want to change the position of the shelves in the racks. The view only shows the shelves that are positioned in racks. you must go to the Config tab in the Parameter pane and select the Modify button. letter and severity is shown in Table 10 and also explained in “The Equipment Pane” on p. The Unplaced shelfs drop down list contains shelves that are not yet positioned in the racks.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Select the Config tab in the Parameter pane. You can select the shelves to see the related information in the Parameter and Equipment panes. Select the Modify button. The symbols indicate alarms for the entities. You can position an unplaced shelf in the following way: 1 2 3 4 Select the shelf in the Unplaced shelfs drop down list. The relationship between color. The color and letter inside the symbol indicate the severity of the alarm.

For example of type E100Fx or LANIP. DCN Facility. Equipment. A CH (channel) entity is dependent on a MOD (module) or PL (SFP Transceiver) entity. Facility sub-level. Higher layer signal container. DCN facility. Optical multiplexed facility that carries the multiplexed signal. DCN facility. DCN cross-connect between DCN facilities. Facility. Supervisory channel. DCN Facility. Fan control unit. Facility. Broadcast IP Facility. Thus. DCN facility. Facility sub-level. Facility. Equipment.3 80000014705 Issue: B. DCN facility. OTU GCC0. ODU GCC2. For example of type LANIP. Channel on the client or network port that carries the service(s). Fan assembly.Chapter 2 Basics of the Element Manager AID Names An overview of the main AID names that the system supports are listed in Table 1. Protection group for optical multiplex signal. Facility sub-level. serial or USB interface. Facility. SFP Transceiver (plug) Facility. DCN Facility. Equipment. Table 1: Supporting Entity AID name NE SHELF MOD Entity AID Name Examples Dependent Entity AID name SHELF FCU MOD FAN PL CH OM SC LINK CRS-DCN LAN SH IP TIFI TIFO CH SH VCH SDCC LDCC PDCC GCC0 GCC1 GCC2 FFP_CH FFP-OM STS1 VC4 VC3 CRS-DCN Description Equipment. This table also shows the dependencies between entities. DCN facility. External input. Internal communication between shelves. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential PL CH OM VCH LINK User Manual 71 . Facility. Facility. DCN cross-connect FSP 3000R7 R10. Facility. Protection group for channels. Higher layer signal container. SONET Section DCC. SONET Path DCC. Equipment. Facility. Higher layer signal container. For example of type PPP IP. Facility. DCN facility. Internal communication between shelves. the MOD or PL entities support the CH entity. All shelves. DCN facility. ODU GCC1. Virtual channel that models an intermediate mapping of facilities into a higher layer signal container DCN facility. Channel on the client or network port that carries the service(s). Group of SC entities. All modules. SONET Line DCC. External output.

.<slot #> -<port> <VC4 timeslot>|<VC4 timeslot> . C. Clicking on the symbol leads to the Parameter pane displaying the State tab/list for that module.<instance>. Instance is always 1. The syntax depends on the AID name. 1NE. NE. For SH entities the syntax is <shelf #> . U. GCC2 and EOC entities the syntax is <shelf #> . PDCC. LDCC.<slot #>. GCC0. Ports can be: • • • • N. fans and modules are selectable.Cn for client side ports. SDCC. they are indicated by a symbol over the managed component.n.<slot #> -<port> . where there are n client ports to which they may be allocated.. 1NW. 2NW and 2NE for network ports. GCC1. Instance can be 1. For OM entities the syntax is <shelf #> . Shelves. NW and NE for network ports and C. Ports can be N. C1. UW. and X for internal inter-shelf connections on the SCU card.<VC3 timeslot>|<STS1 timeslot>. UE for upgrade ports. and the Parameter pane will display information for the selected entity here. Ports can be: For VC4.About the Graphical User Interface Entity Position The entity’s position in the Network Element is indicated by the shelf. The color and a letter inside the symbol indicate the severity of the 72 User Manual .<slot #> -<port>. slot. FSP 3000R7 R10. C1.<slot #> -<port>. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The Equipment Pane The Equipment pane is a graphical representation of the Network Element. For CH. NW.Cn for client side ports. SC. D. Figure 11: Equipment Pane If there are any alarms/conditions present for any of the managed components. For LAN entities the syntax is <shelf #> .<slot #> -<instance>. NW indicates the West network port while NE indicates the east network port.<slot #> -<port>. For MOD entities the syntax is <shelf #> . U. VC3 AND STS1 entities the syntax is <shelf #> . port and instance numbers. For VCH entities the syntax is <shelf #> .3 80000014705 Issue: B.

FSP 3000R7 R10. When there are alarms/conditions present with different severities. The relationship between color. Upon selection of an entity in the Entities pane. are used: • • • • • • • State Fault Config Operation Info Monitoring Inventory However. The Parameter Pane The Parameter pane is the main source of information in the Element Manager. the number of visible tabs varies according to the entity selected and whether or not equipment is installed. a tab view and a list view. Each parameter group is then displayed either on a separate tab. Figure 12: Example of Parameter pane. When several alarms/conditions are present: • • • The number indicates how many alarms/conditions of the highest severity are present. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Click to modify editable parameters on the visible page. The following parameter groups. letter and severity is shown in Table 10. Tab view Tabs for selecting parameClick to toggle layout of ter group to display Parameter pane. User Manual 73 . The parameter pane has two display options. or in a separate list. The color and letter of the most severe of these alarms/conditions are displayed. Figure 12 shows the Parameter pane with tab view active. the relevant parameters and attributes describing this entity are displayed group-wise in the Entities pane.Chapter 2 Basics of the Element Manager alarm.3 80000014705 Issue: B. this is indicated by the “+“ sign.

shows the date and time at which the entry was logged. right-click in the Response Log and select Print or Save. Date and time data is stored internally in the XML/CSV file in the following format: yyyy-mm-dd and hh:mm:ss:xxx. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . and then selecting View -> Clear Messages. The responses or results of user operations appear as log entries.3 80000014705 Issue: B. indicates the location where the operation was performed or where the event took place. To print. or positive acknowledgements of successful operations. The default Parameter pane view is the tab view. 74 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Warning or Error. You can also remove the window by right-clicking the Response Log and selecting Hide. You can also clear all messages by selecting it in the Response Log.About the Graphical User Interface You can toggle between these two options. Figure 13: Parameter Pane. or save the response log. These entries can either be error messages indicating that the operation failed. by selecting the Toggle Layout text. The window is displayed or removed by selecting View -> Messages on the Main Menu. Figure 14: Response Log Column Name Type Time Source Description Description of log entry can be Information. You clear the presently displayed messages by right-clicking in the Response Log and selecting Clear All. Otherwise the fault timestamps may be converted incorrectly. tells you what happened. The response log can be exported to both the XML and CSV format. List View Click to display tab view Close Group Open Group Response Log This window presents information such as notifications related to user operations and occurring events on the connected NEs. where xxx indicates three digits for milli-seconds. Opening an exported response log file requires that the local regional settings for date and time on the computer you are using are the same as were used when the XML/CSV file was created.

if relevant: • Left-click the symbol on the Status Bar. or crash.Chapter 2 Basics of the Element Manager Status Bar The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the main window. Right-click on the NE tab in Information pane and select Unplug. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential In order to release memory. Upon start-up a certain amount of memory is allocated to the Element Manager. the Element Manager may freeze. Closing one instance of the Element Manager fixes the problem. If more than 90% of the allocated memory is used. The same applies when pointing to a tool button. The command button for the Garbage collector. 75 Displaying Several NE Information Panes Simultaneously Sometimes it is advantageous to view equipment for two or more NEs at the same time. This is also indicated in the Message Log. Indicates that UDP port 162. which the Element Manager listens to for SNMP traps. when you point to a command on a submenu. Also. this is normally due to another Element Manager already running.3 80000014705 Issue: B. See also Appendix A: Communication Ports. Indicates the total memory allocated to Element Manager as well as how much memory is currently used. You may also manually trigger the Garbage Collector. The Status Bar is displayed or removed by selecting View -> Status Bar on the Main Menu. a Garbage Collector is provided. Reducing the number of activated managed elements will help. It runs automatically at regular intervals. a short description of this command is displayed in the left end of the Status Bar. is occupied. FSP 3000R7 R10. This amount is displayed in the right side of the Status bar along with the currently used amount of memory. the bar will change color to red. The following topics are provided: “Displaying Several NE Information Panes Simultaneously” on p. Element Manager allows you to “unplug” the Information panes from the Element Manager main window so that you can position them as you wish on your screen. It shows the most severe alarm registered in the FSP3000R7. close it. The icons used on the Status Bar are: Figure 15: Status Bar Icons The color indicates the most severe present alarm present on the connected NEs using a standardized color scheme as described in Table 10. When the Message Log shows “Error binding to Trap Port 162”. User Manual 75 . No more managed elements can be activated in this situation. When you are finished working with this Information pane. When the memory consumption is too high.

the NE must be entered into the Element Manager with its system IP address. a red cross is displayed on top of the 76 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. The entered IP connections are stored in a file and this file is read at the next start-up of the Element Manager. Figure 16: Connections between NEs and Element Manager FSP 3000 EM UDP port Computer IP address Ethernet IP address IP address NE 1 UDP port NE SW (SNMP Agent) NE 2 UDP port NE SW (SNMP Agent) Figure 16 illustrates necessary information for establishing IP connections between the Element Manager and NEs. That is. or if the NE Software does not respond. and the IP address of the computer running the Element Manager must be entered in the NE’s trap recipients table. the Element Manager will automatically read management data from the NE and display an icon for it in the NE View. If this IP address is not in the NE’s trap recipients table. event and response messages from the NEs back to the management system. the Element Manager periodically sends SNMP Get-requests to the NEs’ Software (SNMP agent). The connection is lost if the Ethernet cable between the Element Manager computer and the NE is removed. In order for an Element Manager to continually receive SNMP traps from a NE. using their system IP address as the sender identity. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . In this case you can manually update this information. Hence the IP addresses are available also after an upgrade of the Element Manager. you must enter their system IP addresses. This table defines for the NE where to send traps to. When an IP connection to an NE is established. the trap information displayed by the Element Manager reflects the state of the NE at connection time.3 80000014705 Issue: B.About Communicating with NEs About Communicating with NEs The Element Manager manages each NE via SNMP. To communicate with the NEs. That may be satisfactory if you seldom connect to this NE. configuration and request messages from the management system to the NEs and alarms. The other management functions available from Element Manager are not dependant on the trap recipients table entry and will hence function normally. NEs send information to the Element Manager in the form of SNMP traps. If the connection to an NE is lost. This connection carries control. Likewise. the icon is removed when its corresponding IP connection is removed. The Element Manager checks its connections to NEs by polling.

78 FSP 3000R7 R10. Then the Element Manager re-synchronizes itself with the NE to update the management data stored in the NE. defining the user's rights. User Manual 77 . The Element Manager will continue to poll the NE and will remove the red cross when the connection is re-established. The page layout is valid for all sections. or by centralized authentication using Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS).Chapter 2 Basics of the Element Manager associated icon in the NE View. Each Element Manager user has a unique name for identification and a password for authentication. This list may be expanded and collapsed. Getting Help Open the Help window by selecting Help -> Help Topics from the Main Menu. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Security Levels The following security levels are provided: Administrator Users with this security level have access rights to the entire functionality of the Element Manager. the local password file is tried next. this authentication method is tried first (first priority). 77 “Local Authentication” on p. The following sections are provided: “Security Levels” on p. with exception of the commands to add or delete a user. Upon initial logon to the Element Manager this is the security level for the default user. If RADIUS authentication has been enabled for the Element Manager. you must log on to the Element Manager. The left pane in the Help window contains the table of contents in a tree-fashioned list.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Operator Users with this security level have the same rights as the Administrator. There are icons for setting up the page layout and for printing the displayed section. including adding and deleting users from the Element Manager. 78 “Centralized Authentication” on p. Authentication will be done either against the local password file. About Security In order to avoid unauthorized access to the NEs. Each user is assigned to a specific security level. Select a section from the list and the text will be displayed in the right pane.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential PS 78 User Manual . In order to use RADIUS authentication and SNMP access profiles. This sequence of priority is not user-configurable. This is the user name ADMIN with the password CHGME. one user account is defined on the Element Manager. if any have been defined. This makes RADIUS authentication a flexible authentication method. the Element Manager will use the local password file. It these too fail.About Security Monitor Users with this security level have the same rights as the Operator with exception of the commands to change settings on the NE. the Element Manager uses one or more SNMP access profiles when accessing the SNMP agents of the NEs that are managed by the Element Manager.1 and the security level Administrator. For security reasons the default password should be changed after installation of the Element Manager. If this fails. it will attempt to use the second and then third RADIUS server. see “Working with Element Manager User Accounts” on p. Up to 3 RADIUS severs can be configured. Local Authentication Initially. If RADIUS authentication has been enabled. Each user only needs one user name and one password for all network elements. Note Password requirements: • • The password must have minimum 6 characters The password is not case-sensitive. The user profiles are maintained in a central database. the Element Manager will attempt to use the first listed RADIUS server for authentication.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The Administrator user can manage user accounts from the User Manager window. the following requirements must be met: • • • • at least one RADIUS server is configured to support the Element Manager the RADIUS server is reachable for the Element Manager RADIUS user accounts with belonging passwords have been defined on the RADIUS server the Element Manager is enabled to use RADIUS authentication FSP 3000R7 R10. 57. and any RADIUS server application can be used. Centralized Authentication The Element Manager supports the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) protocol based on RFC2865 for centralized authentication. and RADIUS automatically recognizes the properties that are assigned to each RADIUS user. In combination with RADIUS authentication. RADIUS allows authentication of users by communicating with a central server using the RADIUS protocol.

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B. see Appendix C: RADIUS Authentication Setup for instructions. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 79 .Chapter 2 Basics of the Element Manager • one or more SNMP access profiles have been defined and installed on the Element Manager The administrator of the NE management should ensure these requirements are met for all users.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .80 About Security User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

and Cross Connections. which contains the instructions for creating DCN cross connections. pluggable transceivers. channels and virtual channels to the internal database. where the procedure for provisioning an FSP3000R7 Network Element is described.3 80000014705 Issue: B. which contains the instructions for creating Ethernet L2 flow points and flow cross connections. which contains the instructions for creating protection groups. which contains the instruction for manually deleting entities. How to Delete Equipment/Facilities Manually. modules. which contains the instructions for creating Add-Drop cross connections. Bridges.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs This section gives an introduction to provisioning of the FSP 3000R7. FSP 3000R7 R10. It contains instructions for provisioning shelves. The following topics are provided: About Provisioning. which contains the instructions for provisioning encryption for the first time. which contains the instructions for adding and deleting user accounts on the Network Element. Creating Flow Points. This section should be read in conjunction with the FSP3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual. Creating DCN Cross-Connections. Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually. which gives a basic understanding of the internal Network Element database and provisioning. Creating ADM and ROADM Cross Connections. Handling Network Element User Accounts. and for adjusting and managing encryption. Creating Protection Groups. which contains the instructions for manually creating entities and protection. Managing Encryption Modules. which contains the instruction for enabling automatic provisioning for a Network Element. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 81 . by using the Element Manager. How to Create Equipment/Facilities Automatically.

and depending on the equipment. In the same manner. the modules and any pluggable transceivers on the modules. Thus the principle is to start at the bottom and then add entities that are supported by the existing entity. You start by creating and configuring equipment: the shelf. the default administrative state can be overruled.About Provisioning About Provisioning The basis for FSP3000R7 management. Table 2 shows a few examples of AID addresses. some of the entities. Then you create ports and configure the channels on these ports. is the Network Element database. For manual provisioning the administrative state is Management. The database recognizes each entity in an NE. This equipment and these facilities are provisioned with default parameter values. this database reflects the actual equipment and facilities present in the NE. when the supporting entity state is In Service or Automatic In Service. operates on the internal database. by means of their Access Identifier (AID) address and their entity type. If required. is called provisioning. which again transfers these settings to the actual equipment. The generic term that is used for equipment and facilities is entity. This database is a virtual representation of the actual equipment and the facilities that this equipment supports. Regardless of provisioning method. the entity is set to a default administrative state when provisioning is finished. You must first delete a channel before you can delete the port of module that supports that channel. then the provisioned entity is set to Management. Any configuration after provisioning. . The exception is if the supporting entity is Maintenance. When automatic provisioning is used. Provisioning may be done manually or automatically. the FSP3000R7 detects the equipment. 82 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. You provision each entity by creating it in the internal database. Thus. 72 gives more details about AID addresses. specifying the relevant parameters for the entity in the process. Table 2: Example of AID addresses AID address example MOD-1-3 PL-1-3-NE CH-1-3-C1 AID address syntax Module: MOD-<shelf#>-<slot#> Plugs: PL-<shelf#>-<slot#>-<port#> Optical Channel: CH-<shelf#>-<slot#>-<port#> The parameters that are provisioned into the internal database are stored and can be used for future backup procedures.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The default administrative state is set equal to that of the supporting state. The exception is if the supporting entity has administrative state Disabled. deletion must be done from the top. Then the Automatic In Service administrative state is set. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Defining equipment and the facilities that they support. or the equipment and facilities that are planned for the NE. “The Equipment Pane” on p. then the provisioned entity is set to Disabled too. For automatic provisioning the administrative state is equal to that of the supporting entity.

pluggable transceivers and the necessary ports for the modules. This section describes creation by using the Provisioning Manager window from the Main Menu. depend on which entity type you are creating in the internal database. or using context-sensitive menus by right-clicking an entity in the Entities pane hierarchical list. you will be required to specify a number of parameters.3 80000014705 Issue: B. you must create a module before you can create the channel that the module shall carry. The Provisioning Manager window shows you which entities that the selected entity supports. This list gives the allowable range for parameter values. Or. To open the Provisioning Manager window: FSP 3000R7 R10. During the creation. The FSP3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual describes the procedures for provisioning equipment and facilities (entities). This is useful for keeping the overview of what you are doing. modules. Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually This section contains the instruction for creating shelves. The creation wizards can be started in several ways. using the Main Menu to open the Provisioning Manager window. The Element Manager supports creation of entities via a wizard. The instructions in the following sub-sections all assume that you have opened the Provisioning Manager window. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 83 . That is. you must create the shelf before you can create a module that is in that shelf. and thus which entities that are available for creation at this point.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs The document Management Data Guide lists all parameters that you my be required to enter during provisioning. Entities must be created from the bottom and up. Which parameters you are requested to enter. the default values and a brief description of each parameter.

Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant Network Element in the Managed Elements pane. 101 “How to Create a Virtual Ethernet Port (VETH)” on p. 119 “How to Create an Optical Line” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 88 “How to Create a Plug” on p. The following topics are provided: “How to Create a Shelf” on p. select Configuration -> Provisioning ->. 86 “How to Create a Module” on p. 85 “How to Create an OTDR Shelf” on p. 115 “How to Create a PPP IP Interface” on p. 93 “How to Clone a Channel (Port)” on p. 120 FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential 84 User Manual . 100 “How to Create an Ethernet Port (ETH)” on p. 116 “How to Create a Supervisory Channel” on p. 113 “How to Create an Ethernet based ECC Channel” on p. the Provisioning Manager window appears. 96 “How to Change a Service (Channel)” on p. End of Procedure This window can be used in parallel with the rest of the Element Manager. 107 “How to Create an SDH/SONET/OTN based ECC Channel” on p. From the Main Menu. 87 “How to Clone a Module” on p. 99 “How to Create a Virtual Channel” on p. 92 “How to Create a Port” on p. In response.

This is a list of AID addresses for the shelves that may be added. By default. and make changes to the parameters. to select the relevant parameter values. Step 3 Enter the required parameters in the wizard pages as follows: a) Use the drop-down lists and controls that the wizard provides. In response the Create Shelf wizard starts. b) Select either: • Next to continue to the next wizard page. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. In response. the shelf is selectable from the SHELF-<number> entity in the Entity pane. In response.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the Complete page appears. The final page has the title Confirm. Parameters Step 2. See the supporting document Management Data Guide for descriptions of these parameters for this shelf type. Step 7 Close the Provisioning Manager window by selecting Close. FSP 3000R7 R10. b) If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. Step 4 When the Confirm wizard page appears: a) Check that the displayed settings are correct. etc. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 6 User Manual 85 . the NCU or SCU modules for the shelf are automatically created as well. c) If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm. The titles are: Parameters Step 1. Each page in the wizard has a title. After creation. • Back to return to the previous wizard page. using the Provisioning Manager window. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE that you wish to add a shelf to. Use the hierarchical list of entities on the left of the Provisioning Manager window for this selection. you are returned to the Provisioning Manager window. the right side of the Provisioning Manager window displays the Create Shelf list. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. Step 5 If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Complete page.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs How to Create a Shelf This section describes how to create a shelf in the internal database. In response. and the shelf is added to the Entities pane. Step 2 Select the relevant shelf AID address from the list.

In response. Step 2 Step 3 Select the item SHELF-OTDR from the list.Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually How to Create an OTDR Shelf This section describes how to create the OTDR shelf combination in the internal database. In response. a) Check that the displayed settings are correct. Close the Provisioning Manager window by selecting Close. In response. After creation. Step 5 Step 6 End of Procedure 86 User Manual . b) If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. This enables the OTDR provisioning process to provision the port according to its needs. the Complete page appears. This is a list of AID addresses for the shelves that may be added. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE that you wish to add a shelf to. Use the hierarchical list of entities on the left of the Provisioning Manager window for this selection. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential When the Confirm wizard page appears: Step 4 If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Complete page. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. The Ethernet port C2 (entity SC-1-A-C2) must be un-provisioned. Requirements • • An NCU with two Ethernet ports must be provisioned in the NE. and the shelf is added to the Entities pane. using the Provisioning Manager window. c) If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm. the shelf is selectable from the SHELF-<number> entity in the Entity pane. FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B. you are returned to the Provisioning Manager window. the right side of the Provisioning Manager window displays the Create Shelf list.

Use the hierarchical list of entities on the left of the Provisioning Manager window for this selection. c) If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm. Step 2 Select the relevant slot AID address from the list.3 80000014705 Issue: B. using the Provisioning Manager window. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. • Back to return to the previous wizard page. The parameters you are required to enter in the next pages of the Create Module wizard. Parameters Step 2. use the Equipment Type drop-down list to select the relevant module type. The final page has the title Confirm. FSP 3000R7 R10. depend on your selection of the facility type. Step 6 If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Complete page.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs How to Create a Module This section describes how to create a module in the internal database. Step 5 When the Confirm wizard page appears: a) Check that the displayed settings are correct. In response. Each page in the wizard has a title. b) If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. The titles are: Parameters Step 1. In response. b) Select either: • Next to continue to the next wizard page. In response. After creation. etc. In response the Create Module wizard starts. Procedure Step 1 Select the shelf that you wish to add a module to. See the document Management Data Guide for descriptions of these parameters for this module type. the module is selectable from the MOD-<shelf>-<slot>-<module name> entity in the Entity pane. and make changes to the parameters. you are returned to the Provisioning Manager window. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 7 User Manual 87 . Step 4 Enter the required parameters in the wizard pages as follows: a) Use the drop-down lists and controls that the wizard provides. the right side of the Provisioning Manager window displays the Create Module list. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. to select the relevant parameter values. Step 3 In the Parameters Step 1 page. This is a list of AID addresses for the slots in the selected shelf that you may add modules to. the Complete page appears.

This saves time when configuring several modules of the same type. select Configuration -> Provisioning -> Clone. and select Clone. with the provisioning of the originating module as the parameter defaults. dependent entities that were not provisioned on the originating module are not offered for provisioning on the cloned module in the cloning process. The cloning process starts with the module entity and leads you through provisioning all dependent entities which have been provisioned in the originating module. belonging DCN cross-connects and protection groups are not copied in the cloning process. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential 88 User Manual . right-click the relevant module to display the context sensitive menu. with the same configurations. End of Procedure How to Clone a Module This instruction describes how to clone an existing module. FSP 3000R7 R10. Alternatively. They must be provisioned manually afterwards.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant module to clone from the tree of entities in the Entity pane. with the option of changing some parameters. In response. However. ECC channels.Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually Step 8 Close the Provisioning Manager window by selecting Close. the Clone Module wizard opens. From the Main Menu.

therefore only unassigned slots are supported as targets for a module clone.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 3 Specify which slot you wish to provision the clone module into by selecting a module AID from the tree list of entities in the Clone Module.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Target Selection page. It is not possible to overwrite existing provisioning. FSP 3000R7 R10. Select Next to continue to the Parameters Step 1 page. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 89 .

To aid you in the adjustment. which you are in the process of cloning on the target module. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Adjust these parameters as required for the cloned module. • 90 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. the right hand side of the page can display the progress of the cloning process.3 80000014705 Issue: B. • Select the Progress radio button to display the list of dependent entities on the originating module. Each entity that has had its values set. has a green check mark. or the parameter values that have been set so far. This can be useful to remember what adjustments you wish to make on the rest of the entities.Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually Step 4 The Parameters Step 1 page displays the parameters that were set on the originating module. Select the Parameters radio button to display the values that have been selected for the entities that have been adjusted so far. The entity that you currently can adjust values for has an orange arrow. with the same values as on the originating module.

Confirm page will be displayed. • Confirm that the values are correct by selecting Next. and adjusted if relevant. is displayed. You can review the parameter values for all cloned entities by selecting the Parameters radio button. If there are further entities to clone. select Cancel. all cloned entities created thus far in this process will be deleted. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Do one of the following: • If the values are incorrect. the Result page. Step 6 FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 5 Select Next to continue. When all entities have been presented. you will be presented the necessary amount of parameter entry pages to adjust all parameter values. In response you will be presented for as many new pages as are necessary in order to lead you through adjustment the parameter values for this entity. Step 7 The Progress view shows all entities that were cloned. User Manual 91 . When all parameter values have been entered for this entity. The cloning will be aborted.

Procedure Step 1 Select the module that you wish to add a pluggable transceivers to. If relevant. This is a list of AID addresses for the cages that you may add pluggable transceiver to on the selected module. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential In response. WDM channel number. cloned module.. Step 3 Step 4 In the Parameters Step 1 page. provision a DCN cross-connect or protection group involving this new.Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Select Finish to close the Clone Module wizard. Step 2 Select the relevant cage AID address from the list. In the next pages of the Create Plug wizard.x}|N|NE|NW}> entity in the Entity pane. See the document Management Data Guide for descriptions of these parameters for this module type. the right side of the Provisioning Manager window displays the Create Plug list. End of Procedure How to Create a Plug This section describes how to create a pluggable transceiver in the internal database. The final page has the title Confirm. Parameters Step 2. using the Provisioning Manager window. 92 User Manual . FSP 3000R7 R10. Enter the required parameters in the wizard page as follows: a) Use the drop-down lists and controls that the wizard provides. After creation. the module is selectable from the PL-<shelf>-<slot>-<{C{1. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. reach. to select the relevant parameter values. If relevant. usage of 3rd party plugs and the administrative state. and make changes to the parameters. provision additional dependent entities on the cloned nodule. • Back to return to the previous wizard page. b) Select either: • Next to continue to the next wizard page. The titles are: Parameters Step 1. Follow this instruction only for modules that use pluggable transceivers. Each page in the wizard has a title. etc. using the hierarchical list of entities on the left of the Provisioning Manager window. In response the Create Plug wizard starts. use the Equipment Type drop-down list to select the relevant pluggable transceiver type.3 80000014705 Issue: B. you are required to enter the rate.

If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response. the port (channel) is selectable from the CH-<shelf>-<slot>--C{1. Step 6 If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Complete page. After creation. After creation. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential You use ports to create a connection that can carry traffic.40} OCH or OM-<shelf number>-OM in the Entity pane.x}|N|NE|NW}>-<facility type> entity in the Entity pane. • • • User Manual 93 . using the Provisioning Manager window. the port is selectable from the OM-<shelf>-<slot>-{NE|NW}-SWITCH entity in the Entity pane.. b) If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. A connection that can carry traffic through an ROADM-C40/40/2-3HU-2DC shelf must have a client port (optical channel) and an network port (optical multiplex facility) on the shelf. the port is selectable from the OM-<shelf>-<slot>-1-EDFA or OM-<shelf>-<slot>-2-EDFA-MID entities in the Entity pane.. After creation. FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 7 Step 8 End of Procedure How to Create a Port This section describes how to create a port in the internal database.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 5 When the Confirm wizard page appears: a) Check that the displayed settings are correct. A connection that can carry traffic through an VSM or RSM module must have a port. c) If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm. For example: • A connection that can carry traffic must have a client port and network port on the channel modules in both the near end and far end NE. After creation. the port (channel) is selectable from the CH-<shelf>-<slot>-<{C{1. you are returned to the Provisioning Manager window. Close the Provisioning Manager window by selecting Close. A connection that can carry traffic through an EDFA module must have a port. In response. the Complete page appears.

to select the relevant parameter values.3 80000014705 Issue: B. FSP 3000R7 R10. etc. Parameters Step 2. Step 2 Select the relevant channel AID address from the list. See the document Management Data Guide for descriptions of these parameters. In response the Create Port wizard starts. The rest of the parameters you are required to enter in this first page. and the next pages of the Create wizard. or to the selected module’s pluggable transceiver. In response. Enter the required parameters in the wizard pages as follows: a) Use the drop-down lists and controls that the wizard provides. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. The titles are: Parameters Step 1. depend on your selection of the facility type. • Select the Use Defaults radio button if you wish to use the default settings for trace. and make changes to the parameters. the right side of the Provisioning Manager window displays the Create Port list. • Back to return to the previous wizard page. Each page in the wizard has a title. select the facility type STM-64. To configure a 10G WAN service. Step 4 For channel modules that support configuration of trace: • Select the Configure Trace radio button if you wish to configure trace. This is also true even if the pluggable transceiver cage is equipped and thus displayed in the Entity pane. use the Facility Type drop-down list to select the relevant facility type for the channel. select the facility type FC. Step 3 In the Parameters Step 1 page. The final page has the title Confirm. b) Select either: • Next to continue to the next wizard page. for this module/shelf type and use of the module/shelf type. Use the hierarchical list of entities on the left of the Provisioning Manager window for this selection. Step 5 94 User Manual . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential To configure a FICON service. In some cases the module’s configuration does not support use of one or more of the module’s plugs.Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually Procedure Step 1 Select the module or shelf that you wish to add a port to. This is a list of AID addresses for the ports that you may add to the selected module. In these cases the AID address for the port corresponding to the plug is not offered for selection in the list.

Close the Provisioning Manager window by selecting Close. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. In response. Step 7 If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Complete page. In response.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 6 When the Confirm wizard page appears: a) Check that the displayed settings are correct. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 95 . the Complete window appears. you are returned to the Provisioning Manager window.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 8 Step 9 End of Procedure FSP 3000R7 R10. b) If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. c) If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm.

belonging DCN cross-connects and protection groups are not copied in the cloning process. Alternatively.3 80000014705 Issue: B. This saves time when configuring several ports of the same type. However. They must be provisioned manually afterwards. with the same configurations. with the option of changing some of the parameters. the Clone Port wizard opens. All changes to the database are logged in the database change log. with the provisioning of the originating channel as the parameter defaults. select Configuration -> Provisioning -> Clone. ECC channels. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . From the Main Menu. and select Clone. In response. dependent entities that were not provisioned on the originating module are not offered for provisioning on the cloned module in the cloning process. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant channel (port) to clone from the tree of entities in the Entities pane. 96 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. The cloning process starts with the channel entity and leads you through provisioning all dependent entities which have been provisioned in the originating channel.Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually How to Clone a Channel (Port) This instruction describes how to clone an existing client or network channel (port) on a module. right-click the relevant module to display the context sensitive menu.

Confirm page will be displayed.3 80000014705 Issue: B. It is not possible to overwrite existing provisioning. Select Next to continue. User Manual 97 . FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 4 The Parameters Step 1 page displays the parameters that were set on the originating channel. Target Selection page. therefore only unassigned channels are supported as targets for a channel clone. Select Next to continue to the Parameters Step 1 page. In response you will be presented for as many new pages as are necessary in order to lead you through adjustment the parameter values for this entity. When all parameter values have been entered for this entity. Adjust these parameters as required for the cloned channel. with the same values as on the originating channel.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 3 Specify which channel you wish to clone the provisioning of the originating channel into by selecting a channel AID from the tree list of entities in the Clone Port.

The Result page will be displayed.3 80000014705 Issue: B. End of Procedure 98 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. provision additional dependent entities on the cloned channel. Step 7 Step 8 If relevant. If relevant provision a DCN cross connect or a protection group involving the cloned channel.Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually Step 5 Do one of the following: • If the values are incorrect. . all cloned entities created thus far in this process will be deleted. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 6 Select Finish to close the Clone Port wizard. select Cancel. • Confirm that the values are correct by selecting Next. The cloning will be aborted.

3 80000014705 Issue: B. Enter the required parameters in the wizard pages as follows: a) Use the drop-down lists and controls that the wizard provides. right-click the relevant module to display the context sensitive menu. etc. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Each page in the wizard has a title. The Element Manager aids the operator in making changes to a a client or network channel. Alternatively. In response the Change Service wizard opens. See the document Management Data Guide for descriptions of these parameters for this module/channel type if necessary. and select Change Service. select Configuration -> Provisioning -> Change Service. The final page has the title Confirm. and make changes to the parameters. then re-provisioned. Change the required parameters. The titles are: Parameters Step 1. to select the relevant parameter values. b) Select either: • Next to continue to the next wizard page. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the client or network channel that you wish to make changes to. Changing a service is service-affecting. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. the channel must first be deleted. Parameters Step 2.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs How to Change a Service (Channel) This instruction describes how to change a service. From the Main Menu. User Manual 99 . • Back to return to the previous wizard page. To do this manually. FSP 3000R7 R10.

the port (channel) is selectable from the VCH-<shelf>--N{1.x}|N|NE|NW}>-<facility type> entity in the Entity pane. In response. Multiplexing channel modules and ROADM-C40/40/2-3HU-2DC shelves support virtual channels.Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually Step 3 When the Confirm wizard page appears: a) Check that the displayed settings are correct. Each client service in a ROADM-C40/40/2-3HU-2DC shelf is carried by a virtual channel on the network port optical multiplex facility. b) If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. The titles are: Parameters Step 1. the virtual channel is selectable from the VCH-<shelf>-<slot>-<{C{1. or to the selected module’s pluggable transceivers. and make changes to the parameters. the right side of the Provisioning Manager window displays the Create Virtual Channel list. 100 User Manual . In response. Parameters Step 2. Step 2 Select the relevant channel AID address from the list. Navigate between the pages by selecting either: • • Next to continue to the next wizard page. This is a list of AID addresses for the virtual channels that you may add to the selected shelf. c) If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm.3 80000014705 Issue: B.40} OCH in the Entity pane. After creation. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential • Procedure Step 1 Select the module or shelf that you wish to add a virtual channel to. using the Provisioning Manager window. FSP 3000R7 R10. For example: • Each client service is carried by a virtual channel on the network port. You use virtual channels to carry the services that shall be multiplexed. Use the hierarchical list of entities on the left of the Provisioning Manager window for this selection. the selected module. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. etc. Each page in the wizard has a title. In response the Create Virtual Channel wizard starts. End of Procedure How to Create a Virtual Channel This section describes how to create a virtual channel in the internal database.. After creation. the Result window appears.. The final page has the title Confirm. Back to return to the previous wizard page.

the majority of the parameters for this ETH are derived from the LAG (VETH entity) they are members of. This section covers also this case of an ETH port creation. • Select either: • Next to continue to the next wizard page. the Complete page appears. • If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. • Back to return to the previous wizard page. the ETH facility is selectable from the ETH-<shelf>-<slot>-<{C{1. In response.3 80000014705 Issue: B.. If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Complete page. Step 4 When the Confirm wizard page appears: • Check that the displayed settings are correct. See the document Management Data Guide for descriptions of these parameters for this module type. FSP 3000R7 R10. • Select the Use Defaults radio button if you wish to use the default settings for trace. you are returned to the Provisioning Manager window. and make changes to the parameters. After creation. • For channel modules that support configuration of trace: • Select the Configure Trace radio button if you wish to configure trace. to select the relevant parameter values. In the case that the ETH port shall be a member of a LAG group (VETH entity). © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 End of Procedure How to Create an Ethernet Port (ETH) This section describes how to create a Ethernet port (ETH entity) on an xPCA module in the internal database. using the Provisioning Manager window. • If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. User Manual 101 . Therefore there are a limited number of parameters to enter for these ETHs.10}||NE|NW}>-entity in the Entity pane. See the document Management Data Guide for descriptions of these parameters. enter the required parameters in the wizard pages as follows: a) Use the drop-down lists and controls that the wizard provides. The ETH port holds the Ethernet properties for the ports on an xPCA channel module. Close the Provisioning Manager window by selecting Close.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 3 In the next pages of the Create Virtual Channel wizard. In response.

The titles are: Parameters Step 1. the right side of the Provisioning Manager window displays the Create Port list. The pluggable transceiver (PL entity) on the interface has been provisioned correctly and the administrative state is Automatic In Service or In Service. In response the Create port wizard starts. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Parameters Step 2. etc. Back to return to the previous wizard page. and make changes to the parameters. 102 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Use the hierarchical list of entities on the left of the Provisioning Manager window for this selection. In response. The final page has the title Confirm. Step 2 Select the relevant ETH AID address from the list. the xPCA channel module must already be configured with the correct Link Aggregation System Priority (LAG Actor Sys Pri). This helps you keep track of how far you have come.Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually Requirements • The xPCA channel module has been provisioned and the administrative state is Automatic In Service or In Service.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Navigate between the pages by selecting either: • • Next to continue to the next wizard page. Each page in the wizard has a title. If the ETH port shall be part of a LAG group. • Procedure Step 1 Select the xPCA module that you wish to add a ETH port to. This is a list of AID addresses for the ETH facilities that you may add to the selected module.

a client port has client behavior and a network port has network behavior. Autonegotiation is not supported for ports with XFP pluggable transceivers. specify whether the Ethernet port shall behave as a client port or a network port by using the Behavior field. Select Next to continue. go to Step 9.3 80000014705 Issue: B. c) Do one of the following: • If the ETH port shall not be member of a LAG group.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 3 In the page Parameters Step 1. set Member of Virtual Port to NONE. set Auto-Negotiation to either Enabled or Disabled. FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 103 . • If the ETH port shall be member of a LAG group. If the port shall be used against your client’s equipment it should be set to behavior Client. b) If this is a 2PCA-PCN-10G module. do as follows: a) If this is a client port. The 10PCA-PCN+10G port behavior is directly linked to the port type. In response the Parameters Step 2 page appears. This means that for example a client port can have network port behavior.

The Customer VLAN Identifier (CVID) or Service VLAN Identifier (SVID) will be equal to your entry in the Port VLAN ID field (see Step 8) and the PCP priority will be equal to your entry in the Port default PCP field.Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually Step 4 In the page Parameters Step 2. Select Next to continue. depending on the port’s role. line or mesh topology. • Role I-NNI is used to connect xPCA modules together in a ring. It has effect on which modes the port can operate in: • Role UNI is used to interface user equipment. do as follows: a) Set the Port Role as planned in the network design. The port can operate in the modes PORT. In response the Parameters Step 3 page appears. In response the Parameters Step 3 page appears. All ports can play the I-NNI role. • Role NNI is used for handing over to the next network. set the Port Mode for the port. a C-tag or an S-tag will be added to untagged frames at Rx. b) Enter the default PCP priority the port shall use for untagged frames in the Port default PCP field. Step 5 If selectable. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential NNI I-NNI In addition only ports with port role I-NNI can be members of an Ethernet linear protection group. If the port is configured to accept untagged frames. Select Next to continue. The port’s role has effect on which modes the port can operate in. 104 User Manual . CTAG or STAG.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Table 3: Port Role UNI Port Role/Port Mode versus IEEE Provider Bridge Port Mode Port based C-tagged S-tagged Port based C-tagged S-tagged Port based C-tagged S-tagged IEEE Provider Bridge Port Name Customer Network Port (CNP) Customer Edge Port (CEP) Customer Network Port (CNP) Not supported Not supported Provider Network Port (PNP) Not supported Not supported Provider Network Port (PNP) FSP 3000R7 R10.

Step 7 FSP 3000R7 R10. • If you selected PORT.3 80000014705 Issue: B. remember to take this into consideration. • If you selected CTAG or STAG. Therefore the max frame size should be 4 bytes longer on I-NNI ports. this means that the frame may be larger than the maximum frame size at Tx. d) Go to Step 13. On I-NNI ports one more tag is added to each frame as compared to UNI ports operating in CTAG and PORT modes. If tags are added between Rx and Tx. Incoming frames matching this EtherType will be discarded. The forwarded frame will use the Ether TAG Type field of the transmitting port. This feature can be used to allow incoming SVLAN tagged frames to be transported and encapsulated with yet another SVLAN tag. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 105 . The default is to discard S-tagged frames. The default value takes this into consideration. If you enter a different value. based on their EtherType (Ether TAG Type). Discarding of frames larger than the maximum frame size is done at Rx. go to Step 7. In response to the selection of port mode PORT. b) Define which incoming frames to discard.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 6 Your choice of port mode affects which parameters will be available for provisioning in the following. go to Step 8. To discard S-tagged frames enter the value 0x88a8 and to discard C-tagged frames enter the value 0x8100. the Parameters Step 4 page displays the relevant parameters. c) Define when incoming frames shall be discarded due to their size by entering the maximum acceptable frame size into the Max Frame Size field. a) Set the administrative state (Admin State field) to Automatic in Service or In Service.

This feature can be used to allow incoming SVLAN tagged frames to be transported and encapsulated with yet another SVLAN tag. Detection of C. If the port is configured to accept untagged frames. Discarding of frames larger than the maximum frame size is done at Rx. a) Set the administrative state (Admin State field) to Automatic in Service or In Service. This is however configured on the FLW entity (the PUSH PVID Transmit and Prio PVID Transmit field). e) Select acceptance or rejection of untagged and priority-tagged frames using the Untagged frames drop-down list. the Parameters Step 4 page displays the relevant parameters. remember to take this into consideration. this means that the frame may be larger than the maximum frame size at Tx. The CVID or SVID will be equal to your entry in the Port VLAN ID field and the PCP priority will be equal to your entry in the Port default PCP field (see Step 3). ID 4095 is reserved for EOC channels and shall not be used. Incoming frames matching this EtherType will be accepted. It is for example relevant to enter a different value when interfacing to older equipment that uses a non-standard Ether type. If tags are added between Rx and Tx. The forwarded frame will use the Ether TAG Type field of the transmitting port. 106 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. d) Enter the Port VLAN ID in the Port VLAN ID field.Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually Step 8 In response to the selection of port mode CTAG or STAG. The default value takes this into consideration. Therefore the max frame size should be 4 bytes longer on I-NNI ports. If you enter a different value. c) Define when incoming frames shall be discarded due to their size by entering the maximum acceptable frame size into the Max Frame Size field. Addition of a C-tag to untagged frames can also be configured at Tx. b) Enter the EtherType (Ether TAG Type). f) Go to Step 13.3 80000014705 Issue: B. On I-NNI ports one more tag is added to each frame as compared to UNI ports operating in CTAG and PORT modes.and S-tagged frames is done based on the EtherType field. a C-tag or an S-tag will be added to untagged frames at Rx. To accept S-tagged frames enter the value 0x88a8 and to accept C-tagged frames enter the value 0x8100. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .

• If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. The port with the lowest number has the highest priority and is thus the active port. Check that the displayed settings are correct. The VETH holds the LAG-specific parameters and the packet handling layers for the member ports. Go to Step 13. In response the Confirm wizard page appears. In response the Parameters Step 2 page appears. Step 10 Enter the actor port priority (Actor Port Pri field). The the Ethernet ports (ETH) that are members of the VETH hold the physical layer Ethernet properties for each member. you are returned to the Provisioning Manager window. Select Next to continue. In response. Select Next to continue.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 9 Enter the LAG group (VETH entity) that the ETH port shall be member of. the Complete page appears. Step 11 Step 12 FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 End of Procedure How to Create a Virtual Ethernet Port (VETH) This section describes how to create an Virtual Ethernet Port (VETH) on an xPCA module in the internal database. using the Provisioning Manager window. User Manual 107 . The VETH port is used when creating a Link Aggregation Group (LAG). © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Set the administrative state (Admin State field) to Automatic in Service or In Service. • If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. using the Member of Virtual Port drop-down list. If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Complete page. In response. This is used to define which ETH port is the active port in a LAG.

etc. The titles are: Parameters Step 1. In response.. The final page has the title Confirm. Requirements • The xPCA channel module has been provisioned. Back to return to the previous wizard page.Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually After creation. This is a list of AID addresses for the VETH facilities that you may add to the selected module. Parameters Step 2.n}>-entity in the Entity pane. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 2 Select the relevant VETH AID address from the list. Each page in the wizard has a title. • • Procedure Step 1 Select the xPCA module f that you wish to add a VETH facility to. In response the Create port wizard starts. the VETH facility is selectable from the VETH-<shelf>-<slot>-<{V{1. The pluggable transceiver (PL entity) on the interface has been provisioned correctly and the administrative state is Automatic In Service or In Service. and make changes to the parameters. the right side of the Provisioning Manager window displays the Create Port list. Use the hierarchical list of entities on the left of the Provisioning Manager window for this selection. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. No member ETH ports and belonging flow points (FLWs) are allowed to exist at VETH creation time. Navigate between the pages by selecting either: • • Next to continue to the next wizard page. 108 User Manual .3 80000014705 Issue: B. and the administrative state is Automatic In Service or In Service. FSP 3000R7 R10. the xPCA channel module must already be configured with the correct Link Aggregation System Priority (LAG Actor Sys Pri).

a C-tag or an S-tag will be added to untagged frames at Rx. either 1GE or 10 GE.3 80000014705 Issue: B. line or mesh topology. It has effect on which modes the port can operate in: • Role UNI is used to interface user equipment. Table 4: Port Role FSP 3000R7 R10. In response the Parameters Step 2 page appears. User Manual 109 . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Port Role/Port Mode versus IEEE Provider Bridge Port Mode Port based C-tagged S-tagged Port based C-tagged S-tagged Port based C-tagged S-tagged f) IEEE Provider Bridge Port Name Customer Network Port (CNP) Customer Edge Port (CEP) Customer Network Port (CNP) Not supported Not supported Provider Network Port (PNP) Not supported Not supported Provider Network Port (PNP) UNI NNI I-NNI Enter the default PCP priority the port shall use for untagged frames in the Port default PCP field. c) Enter the number of active ports that will be members of this LAG. • Role I-NNI is used to connect xPCA modules together in a ring. e) Set the Port Role as planned in the network design. • Role NNI is used for handing over to the next network. Select Next to continue. All ports can play the I-NNI role. In this release only one active port is supported. If the port is configured to accept untagged frames. into the LAG Active ports field. enter the required parameters: a) Use the LACP MODE drop-down list to specify the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) mode for this LAG as either ACTIVE or PASSIVE. The port’s role has effect on which modes the port can operate in.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 3 In the page Parameters Step 1. The Customer VLAN Identifier (CVID) or Service VLAN Identifier (SVID) will be equal to your entry in the Port VLAN ID field (see Step 7) and the PCP priority will be equal to your entry in the Port default PCP field. d) Use the LAG Port Type drop down list to select the port types of the ports that shall be members of the LAG. b) Enter the LACP Time Out. either long or short.

go to Step 6. a) Define which incoming frames to discard. The forwarded frame will use the Ether TAG Type field of the transmitting port. The default is to discard S-tagged frames. Therefore the max frame size should be 4 bytes longer on I-NNI ports. In response to the selection of port mode PORT. • If you selected UNI. you must set the Port Mode for the port. Discarding of frames larger than the maximum frame size is done at Rx. This feature can be used to allow incoming SVLAN tagged frames to be transported and encapsulated with yet another SVLAN tag. On I-NNI ports one more tag is added to each frame as compared to UNI ports operating in CTAG and PORT modes.The port can operate in the modes PORT. b) Define when incoming frames shall be discarded due to their size by entering the maximum acceptable frame size into the Max Frame Size field. based on their EtherType (Ether TAG Type). Enter the required parameters. go to Step 7. this means that the frame may be larger than the maximum frame size at Tx.Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually Step 4 Your choice of port role affects which parameters will be available in the Parameters Step 2 page. • If you selected CTAG or STAG. c) Set the administrative state (Admin State field) to Automatic in Service or In Service. CTAG or STAG. To discard S-tagged frames enter the value 0x88a8 and to discard C-tagged frames enter the value 0x8100. Select Next to continue. Incoming frames matching this EtherType will be discarded. If tags are added between Rx and Tx. remember to take this into consideration. The default value takes this into consideration. Your choice of port mode affects which parameters will be available for provisioning in the following. • If you selected PORT. d) Go to Step 8. the Parameters Step 3 page appears. If you enter a different value.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 5 Step 6 110 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .

e) Set the administrative state (Admin State field) to Automatic in Service or In Service. To accept S-tagged frames enter the value 0x88a8 and to accept C-tagged frames enter the value 0x8100. Addition of a C-tag to untagged frames can also be configured at Tx. If the port is configured to accept untagged frames. • If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm. Detection of C. It is for example relevant to enter a different value when interfacing to older equipment that uses a non-standard Ether type. a) Enter the EtherType (Ether TAG Type). In response the Confirm wizard page appears.and S-tagged frames is done based on the EtherType field. On I-NNI ports one more tag is added to each frame as compared to UNI ports operating in CTAG and PORT modes. the Parameters Step 2 page appears. Check that the displayed settings are correct. This feature can be used to allow incoming SVLAN tagged frames to be transported and encapsulated with yet another SVLAN tag. remember to take this into consideration. the Complete page appears. a C-tag or an S-tag will be added to untagged frames at Rx.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 7 In response to the selection of port role NNI or I-NNI. Incoming frames matching this EtherType will be accepted. The CVID or SVID will be equal to your entry in the Port VLAN ID field and the PCP priority will be equal to your entry in the Port default PCP field (see Step 3). FSP 3000R7 R10. In response. If tags are added between Rx and Tx. This is however configured on the FLW entity (the PUSH PVID Transmit and Prio PVID Transmit field). d) Set acceptance or rejection of untagged and priority-tagged frames using the Untagged frames item. c) Enter the port VLAN ID. Therefore the max frame size should be 4 bytes longer on I-NNI ports. this means that the frame may be larger than the maximum frame size at Tx.3 80000014705 Issue: B. • If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. If you enter a different value. Discarding of frames larger than the maximum frame size is done at Rx. b) Define when incoming frames shall be discarded due to their size by entering the maximum acceptable frame size into the Max Frame Size field. Enter the required parameters. User Manual 111 . f) Go to Step 8. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 8 Step 9 Select Next to continue. The default value takes this into consideration. The forwarded frame will use the Ether TAG Type field of the transmitting port. ID 4095 is reserved for EOC channels and shall not be used.

Requirements • • A channel module that supports an EOC channel must already be provisioned. 92 and “How to Create a Port” on p. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. Step 2 Step 3 Select the relevant EOC channel type in the list (for example EOC-2-9-NE). using the Provisioning Manager window. “Deployment Restrictions” for information about backplane bandwidth restrictions and allocated backplane bandwidth per DCN entity. The network port pluggable (if supported by the module) and channel must already be provisioned on the channel module. Use the hierarchical list of entities on the left of the Provisioning Manager window for this selection. FSP 3000R7 R10. In response. 93. See the Detailed System Description. Step 11 Step 12 End of Procedure How to Create an EOC Channel This section describes how to create an EOC channel in the internal database. In response the Create DCN Channel wizard starts. the Provisioning Manager window will display the Create DCN Channel list section on the right side. See “How to Create a Plug” on p. you are returned to the Provisioning Manager window. 87. 112 User Manual . Close the Provisioning Manager window by selecting Close.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually Step 10 If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Complete page. See “How to Create a Module” on p. This information can be found on the NE tab of the network element. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential • Ensure that there is enough un-used backplane bandwidth to support this backplane connection. Procedure Step 1 Select the module that you wish to add an EOC channel to. If the required entities have been provisioned already.

User Manual 113 . In response the Confirm wizard page appears. a) If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. “Deployment Restrictions” for information about backplane bandwidth restrictions and allocated backplane bandwidth per DCN entity. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential How to Create an SDH/SONET/OTN based ECC Channel This section describes how to create an SDH/SONET/OTN based ECC channel in the internal database. Close the Provisioning Manager window by selecting Close. In response.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the Complete window appears. using the Provisioning Manager window. A port must already be provisioned on the channel module. See “How to Create a Module” on p. In response. Step 8 Step 9 End of Procedure FSP 3000R7 R10. This information can be found on the NE tab of the network element. Ensure that there is enough un-used backplane bandwidth to support this backplane connection. SONET or OTN must already be provisioned.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 In the Parameters Step 1 page. Check that the displayed settings are correct. you are returned to the Provisioning Manager window. See the Detailed System Description. Select Next to continue. set the administrative state for the EOC/ECC channel with the Admin State drop-down list. See “How to Create a Port” on p. 93. Requirements • • • A channel module that supports SDH. 87. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. b) If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm. Step 7 If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Complete page.

Step 7 Step 9 114 User Manual . and make changes to the parameters. When the Confirm wizard page appears: a) Check that the displayed settings are correct. The titles are: Parameters Step 1. the Provisioning Manager window will display the Create DCN Channel list section on the right side.Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually Procedure Step 1 Select the module that you wish to add an EOC/ECC channel to. you are returned to the Provisioning Manager window. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. Step 8 If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Complete page. In response. etc. use the Facility Type drop-down list to select the relevant EOC/ECC type. c) If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm. for example SDCC. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. FSP 3000R7 R10. Parameters Step 2.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the Complete window appears. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential In response the Create DCN Channel wizard starts. In response. Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 In the Parameters Step 1 page. If the required entities have been provisioned already. Use the hierarchical list of entities on the left of the Provisioning Manager window for this selection. The final page has the title Confirm. Set the administrative state for the EOC/ECC channel with the Admin State drop-down list. Step 2 Step 3 Select the relevant EOC/ECC channel type in the list (for example SDCC-1-8-N). b) If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. • Back to return to the previous wizard page. Each page in the wizard has a title. Select either: • Next to continue to the next wizard page.

In response the Create DCN Channel wizard starts. See “How to Create an Ethernet Port (ETH)” on p. Each page in the wizard has a title.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 101. Requirements • • • A 10PCA-PCN+10G channel module must already be provisioned. If the required entities have been provisioned already. End of Procedure How to Create an Ethernet based ECC Channel This section describes how to create an Ethernet based ECC channel in the internal database. An Ethernet port (ETH) must already be provisioned on the client or network port. Step 2 Step 3 Select the relevant ECC channel in the list (for example EOC-1-3-C1). © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 1 Select the 10PCA-PCN+10G module that you wish to add an ECC channel to. Procedure FSP 3000R7 R10. User Manual 115 . This helps you keep track of how far you have come. using the Provisioning Manager window.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 10 Close the Provisioning Manager window by selecting Close. The final page has the title Confirm. 87. See the Detailed System Description. Ensure that there is enough un-used backplane bandwidth to support this backplane connection. This information can be found on the NE tab of the network element. Use the hierarchical list of entities on the left of the Provisioning Manager window for this selection. the Provisioning Manager window will display the Create DCN Channel section on the right side. See “How to Create a Module” on p. “Deployment Restrictions” for information about backplane bandwidth restrictions and allocated backplane bandwidth per DCN entity. The titles are: Parameters Step 1. etc. Parameters Step 2.

116 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. set the administrative state for the ECC channel with the Admin State drop-down list. c) If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm. This DCN should be planned.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response. This information can be found on the NE tab of the network element. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Select either: • Next to continue to the next wizard page. the Complete window appears. you are returned to the Provisioning Manager window. Close the Provisioning Manager window by selecting Close. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. and make changes to the parameters. “Deployment Restrictions” for information about backplane bandwidth restrictions and allocated backplane bandwidth per DCN entity. Restrictions Ensure that there is enough un-used backplane bandwidth to support this backplane connection. Step 6 Step 7 If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Complete page. When the Confirm wizard page appears: a) Check that the displayed settings are correct. please use the planned values when creating PPP IP interfaces. Step 8 Step 9 End of Procedure How to Create a PPP IP Interface This instruction describes how to create a PPP IP interface on the NCU. • Back to return to the previous wizard page.Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually Step 4 Step 5 In the Parameters Step 1 page. PPP IP interfaces are part of the FSP3000R7 DCN. b) If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. See the Detailed System Description. In response.

Step 2 FSP 3000R7 R10. Check User Manual 117 . you will be asked to specify: Max Tx Rate [Kbit/s] The maximum transmit rate that you specify here. must be lower than the absolute maximum that can be carried by the EOC/ECC that uses this PPP IP interface. The default value is 100 kbit/s. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Select one of the NCU PPP IP links from the list (for example LINK-1A-3). The titles are: Parameters Step 1.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 3 • In the Parameters Step 1 and 2 page. Otherwise traffic may be lost and the connection will be slow. etc. Parameters Step 2. Each page in the wizard has a title. Use the left hand hierarchical entity list in the Provisioning Manager window for this selection. The final page has the title Confirm. In response the Create PPP IP Interface wizard starts.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Procedure Step 1 Select the NCU. The Provisioning Manager window will display the Create PPP IP Interface list section on the right side. This helps you keep track of how far you have come.

In order for the interface to become operational. you must select In Service or Automatic In Service. • Back to return to the previous wizard page and make changes to the parameters. under the section for that channel module. Remember that if OSPF is planned for any IP interface in the NE. An OSPF network can be divided into sub-domains. every IP address must be unique in the system. Near End IP Address If you specified that this is a numbered interface. All unnumbered interfaces share the same values. Area ID Specify the area ID for the PPP IP interface. and links that have the same area identification. 118 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. The default is 100. and these areas are identified by an area ID. The system IP address and subnet mask are re-used for this unnumbered interface. independently of the bandwidth of the IP interface. called areas. Type of IP config Select whether this interface is numbered or unnumbered. The following lists the maximum value for some of the ECC types: • GCC0/GCC1/GCC2 on OTU3/ODU3: 1312 kbit/s (limited from 5248 kbit/s) • GCC0/GCC1/GCC2 on OTU2/ODU2: 1312 kbit/s • GCC0/GCC1/GCC2 on OTU1/ODU1: 326 kbit/s • SDCC/DCCr: 192 • LDCC/DCCm: 576 • EOC: 1000 (ADVA proprietary framing) OSPF Routing Select Enabled if OSPF is planned used for this interface. Routing Metric Enter the routing metric if OSFP is enabled. Use the planned IP address. this field will appear. Enable Proxy ARP Select whether proxy ARP shall be used or not. routers. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential the maximum value for the relevant ECC entity in the Management Data Guide document. Only one logical LAN port or Ethernet port on the NCU can be unnumbered at any one time. Admin State Set the relevant value for administrative state at this time. An area is a logical collection of OSPF networks. .Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually • • • • • • • Step 4 Select either: • Next to continue to the next wizard page. For a numbered interface you must provision the IP address and mask.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

for example SC-3-17-N. 93. FSP 3000R7 R10. End of Procedure User Manual 119 . and provision it as described in “How to Create a Port” on p. In response. and provision it as described in “How to Create a Port” on p. the Complete window appears. 93. Close the Provisioning Manager window by selecting Close. If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Complete page. • If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm. Use the same parameter values that have been set for the NCU Ethernet port that the OSCM client port is connected to. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Procedure Step 1 Create the network side supervisory channel on the OSCM. Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 End of Procedure How to Create a Supervisory Channel The supervisory channel (SC) entity supports the out of band optical supervisory (OSC) channel. In response.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 5 When the Confirm wizard page appears: • Check that the displayed settings are correct.3 80000014705 Issue: B. you are returned to the Provisioning Manager window. This is the entity that supports the out of band OSC channel through the system. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. Step 2 Create a client side supervisory channel on the OSCM port the NCU is connected to. • If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. for example SC-3-17-C1.

In response. Close the Provisioning Manager window by selecting Close.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 120 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE. • Cancel to abort the creation. In response. Select either: • Next to create the optical line. In response the Create Optical Line wizard starts. If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Result page. which is connected to the NE. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish.Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually How to Create an Optical Line The optical line (OL) entity represents a network fiber endpoint. Step 2 Step 3 Select one of the optical lines from the list (for example OL-1). Use the left hand hierarchical entity list in the Provisioning Manager window for this selection. The Provisioning Manager window will display the Create Optical Line section on the right side. you are returned to the Provisioning Manager window. the Result window appears.

This includes enabling automatic provisioning. the Parameter pane displays the System page. enabling provisioning with Automatic In Service administrative state (both for manual and auto-provisioning) as well as preferred facility. Step 8 Select Modify. You are returned to the Parameters pane. User Manual 121 . Select OK. Enter a text string identifying the NE in the at the other end point of the network fiber into the FEND field.3 80000014705 Issue: B. FSP 3000R7 R10. Procedure Step 1 Double-click the relevant Network Element in the Managed Elements pane.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 7 In the Entities pane. End of Procedure How to Create Equipment/Facilities Automatically This section contains the instruction for setting provisioning preferences. In response. For example: NE2 ROADM. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Enter the attenuation of the receive and transmit fiber into the Attenuation Rx Fiber and Attenuation Tx Fiber fields. In response the Parameters pane displays the configuration information for the OL. In response the Modify window opens. select the new OL entity.

the entity will automatically transition to administrative state In Service when all conditions causing the Outage or Supporting Entity Outage operational states have been cleared for a specific time period. In this page the current setting of the Auto-Provisioning parameter and the related parameters is displayed.How to Create Equipment/Facilities Automatically Step 2 Select the Database tab. Step 8 End of Procedure 122 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. In response. b) In response. Step 7 If you set AINS Enabled to Yes: Use the AINS Default Timer field to specify the period of time that the operational state Outage or Supporting Entity Outage operational states must have been cleared before automatic transition to In Service shall take place. or Cancel to discard the change. When Automatic In Service state is used. In response. Any new equipment that is added will also be automatically provisioned. modules. the Modify window appears. Step 5 Step 6 Use the Preferred Facility Type drop-down list to select whether auto provisioned channel facilities shall be SDH or SONET. You can only set an entity’s administrative state to Automatic In Service if the entity that supports it is also Automatic In Service or In Service and the entity that is supports is not In Service. Step 3 Select the Modify button on the Database tab. Step 4 If the Auto-Provisioning parameter is currently set to No: Change it to Yes as follows: a) Use the Auto-Provisioning drop-down list to select Yes. the Network Element will automatically provision all shelves. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .3 80000014705 Issue: B. Select OK to apply the change. the Parameter pane displays the Database page. Use the AINS Enabled drop-down list to select whether provisioned entities shall be set to state Automatic In Service or not. pluggable transceivers and derivable facilities.

The instructions in this section should only be followed for additional support in conjunction with the procedures for managing encryption modules in the FSP 3000 Provisioning and Operations Manual. When the LED turns RED. Both the far-end and near-end encryption module must provisioned completely the same way: o o both module entities are created and available all optical parameters are set • • FSP 3000R7 R10. encryption modules require two initial settings to fully encrypt data. immediately after the module is created. General Requirements • • The network element (NE) that shall support encryption modules has to be equipped with an NCU-II module (second-generation NCU). which are essential for the module operation Configuring Maintenance Settings. the MOD LED blinks yellow. The Inventory tab and Crypto tab will be blocked for a couple of seconds.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Managing Encryption Modules How to set-up and manage encryption modules is described in the FSP 3000 Provisioning and Operations Manual. Note Follow these procedures to get started with encryption modules: How to Change the Crypto-Officer Password How to Specify the Module Authentication Password How to View the Key Exchange How to Change the Crypto-Officer Password This instruction describes how to change the Crypto-Officer (CO) password and thus acquire ownership of the encryption module. PS User Manual 123 . authentication via the CO password is required. which can optionally be set as required Configuring Initial Settings After provisioned to the network element (NE). During this period. the module is ready for operation.3 80000014705 Issue: B. using an user account with ADMIN privileges. Follow the procedures in this sequence: Configuring Initial Settings. The Element Manager is set to manage the NE via SNMPv3. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential To successfully change or set any security-related parameters. “Provisioning Encryption Modules”. This section supports the FSP 3000 Provisioning and Operations Manual by giving more detailed guidance on using the Element Manager to perform each individual task involved.

You can see the dependant entities by expanding the Dependent Entities field. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Step 3 Step 4 Set the administrative state (Admin State field) to Maintenance ( see “How to Change the Administrative State” on p. Select the encryption module in the Entities pane. CO passwords can be different for each encryption module. Step 5 Step 6 From the Actions button. CO passwords can be different for each encryption module. Requirements • The CO password has to be changed on both the near-end and far-end encryption module.Managing Encryption Modules The CO password has to be changed on both the near-end and far-end encryption module. In response the encryption related parameters of the module are displayed. 260). all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameter pane. Select the Crypto tab in the Parameter pane. Ensure that you are familiar with the requirements in “General Requirements” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the Parameter pane displays. In response. In response the Change Password window appears. select Change Password. In response. 123. • Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. Set the administrative state of all dependant entities to Maintenance. 124 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.

123. (.] Step 9 Step 10 Re-enter the new password in the Confirm New Password field. Ensure that you are familiar with the requirements in “General Requirements” on p. if required. Communicating encryption modules must have the same authentication password. ). ]. ensure it is different from the old password. ^.. You can then verify the first key exchange. %.3 80000014705 Issue: B.. The authentication password has to be changed on both the near-end and far-end encryption modules within 15 minutes. [. Select OK to save your settings. The password must comply with the following requirements: • • • consist of at least 10 and at most 32 characters consist of at least one lower [ a . -. |.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 7 Enter the currently used CO password in the Old Password field. as described in How to View the Key Exchange. Note When you have completed this instruction for the encryption modules in each end of the encryption link. _. In response the MOD LED of the module changes from red to green. {. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential This instruction describes how to specify the authentication password that the encryption modules use for identification. a first key exchange will take place. ~. Ensure that you know the IP address of the far-end NE and the CO password of the far-end encryption module. PS • • User Manual 125 . If this is the first time you change the password.z] and one upper character [A. Step 8 Enter the new CO password in the New Password field.Z] plus a number [0.1”. encryption of the link will start.@. +. #. Requirements • The authentication password has to be changed on both the near-end and far-end encryption module. Therefore you must be able to quickly access the far-end module. }.. or Cancel to cancel them. $. If the key exchange is successful . End of Procedure How to Specify the Module Authentication Password FSP 3000R7 R10. .9] optionally contain special characters [!. the currently used password is “CHANGEME.

Select the Crypto tab in the Parameter pane. In response the encryption related parameters of the module are displayed. In response the Change Authenticaion key window appears. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Step 4 Step 5 Set the administrative state (Admin State field) to Maintenance ( see “How to Change the Administrative State” on p. the Parameter pane displays. Step 3 Select the module’s network channel (for example CH-1-17-N OTU2P). 126 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Select the encryption module in the Entities pane. In response. Step 6 From the Actions button.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Managing Encryption Modules Procedure Step 1 Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. In response. 260). In response. all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameter pane. all available information about the entitiy is displayed in the Parameter pane. select Change AuthKey.

9] optionally contain special characters [!. ^. Requirements • FSP 3000R7 R10. Select the encryption module in the Entities pane. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential You must have successfully changed the CO password and specified the authentication password as described in How to Change the Crypto-Officer Password and How to Specify the Module Authentication Password. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. User Manual 127 . $. End of Procedure How to View the Key Exchange This instruction describes how to verify the key exchange by checking when the latest key exchange took place. (. Step 4 Select the Monitoring tab.z] and one upper character [A. ).@.. _.3 80000014705 Issue: B. or Cancel to cancel them. all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameter pane. -. In response. [. ]. Select OK to save your settings.Z] plus a number [0.. Step 3 Select the module’s network channel (for example CH-1-17-N OTU2P). ~. all available information about the entitiy is displayed in the Parameter pane. In response.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 7 Enter a new authentication password in the Authentication key field.. +. %.] Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Re-enter the new authentication password in the Retype key field. #. the Parameter pane displays. |. Enter the CO password in the Password field. {. The password must comply with the following requirements: • • • consist of at least 10 and at most 32 characters consist of at least one lower [ a . In response. }. .

These subsections are covered: How to Change the Session-Key Lifetime How to Force a Key Exchange How to Reset the Key Exchange Fail Counter How to View the Key Exchange Fail Counter How to Update the Encryption Module Firmware How to Switch Off Encryption How to View the Encryption-Off Timer How to Switch On Encryption How to Configure a Network Interface Loopback FSP 3000R7 R10. the Parameter pane displays. End of Procedure Configuring Maintenance Settings This section provides instructions for maintaining encryption modules. This also includes the time that was required entering the wrong password three times before the key exchange failure.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The session-key lifetime indicates for how long a session key can still be used after an exchange of a newly generated session key has failed three times. In response. the Parameter pane shows latest (Current) key exchange time. 128 User Manual .Managing Encryption Modules Step 5 Select Key exchange time from the Monitoring Type drop-down list. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential How to Change the Session-Key Lifetime Follow this instruction to change the session-key lifetime from its default value of “1-DAY”. Procedure Step 1 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. In response.

Step 4 Step 5 Set the administrative state (Admin State field) to Maintenance ( see “How to Change the Administrative State” on p. or Cancel to cancel them. In response the encryption related parameters of the module are displayed. Step 3 Select the module’s network channel (for example CH-1-17-N OTU2P). all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameter pane. End of Procedure User Manual 129 . 260). In response. Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Select the appropriate time from the Session key lifetime drop-down list. In response. FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Select OK to save your settings. Enter the CO password in the Password field. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 6 Select Modify.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 2 Select the encryption module in the Entities pane. Select the Crypto tab in the Parameter pane. the Modify window appears. all available information about the entitiy is displayed in the Parameter pane.

In response the Modify window appears. 260). select Force Key Exchange.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. Select the Crypto tab in the Parameter pane. Step 4 Step 5 Set the administrative state (Admin State field) to Maintenance ( see “How to Change the Administrative State” on p.Managing Encryption Modules How to Force a Key Exchange This instruction describes how to manually initiate a key exchange to avoid a ten-minute timeout before a new session key is exchanged. Select the encryption module in the Entities pane. FSP 3000R7 R10. In response. Step 6 From the Actions button. all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameter pane. In response. all available information about the entitiy is displayed in the Parameter pane. 130 User Manual . In response. Enter the CO password in the Password field. the Parameter pane displays. Step 7 Step 8 Select Key Exchange from the Force key exchange drop-down list. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential In response the encryption related parameters of the module are displayed. Step 3 Select the module’s network channel (for example CH-1-17-N OTU2P).

260). Step 3 Select the module’s network channel (for example CH-1-17-N OTU2P). Select the encryption module in the Entities pane. In response. Step 4 PS In response. This is useful: • • When the key exchange process has failed three times and an attack can be excluded. In response. You must not follow this instruction if an attack caused the encryption to stop. User Manual 131 . or Cancel to cancel them. the Parameter pane displays.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 9 Select OK to save your settings. Set the administrative state (Admin State field) to Maintenance ( see “How to Change the Administrative State” on p. Requirement Before resetting. ensure that no attacks caused the key exchange failure and that the module is operating correctly. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane.3 80000014705 Issue: B. all available information about the entitiy is displayed in the Parameter pane. After self test. Note FSP 3000R7 R10. all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameter pane. End of Procedure How to Reset the Key Exchange Fail Counter This instruction describes how to reset the counter of failed key exchanges.

the Parameter pane displays. Enter the CO password in the Password field. In response.Managing Encryption Modules Step 5 Select the Crypto tab in the Parameter pane. or Cancel to cancel them. In response. Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Select Key Exchange Reset from the Key exchange fail reset drop-down list. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. End of Procedure How to View the Key Exchange Fail Counter Follow this instruction to view the counter of failed key exchanges. Select OK to save your settings. 132 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. select Reset Key Exchange Fail Counter. Select the encryption module in the Entities pane. all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameter pane. Step 6 From the Actions button. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response the Modify window appears. In response the encryption related parameters of the module are displayed.

Ensure you are familiar with the requirements in “General Requirements” on p. • • User Manual 133 . the module automatically reestablishes the encryption connection to the far-end module.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 3 Select the module’s network channel (for example CH-1-17-N OTU2P).3 or higher. However. The maximum value that can be observed is 3. End of Procedure FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 4 Step 5 Select the Monitoring tab. Requirement • The network element (NE) on which the relevant encryption module resides has to run software release 10. the Parameter pane shows how many times the key exchange has failed.3 80000014705 Issue: B. PS Note Firmware updates for encryption modules are distributed separately from NE software updates.advaoptical. In response. all available information about the entitiy is displayed in the Parameter pane. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential How to Update the Encryption Module Firmware Updating the firmware of encryption modules is service affecting (SA). Changing security-related parameters on an encryption module always requires authentication by entering the CO password. update the NE software as described in “Updating NE Software in a Network” on p. In response. Follow this instruction to update the firmware of an encryption module. Select Key exchange failed from the Monitoring Type drop-down list.com/. 423. because encryption stops after three failed key exchanges. If necessary. 123. They are made available through the Customer Portal at http://www. if this instruction is completed within 10 minutes.

Managing Encryption Modules Procedure Step 1 Download the appropriate firmware package from the Customer Portal to a storage location that is addressable by the NE on which the relevant encryption module resides. Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. 1. Step 2 Step 5 Select the Modify button. 134 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.9. Step 4 Select the Crypto tab in the Parameter pane. the Parameter pane displays. Select OK to save your settings. In response the Modify window appears. In response the encryption related parameters of the module are displayed.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Select Yes from the Allow FWP Update drop-down list. Step 3 Select the encryption module in the Entities pane. This may be your management PC or an FTP/SCP server.3) to install in the Firmware Release field. or Cancel to cancel them. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . In response. Enter the CO password in the Password field. Enter the exact name of the firmware release (e.g. all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameter pane. In response.

Step 12 Select Install Crypto FWP from External. In response. FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 11 Select the Update Equipment Firmware (FWP) radio button. In response. select Configuration -> Software Control. User Manual 135 .Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 10 From the Main Menu. and then select Next to continue. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The Active Software Package and Standby Software Package sections displays which software package versions that are stored in the active and Standby Areas of the NE. the Software Control start window is displayed. the Install Equipment Firmware (FWP) page appears.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

In a bi-directional IP communication the two IP hosts involved need to be able to reach each other. see “About FTP and SCP” on p. SCP is a more secure protocol. Some network operators may configure their network in such a way that only the IP range in which the System IP addresses reside will be routed through their network.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Select System IP if the system IP address should be used. If the SCP host is unknown. the default IP address as chosen by the IP stack can be used. The user must therefore ensure that the known hosts table includes the SCP host.Managing Encryption Modules Step 13 In response. Use the Own IP drop-down list to specify the IP address to use in the IP header as follows: • • Select Default-IP if the IP address that the IP stack would choose by default should be used (this is the IP address of the interface through which the packet is sent). © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential If you are not familiar with FTP or SCP. If the network operator has configured his network to route the IP range in which the IP addresses of the physical IP interfaces reside. Since both IP hosts identify each other by the IP addresses in the IP header of the IP packets. In this case it must be made sure that the FSP 3000R7 NE uses the System IP to identify itself as the source in the IP header of packets it is sending. Step 14 Select which protocol to use when downloading the firmware to the target NE. a successful IP communication relies on the availability of routes for these IP addresses in all the routers along the path between the IP hosts. the Install Crypto FWP from External window appears. Step 15 During a file transfer. Use the Protocol drop down list. The options are FTP or SCP. the NE's FTP or SCP client identifies itself with an IP address. 459 for a brief overview. FSP 3000R7 R10. 136 User Manual . the transfer will fail.

If the relative path has already been defined in the external server configuration. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 20 Step 21 PS In the Password field. Select OK to start the upload. The NCU ACT FWP Rev. Progress is displayed in the lower. Select the encryption module to update the firmware package for in the Select Equipment list. Note Step 18 Step 19 FSP 3000R7 R10. Ask IT personnel in your organization for this IP address if you do not know it. Step 17 Specify the location of the firmware pacakge on the external server by entering the relative path on the external server into the Path Name field.3 80000014705 Issue: B. It depends on the remote server whether the case of this entry as entered is taken into account before validation by the remote server. Ensure that the correct firmware revisions of the relevant encryption module are displayed: • • The FWP Rev. left corner of the Backup/Restore window.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 16 Enter the IP address of the SCP or FTP server where the firmware package is located. enter the user account name to gain access to the FTP/SCP server. do not enter anything in the Path Name field. It depends on the remote server whether the case of this entry as entered is taken into account before validation by the remote server. User Manual 137 . In the Login field. into the Server field. or Cancel to discard your entries and return to the Backup/Restore window. enter the password to gain access to the FTP/SCP server. the download may fail. column displays the current module firmware revision. Otherwise. displays the revision that becomes active on the module when updated.

Select Finish to close the Software Control window.3 80000014705 Issue: B. which indicates that the Element Manager is waiting for access to the update process on the NE.Managing Encryption Modules Step 22 Select Next to continue. However. The following messages are used: • • • • • Pending. FSP 3000R7 R10. which indicates that the process hasn’t started yet. which indicates that the Element Manager update process successfully finished. In response. Updating which indicates that the Element Manager is checking if an NCU software update or FWP update is already ongoing. 138 User Manual . During the update. the Update of equipment page appears. Step 23 Select Start Upgrade to start the update process. the reboot of the modules may not yet be completed. and select Yes in the confirmation window that appears. the Status field will display the status for each module. Checking Status. which indicates that the process has failed and the FWP has not been updated. Finished. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Note Step 24 End of Procedure PS The update cannot be stopped. Failed.

Switching off encryption is itself not service affecting (NSA). Select the Crypto tab in the Parameter pane. User Manual 139 . encryption will automatically be reestablished after 30 minutes. However. In response. Select the module’s network channel (for example CH-1-17-N OTU2P). Select the encryption module in the Entities pane. In response the encryption related parameters of the module are displayed. In response. but you can manually restart it any time earlier.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs How to Switch Off Encryption This instruction describes how to switch off encryption for an encryption module. when encryption is switched on again. Procedure Step 1 FSP 3000R7 R10. all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameter pane. for example setting up network interface loopbacks reconfiguring encryption modules initially setting up an encryption link If switched off. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 PS Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. Note Only switch off encryption for: • • • maintenance purposes.3 80000014705 Issue: B. regardless of whether this is done manually or automatically after 30 minutes. Set the administrative state (Admin State field) to Maintenance ( see “How to Change the Administrative State” on p. 260). the following generation and exchange of a new session key affects service (SA). all available information about the entitiy is displayed in the Parameter pane. Switching off encryption involves enabling transparent mode for the module. In response. the Parameter pane displays.

Additionally. the Set transparent mode field becomes editable.Managing Encryption Modules Step 6 Select the Modify button. Select OK to save your settings. Step 3 Select the module’s network channel (for example CH-1-17-N OTU2P). Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Select Yes from the Allow transparent mode drop-down list. In response. Select the encryption module in the Entities pane. 140 User Manual . Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameter pane. FSP 3000R7 R10. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Select OK to save your settings. or Cancel to cancel them. the N-port LED turns yellow indicating that traffic is not encrypted in transmission direction. the module operates in transparent mode. When encryption is switched off. Enter the CO password in the Password field. In response. In response the Modify window appears. End of Procedure How to View the Encryption-Off Timer This instruction describes how long time encryption has been switched off. If the Set transparent mode field displays Yes. Select Yes from the Set transparent mode drop-down list. the Parameter pane displays. Select the Modify button.3 80000014705 Issue: B. encryption has successfully been switched off. In response the Modify window appears. all available information about the entitiy is displayed in the Parameter pane. Enter the CO password in the Password field. In response. or Cancel to cancel them.

all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameter pane. check how long encryption had been switched off already to ascertain whether it is necessary to follow this instruction (see “How to View the Encryption-Off Timer” on p. 260). the Parameter pane shows the time in minutes that encryption has been switched off. Since encryption will be reestablished after 30 minutes. User Manual 141 . Traffic is interrupted during that time. This procedure is service affecting (SA): Having finished this procedure. Select the encryption module in the Entities pane. In response. PS Note Requirements • FSP 3000R7 R10. • Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. End of Procedure How to Switch On Encryption This instruction describes how to manually encryption switch on. In response. the Parameter pane displays. as there is no transmission without key exchange. Step 4 Set the administrative state (Admin State field) to Maintenance ( see “How to Change the Administrative State” on p. Switching off encryption involves disabling transparent mode for the module. In response.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 4 Step 5 Select the Monitoring tab. it takes a few minutes until encryption has completely reestablished itself. Select Encryption off Time from the Monitoring Type drop-down list.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 3 Select the module’s network channel (for example CH-1-17-N OTU2P). In response. This is because a new session key has to be generated. 140). © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Encryption was manually switched off (or transparent mode enabled) by the CO before. all available information about the entitiy is displayed in the Parameter pane.

verify the that the first key exchange has taken place as described in How to View the Key Exchange. 142 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. In response the encryption related parameters of the module are displayed. Step 6 Select the Modify button. If relevant.Managing Encryption Modules Step 5 Select the Crypto tab in the Parameter pane.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response the Modify window appears. End of Procedure How to Configure a Network Interface Loopback This instruction describes how to set facility or terminal loopbacks on the network interface for test purposes. Enter the CO password in the Password field. Select No from the Allow transparent mode drop-down list. Select OK to save your settings. Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Select No from the Set transparent mode drop-down list. or Cancel to cancel them. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Requirement Encryption is switched off.

Select the Modify button. Step 3 Select the module’s network channel (for example CH-1-17-N OTU2P).To release a loopback. 260). In reponse the Modify Operation window appears. Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 FSP 3000R7 R10. Select the relevant loopback from the Loopback drop-down list: • ORP-FACILITY .A facility loopback is used to test the communication link between the near-end and far-end encryption module. It assumes that the relevant channel modules and protection modules are already correctly provisioned. Select OK to save your settings. That is. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Set the administrative state (Admin State field) to Maintenance ( see “How to Change the Administrative State” on p. That is. In response. In response. all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameter pane. data received at the near-end network port is sent back to the far-end encryption module. The laser of the network port is switched off.A terminal loopback is to test the communication link between the near-end encryption module and the Customer Premises Equipment (CPE).3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response. • ORP-TERMINAL . all available information about the entitiy is displayed in the Parameter pane. or Cancel to cancel them.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. Select the encryption module in the Entities pane. the Parameter pane displays. • RLS . Step 9 End of Procedure Creating Protection Groups This section describes how to create protection groups. data multiplexed at the client ports is looped back at the network port. Select the Operation tab. FSP 3000R7 supports three types of protection: • • • • • channel protection channel card protection client channel card protection virtual channel protection versatile protection User Manual 143 .

b) Make a note of the channel module type and its location. 152 “How to Create a Virtual Channel Protection Group” on p. 164 How to Create a Channel Protection Group This section describes how to create a channel protection group or a channel card protection group in the internal database. The two network side pluggable transceivers must already be provisioned. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential • A channel module with two pluggable transceivers on the network side must already be provisioned using the correct transmission mode. 147 “How to Create a Client Channel Card Protection Group” on p. 92. 144 “How to Create a Channel Card Protection Group” on p. but they must both be provisioned to the same equipment type. These parameters are not relevant for all facility types. 144 User Manual . Channels must already be provisioned on these two plugs. Creating a protection group means associating two network side ports together in a group. See “How to Create a Module” on p. ALS mode. The plugs may differ in provisioned channel. • • Procedure Step 1 If you are provisioning protection as a part of installation: a) Use the Service and Configuration documents in the Installation Plan to identify the location of the channel module that shall be used to realize protection of the channel. 162 “How to Delete a Protection Group” on p. Requirements FSP 3000R7 R10.Creating Protection Groups In the following the procedures for configuring each of these protection groups are described. 87. 156 “How to Create an Ethernet Linear Protection Group” on p. reach and rate. It must be set to operate either in “Transponder HST” or “Multiplexer HST” mode. using the Create window. 158 “How to Create a Versatile Protection Group” on p. See “How to Create a Plug” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B. See “How to Clone a Channel (Port)” on p. and signal degrade threshold and hold-off period parameters must be provisioned alike on both channels. The facility type. error forwarding. 96. The following topics are provided: “How to Create a Channel Protection Group” on p.

Verify that the channel module is provisioned in accordance with the requirements.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 2 If you are provisioning protection as a part of testing: a) If you are configuring a Network Element with equipment that is physically in place: • Identify the channel module type that can support this protection method. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 8 Select the relevant protection group AID address from the list. In response the Create Protection Group wizard starts. This is a list of AID addresses for the protection groups that can be created. Select the channel module. Step 6 Step 7 FSP 3000R7 R10. Parameters Step 2. the Create window will display the Create Protection Group list section on the right side. User Manual 145 . If network side pluggables are supported: Verify that the two network side pluggable transceiver cages are already provisioned in accordance with the requirements.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The titles are: Parameters Step 1. b) If you are configuring a currently un-equipped Network Element: Make a note of the channel module type that can support the protection method. etc. If the required entities have been provisioned already. • Make a note of the location that contains such a channel module. Use the left hand hierarchical entity list in the Create window for this selection. Verify that the two network side channels are already provisioned in accordance with the requirements. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Select the relevant NE in the Entities pane. The working path will be on the corresponding port/channel. The final page has the title Confirm. Each page in the wizard has a title.

b) Use the Protection AID drop-down list to select which port/channel shall be used for the protection path. Step 10 When the Confirm wizard page appears: a) Check that the displayed settings are correct. not all are applicable for all module types: a) Use the Working AID drop-down list to select which port/channel shall be used for the working path. The options depend on the module type. The hold-off is the period of time. Channel Protection. d) Use the Maintenance Switching drop-down list to select the protection level. the following are examples: • LINE/MSP: SDH/Sonet Multiplex Section/Line layer protection: • SNC-N-PM: Sub-network connection protection with non-intrusive monitoring (OTN) • PHYS: Physical layer protection • PCS: Physical Coding Sublayer protection • MUX: Proprietary multiplexed signal protection e) Use the APS Hold-Off drop-down list to select the correct hold-off time to use.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Your selection of protection level under Maintenance Switching decides which signal layer that signal degrade conditions are considered from. c) The Protection Mechanism field displays protection mechanism for this protection group.Creating Protection Groups Step 9 Enter parameters as follows. c) If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . b) If the settings are incorrect and you used the Create Protection Group option: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. f) Use the Revertive drop-down list to specify whether the protection group shall be revertive or not. Step 11 If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Result page. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. A revertive protection group will switch back to the working path once the condition that caused the protection switch has been cleared. in milliseconds. The hold-off time coordinates timing of protection switches in cases with multiple layers or cascaded protection domains. that initiation of an automatic protection switch will be delayed after a detected failure condition. In response the Result window appears. g) Use the Switch Trigger On SD drop-down list to enable or disable whether a signal degrade condition shall be regarded as a protection switching related failure. Step 12 146 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.

Any already User Manual 147 . FSP 3000R7 R10. If client entities exist on the protection module. Creating a channel card protection group means associating two network side ports together in a group. using the Create window. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Close the window by selecting Close. The extent of the forceful alignment is as follows: • All client entities provisioned on the working module will automatically be copied to the module defined as the protection module. and differ in protection relevant parameters from the ones of the working module. End of Procedure How to Create a Channel Card Protection Group This section describes how to create a channel card protection group in the internal database. In response the Protection window appears.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 13 Check that the settings you made for the protection group are correct by right-clicking the channel module and selecting Protection from the context-sensitive menu that appears.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 14 The protection group has been successfully created for the channels in this NE. they will be aligned forcefully. The forceful alignment includes deletion of existing entities and creation of new ones. Assisted creation means that the Element Manager forcefully aligns the protection network channel with the working network channel at the same time as it creates the channel card protection group. Both manual creation of the channel group as well as assisted creation of the channel group is described.

Transponder East. If you plan to use the option of creating a protection group where the protection path configuration is forcefully aligned with the working path. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . reach and rate. The channel modules must be provisioned in accordance with: o o The channel module pair must have transmission modes Transponder. • All network entities provisioned on the working module will automatically be copied to the module defined as the protection module. Channel card protection between normal and tunable variants is supported.Creating Protection Groups provisioned client channel facility (e. If network side pluggables are supported: Verify that the network side pluggable transceiver cages on the two channel modules are already provisioned in accordance with the requirements. Requirements • Two channel modules in the same shelf. and of the same type. Verify for the channel modules that they are provisioned in accordance with the requirements. but they must both be provisioned to the same equipment type. Select the relevant NE in the Entities pane. They must be provisioned identically in order to support any APS mechanism and to support consistent switching triggers. Deployment Scenario cannot be Back To Back or Client Layer Protection. or Multiplexer West. • If the channel modules have a pluggable transceiver cage on the network side. then you only need to ensure that the network plug of the working module is correctly configured. Multiplexer. Step 5 Verify that the two network side channels are already provisioned in accordance with the requirements. • Procedure Step 1 Use the Service and Configuration documents in the Installation Plan to identify the location of the channel modules that shall be used to realize protection. Network ports (channels) must already be provisioned on these two channel modules or plugs. must already be provisioned. If the network channel facilities require a forceful alignment and an already provisioned ECC would no longer be available. these plugs must already be provisioned. If you plan to use the option of creating a protection group where the protection path configuration is forcefully aligned with the working path. the ECC will be deleted. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 148 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. The plugs may differ in provisioned channel. Multiplexer East. ECC) on the protection module will not be aligned forcefully but will remain unaffected.g. Transponder West. For example between 10TCC10G-D and 10TCC10GT-D.3 80000014705 Issue: B. then you only need to ensure that the network channel of the working module is correctly configured.

Parameters Step 2. and select Force Protection Creation from the context sensitive menu that appears. etc. In response the Force Protection Group wizard starts.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 6 Make a choice: • To create a protection group: Go to Step 7. Each page in the wizard has a title. The working path will be on the corresponding port/channel. Step 9 Right-click the network channel that shall be the working path in the hierarchical list in the Entities pane. The final page has the title Confirm. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 8 Select the relevant protection group AID address from the list. User Manual 149 . • To create a protection group and let the NE forcefully align the required parameters of the protection plug and protection network channel to those of the working plug and working network channel: Go to Step 9. Use the left hand hierarchical entity list in the Provisioning Manager window for this selection. Continue from Step 10. If the required entities have been provisioned already. Select the working channel module. etc. Parameters Step 2. In response the Create Protection Group wizard starts. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. This is a list of AID addresses for the protection groups that can be created. During the process you will have the option of adjusting some parameters before the forced alignment. The titles are: Parameters Step 1. The final page has the title Confirm. Each page in the wizard has a title. The titles are: Parameters Step 1.3 80000014705 Issue: B. This means that you must have manually aligned the parameters in Step 4 and Step 5. the Create window will display the Create Protection Group list section on the right side. Step 7 FSP 3000R7 R10. This helps you keep track of how far you have come.

Not all parameters are settable or supported by all channel module types. Your selection of protection level under Maintenance Switching decides which signal layer that signal degrade conditions are considered from. 150 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. a) Use the Working AID drop-down list to select which port/channel shall be used for the working path.Creating Protection Groups Step 10 In the Parameters Step pages. e) Use the Revertive drop-down list to specify whether the protection group shall be revertive or not. A revertive protection group will switch back to the working path once the condition that caused the protection switch has been cleared. The hold-off is the period of time. b) Use the Protection AID drop-down list to select which port/channel shall be used for the protection path. the following are examples: • LINE/MSP: SDH/Sonet Multiplex Section/Line layer protection • SNC-N-PM: Sub-network connection protection with non-intrusive monitoring (OTN) • PHYS: Physical layer protection • PCS: Physical Coding Sublayer protection • MUX: Proprietary multiplexed signal protection g) Use the Switch Trigger On SD drop-down list to enable or disable whether a signal degrade condition shall be regarded as a protection switching related failure. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .or bi-directional. that initiation of an automatic protection switch will be delayed after a detected failure condition. h) Use the Directionally drop-down list to set the switching direction to uni. The hold-off time coordinates timing of protection switches in cases with multiple layers or cascaded protection domains.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The options depend on the module type. in milliseconds. enter values for the following parameters. Select Yes to set the revertive mode or select No to set the non-revertive mode. This parameter may not be settable for all channel module types. d) Use the APS Hold-Off drop-down list to select the correct hold-off time to use. f) Use the Maintenance Switching drop-down list to select the protection level. c) Use the Protection Mechanism drop-down list to select the relevant protection mechanism for the protection group.

In response the Protection window appears.3 80000014705 Issue: B. b) If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 11 When the Confirm wizard page appears: a) Check that the displayed settings are correct. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Close the window by selecting Close. Step 15 The protection group has been successfully created for the channels in this NE. Step 13 Step 14 FSP 3000R7 R10. If you created the protection group using forced alignment: A warning window will appear to inform you that the forced alignment is service affecting and that all dependent entities will be removed. You must continue. c) If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. End of Procedure User Manual 151 . Otherwise: The Result window appears. Step 12 If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Result page. Check that the settings you made for the protection group are correct by right-clicking the channel module and selecting Protection from the context-sensitive menu that appears. Afterwards the Result window appears.

The forceful alignment includes deletion of existing entities and creation of new ones. Select the relevant NE in the Entities pane. and of the same type. Step 2 152 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. and provisioned alike since a protection switch is not allowed to change the signal in any way. They must be provisioned alike since a protection switch is not allowed to change the signal in any way.The channel modules must be provisioned in accordance with: o o o The channel module pair must have the correct transmission modes. • • Procedure Step 1 Use the Service and Configuration documents in the Installation Plan to identify the location of the channel modules that shall be used to realize the client channel card protection group. Assisted creation means that the Element Manager forcefully aligns the protection client channel with the working client channel at the same time as it creates the channel card protection group. or between C3 and C3. Creating a client channel card protection group means associating two client side channels (same port number) together in a group. using the Create window. Client channel protection can only be defined for alike ports. Deployment Scenario cannot be Client Layer Protection. Otherwise the Compatibiltiy Matrix list the capabilities for each module. Any other client entities will remain unaffected. must already be provisioned. Both manual creation of the client channel group as well as assisted creation of the client channel group is described. If the same client entity on the protection module differs in protection relevant parameters from the ones of the working module. Hot standby modes are not allowed. for example Multiplexer East and Multiplexer West. it will be aligned forcefully. This is normally readable directly from the capability drop-down list. Requirements • Two channel modules in the same shelf. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . The extent of the forceful alignment is as follows: • The client entity on the working module will automatically be copied to the module defined as the protection module. between C1 and C1. • If the channel modules have a pluggable transceiver cage on the client side: These plugs must already be provisioned. for example.3 80000014705 Issue: B. For some modules the correct module capability must be selected to allow client channel card protection. Client ports (channels) must already be provisioned on these two channel modules or plugs.Creating Protection Groups How to Create a Client Channel Card Protection Group This section describes how to create a client channel card protection group in the internal database.

If you plan to use the option of creating a protection group where the protection path configuration is forcefully aligned with the working path. Step 7 User Manual 153 . • To create a protection group and let the NE forcefully align the required parameters of the protection client plug and protection channel to those of the working client plug and working channel: Go to Step 9. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Make a choice: To create a protection group: Go to Step 7. During the process you will have the option of adjusting some parameters before the forced alignment takes place. This is a list of AID addresses for the protection groups that can be created. Step 6 FSP 3000R7 R10. Select the working channel module.This means that you must have manually aligned the parameters in Step 4 and Step 5.: If client side pluggables are supported: Verify that the client side pluggable transceiver cages on the two channel modules are already provisioned according to the requirements. Step 5 Verify that the two client side channels are already provisioned according to the requirements. then you only need to ensure that the client channel of the working module is correctly configured and that the client channel on the protection module has been created on the correct port. If you to use the option of creating a protection group where the protection path configuration is forcefully aligned with the working path. 83) for this selection. the Provisioning Manager window will display the Create Protection Group list section on the right side. If the required entities have been provisioned already. Use the left hand hierarchical entity list in the Provisioning Manager window (see “Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 3 Step 4 Verify that the channel modules are in place and provisioned in accordance with the requirements. then you only need to ensure that the client plug of the working module is correctly configured and that the client plug on the protection module has been created on the correct port.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential c) The Protection Mechanism field shows the protection mechanism for this protection group. The hold-off time coordinates timing of protection switches in cases with multiple layers or cascaded protection domains. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. The working path will be on the corresponding port/channel.3 80000014705 Issue: B. in milliseconds. Step 9 Right-click the client channel that shall be the working path in the hierarchical list in the Entities pane. The titles are: Parameters Step 1. d) The Maintenance Switching field shows the protection level. In response the Force Protection Group wizard starts. Each page in the wizard has a title. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. Continue from Step 10. b) Use the Protection AID drop-down list to select which port/channel shall be used for the protection path. and select Force Protection Creation from the context sensitive menu that appears. The titles are: Parameters Step 1. e) Use the APS Hold-Off drop-down list to select the correct hold-off time to use. A revertive protection group will switch back to the working path once the condition that caused the protection switch has been cleared. The final page has the title Confirm. Step 10 In the Parameters Step 1 page. which is CLIENT CARD. 154 User Manual . which is Multiplexer. The final page has the title Confirm. This means that this is proprietary multiplexed signal protection. enter the following values. etc. Parameters Step 2. that initiation of an automatic protection switch will be delayed after a detected failure condition. In response the Create Protection Group wizard starts. f) Use the Revertive drop-down list to specify whether the protection group shall be revertive or not. The hold-off is the period of time. etc. FSP 3000R7 R10. Parameters Step 2. Each page in the wizard has a title.Creating Protection Groups Step 8 Select the relevant protection group AID address from the list. Not all parameters are settable or supported for all channel module types: a) Use the Working AID drop-down list to select which port/channel shall be used for the working path.

Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 11 When the Confirm wizard page appears: a) Check that the displayed settings are correct. b) If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. Otherwise: The Result window appears. In response the Protection window appears. End of Procedure User Manual 155 . c) If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm.3 80000014705 Issue: B. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. You must continue. Step 12 If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Result page. Step 13 Step 14 FSP 3000R7 R10. Afterwards the Result window appears. in this NE. If you created the protection group using forced alignment: A warning window will appear to inform you that the forced alignment is service affecting and that all dependent entities will be removed. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Close the window by selecting Close. Step 15 The protection group has been successfully created for this client channel. Check that the settings you made for the protection group are correct by right-clicking the channel module and selecting Protection from the context-sensitive menu that appears.

See “How to Create a Port” on p. • Make a note of the location that contains such a channel module. Creating a virtual channel protection group means associating two network side virtual channels together.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Procedure Step 1 If you are provisioning protection as a part of installation: a) Use the Service and Configuration documents in the Installation Plan to identify the location of the channel module that shall be used to realize protection of the virtual channel. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential • • • • • The client side pluggable transceiver cage must already be provisioned. in a group. but they must both be provisioned to the same equipment type. 156 User Manual . The two network side pluggable transceiver cages must already be provisioned. 93. 168. 92. See “How to Create a Plug” on p. See “How to Create a Port” on p.Creating Protection Groups How to Create a Virtual Channel Protection Group This section describes how to create a virtual channel protection group in the internal database. error forwarding. using the Provisioning Manager window. See “How to Create a Plug” on p. ALS mode. reach and rate. 93. and signal degrade threshold and hold-off period parameters must be provisioned alike on both ports. Step 2 If you are provisioning protection as a part of testing: a) If you are configuring a Network Element with equipment that is physically in place: • Identify the channel module type that can support this protection method. 92. Virtual channels (VCHs) must already be provisioned on the two network ports. See “How to Create a Module” on p. FSP 3000R7 R10. Network side ports (channels) must already be provisioned. b) If you are configuring a currently un-equipped Network Element: Make a note of the channel module type that can support the protection method. Cross connects between the client channel and the east virtual channel. 87. b) Make a note of the channel module type and its location. Both ports must be provisioned alike. and between the client channel and the west virtual channel must already be provisioned. The facility type. A client side channel must already be provisioned on the client port. The plugs may differ in provisioned channel. Requirements for creating a channel protection group • • A 4TCA-PCN-4GU+4G must already be provisioned to operate in ADM mode. See “How to Create an ADM or ROADM Cross Connection” on p.

Step 8 When the Confirm wizard page appears: a) Check that the displayed settings are correct. In response. Step 6 FSP 3000R7 R10. In response the Create Protection Group wizard starts. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. b) Use the Working AID drop-down list to select which port/channel shall be used for the working path. Parameters Step 2. Use the left hand hierarchical entity list in the Provisioning Manager window for this selection. etc. 246. d) Use the APS Hold-Off drop-down list to specify the hold off time before a protection switch takes place after the protection switching criteria are fulfilled. as described in “Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually” on p. Step 9 Check that the protection group was successfully created See “How to view Single Protection Group Settings (Method A)” on p. 83. If the required entities have been provisioned already. The titles are: Parameters Step 1.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the Provisioning Manager window will display the Create Protection Group list section on the right side.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Select the relevant NE in the Entities pane. c) Use the Protection AID drop-down list to select which port/channel shall be used for the protection path. Step 7 In the Parameters Step 1 page. b) If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. Select the channel module in the location you identified in step 1 or step 2. Open the Provisioning Manager window. The working path will be on the corresponding port/virtual channel. User Manual 157 . This is a list of AID addresses for the protection groups that can be created. Each page in the wizard has a title. c) If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Select the relevant protection group AID address from the list. the Complete window appears. do as follows: a) Use the Protection Mechanism drop-down list to select path protection. The final page has the title Confirm.

This type of protection is only supported for the xPCA modules. follow the procedure describing this in the FSP 3000 Provisioning and Operations Manual.3 80000014705 Issue: B. See “How to Create a Flow Point (FLW)” on p. Make a note of the channel module type and its location. CFM maintenance flows for the working and protection paths must already be configured. Select the relevant NE in the Entities pane. Close the Provisioning Manager window by selecting Close. 325. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Creating an Ethernet linear protection group means associating two flow points together in a group. In response. This section supports the procedure in the FSP 3000 Provisioning and Operations Manual by giving more detailed guidance on using the Element Manager to create the Ethernet linear protection group. The working and protection flow points must already be configured. Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 How to Create an Ethernet Linear Protection Group To configure Ethernet linear protection. 196. This section describes how to create an Ethernet linear protection group in the internal database using the Flow Connections window.Creating Protection Groups Step 10 If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Complete page. • • Procedure Step 1 Use the Service and Configuration documents in the Installation Plan to identify the location of the xPCA channel module that shall be used to realize protection of the Ethernet EVC. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. 184 and “How to Create a Flow Cross Connection” on p. If all other modules that are required to realize the channel that is protected are physically in place and provisioned: The channel is protected. where the two ports holding the working and protection flow points must have role I-NNI. The procedure in this section should only be followed for additional support in conjunction with the procedure for configuring Ethernet linear protection in the FSP 3000 Provisioning and Operations Manual. Step 2 158 User Manual . See “How to Create an Ethernet Port (ETH)” on p. Requirements for creating an Ethernet linear protection group • The three Ethernet ports (ETHs) must already be configured. you are returned to the Provisioning Manager window. FSP 3000R7 R10. 101. See “Configuring Ethernet OAM/CFM” on p. and cross-connected to the flow point holding the service to protect.

3 80000014705 Issue: B. FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 4 Select the Ethernet Linear Protection Groups tab. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 159 .Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 3 Right-click the xPCA channel module in the location you identified in step 1. In response the Flow Connections window content changes. In response the Flow Connections window appears. and select Flow Connections from the menu that appears.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . 160 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. b) Select Next to continue. Each page in the wizard has a title.Creating Protection Groups Step 5 Select Create to start the Create Ethernet Linear Protection wizard. Step 6 In the Ethernet Linear Protection entities to create page do as follows: a) Select the Ethernet linear protection group entity (FFP) that represents the working path. where the difference is the port. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. The Ethernet linear protection group entities that are possible to create are displayed using the syntax FFP_FLW_<shelf>-<slot>-<port>-F<SVID>. In response the Create Protection Group wizard starts. the other cannot be created. Thus for the same SVID there are two possible protection group entities (FFPs). However.3 80000014705 Issue: B. once you select one of them. In response the Working and Protection page appears.

In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential b) Select Next to continue.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 7 In the Working and Protection page. 246. do as follows: a) The CFM maintenance flows which monitor the working and protection paths are associated with a Maintenance Domain. c) If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm. b) Select Next to continue. b) If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. In response the Confirm page appears. User Manual 161 . Step 9 In the Confirm page do as follows: a) Check that the displayed settings are correct. Use the Monitored Domain Level drop-down list to select the level that this Maintenance Domain has. the Result page appears. If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Result page. Step 10 Step 11 Check that the protection group was successfully created See “How to view Single Protection Group Settings (Method A)” on p. FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 8 In the Parameters Step 1 page. In response the Parameters Step 1 page appears. do as follows: a) Ensure that the displayed working flow point AID is correct.

: The Ethernet E-Line EVC is protected. Close the Flow Connections window by selecting Close. you are returned to the Flow Connections window. See “How to Create a Port” on p. Step 3 Step 4 162 User Manual . Requirements • • A VSM and 2OSCM or OSCM-P module must already be provisioned. Open the Provisioning Manager window. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Procedure Step 1 If you are provisioning protection as a part of installation: a) Use the Service and Configuration documents in the Installation Plan to identify the location of the VSM module that shall be used. Select the relevant NE in the Entities pane. 87. Step 2 If you are provisioning protection as a part of testing: • If you are configuring a Network Element with equipment that is physically in place: Identify the VSM module and make a note of its location. Two network side ports (channels) must already be provisioned on this channel module. as described in “Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B. FSP 3000R7 R10. 93. See “How to Create a Module” on p. If the working and protection flow points have been correctly cross-connected to the flow point to protect. b) Make a note of the module’s location.Creating Protection Groups Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. In response. End of Procedure How to Create a Versatile Protection Group This procedure describes how to create a versatile protection group for a channel group or a line. 83.

the Provisioning Manager window will display the Create Protection Group list section on the right side. 144 or “How to Create a Channel Card Protection Group” on p. Step 7 FSP 3000R7 R10. Use the left hand hierarchical entity list in the Provisioning Manager window for this selection. If all other modules that are required to realize the protection are physically in place and provisioned: The protection is active.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 5 Select the VCM in the location you identified in step 1 or step 2. If the required entities have been provisioned. Step 6 Provision the protection group as described in “How to Create a Channel Protection Group” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 147. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential End of Procedure User Manual 163 .

Both FFP-CH entities that are part of the protection group will be deleted. using the Protection Group drop-down list. or select Configuration->Protection from the Main Menu. In response. End of Procedure 164 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. and there is one entity for each end channel in the protection group. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant channel module that is used in a protection group. the Protection window appears. meaning that the information about that protection group can be viewed by selecting either of the two FFP entities. For example. Step 3 Select the correct protection group. Step 5 Close the Protection window by selecting Close. Step 4 Select the Delete button. You can select either of these two here.Creating Protection Groups How to Delete a Protection Group This instruction describes how to delete a protection group using the Protection window. This list contains the FFP-CH entities.3 80000014705 Issue: B. FFP-CH-1-18-NE1 and FFP-CH-1-18-NW1 can be defined to be in a protection group. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Either right-click the module and select Protection from the context sensitive menu that appears.

and the Create Cross Connection wizard supports the user in doing this easily. Each cross connection is built up from one or two 1 way cross connect primitives. the 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM module and the ROADM-C80/0/OPM module. ADM cross-connections are supported by the 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V channel module. Each primitive must be created individually. 168 “How to Create a 1 Way ADM or ROADM Cross Connect Primitive” on p. 166 FSP 3000R7 R10. 180 “How to Delete 1 Way ADM or ROADM Cross Connect Primitives” on p. It assumes that the relevant modules are already correctly provisioned. 181 User Manual 165 .3 80000014705 Issue: B. while ROADM cross-connections are supported by the ROADM-C40/40/2-3HU-2DC shelf. For example: One 1 way cross connect primitive from CH-1-20-C3 to VCH-1-20-NW3 and one 1 way cross connect primitive from VCH-1-20-NW3 to CH-1-20-C3 together form a bi-directional cross connection between CH-1-20-C3 and VCH-1-20-NW3.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Creating ADM and ROADM Cross Connections This section describes how to create Add-Drop Multiplexer (ADM) cross-connections and Re-configurable Optical Add-Drop Multiplexer (ROADM) cross-connections. A bi-directional cross connection is built up from two 1 way cross connect primitives. and how to keep an overview of the cross connects on an individual NE. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential “How to Create an ADM or ROADM Cross Connection” on p. The following topics are provided: “How to View ADM and ROADM Cross Connections” on p. 179 “How to Delete a Bi-directional ADM or ROADM Cross Connection” on p. 175 “How to Enable a ROADM Cross-connection” on p.

This column displays Bi to indicate that the cross connection is bi-directional. and the color is always green. Graphic symbol Connection Direction Facility Type 166 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. select Cross Connections. not individually per module. For the 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V. this indicates that the cross connections’s state is Disabled. Procedure Step 1 From the Configuration menu.Creating ADM and ROADM Cross Connections How to View ADM and ROADM Cross Connections This section describes how to view ADM and ROADM cross connections. and ends. In response the Cross Connections window appears. there is no state.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The following information is provided in this window: . This column displays which facility type that uses this cross connections. Column Name From/To Description These columns displays the AID for the channel (CH) or the virtual channel bundle (VCH) where the cross connect starts from. The double arrow indicates a bi-directional cross connection. When the symbol is red. This can be done only for the whole NE. while green indicates that it is In Service. while a single arrow indicates a unidirectional cross connection as well as the direction of it.

e) Select Close to return to the Cross Connections window. find the Create button. d) Follow the instructions in the Create Cross Connection wizard to finish the creation of the missing 1 way cross connect primitive.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Create it as follows: a) Double-click the entry. If one or both of the entities is Disabled. In Service is shown here. or for passing it through the NE. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential • • Step 3 If the symbol is displayed when you expected the symbol: You have not created the return direction for the cross connect yet.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Column Name Function Description This column displays Add/Drop or Pass thru to indicate whether the cross connection is used for adding/dropping traffic. User Manual 167 . In response. If both are In Service. this column displays Disabled. c) Select the Create button. Disabled is shown here. you will be returned to the Cross Connection Details window. A check mark indicates that the horizontal scroll bar will be displayed. Turn on display of a horizontal scroll bar by clicking the icon and selecting Horizontal Scroll from the list that appears. FSP 3000R7 R10. • Sort the table based on a column. State Step 2 Customize the information that is displayed in the Cross Connections window: • Use the Equipment drop down list to specify which equipment to display cross-connections for in the window. Upon completion.If both are Disabled. • Adjust the column widths to match the content by clicking the icon and selecting Pack All Columns or Pack Selected Column from the list that appears. b) In the Cross Connection Details window. the Create Cross Connection wizard appears. The state column is not applicable to cross-connections on the 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V module. You can see which channel (CH) and Virtual channel bundle (VSH) that form the missing 1 way cross connect primitive. A check mark indicates that the column will be displayed. This column shows the joint administrative state of the from/to entities. This toggles between ascending and descending display. by clicking the column title. the Cross Connection Details window appears. Turn off display of a column by clicking the icon and selecting the column name from the list that appears. In response.

A cross connection consists of one or two 1 way cross connect primitives. Select Close to finish viewing the cross connections. • Select Refresh to update the content of the window. FSP 3000R7 R10. In response the Cross Connections window appears. select Cross Connections. and the Create Cross Connection wizard supports the user in doing this easily. Procedure Step 1 From the Configuration menu. where a bi-directional cross-connection requires two 1 way cross-connect primitives.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential 168 User Manual . These primitives must be created individually. Step 5 End of Procedure How to Create an ADM or ROADM Cross Connection This section describes how to create an ADM or ROADM cross connection.Creating ADM and ROADM Cross Connections Step 4 If appropriate you can: • Select Print to print the Cross Connections list. • Select Save to save the Cross Connections list as a comma separated file.

FSP 3000R7 R10. 93 or “How to Create a Virtual Channel” on p. 100 for guidance on creating CHs and VCHs. In response. User Manual 169 . and you must create it before returning to this step again.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 2 Select the Create button. See “How to Create a Port” on p. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 4 Identify the CH or VCH facilities that shall be used to form the 1 way cross connect primitive of the cross connection. Step 3 Use the Equipment drop-down list in the Filter section to select which module(s) you wish to display CH or VCH facilities for. the Create Cross Connection wizard appears.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response the From Port list displays all channels (CHs) and virtual channel bundles (VCHs) on the module or on the NE that can be cross connected. If you cannot see the CH or VCH facility that you need: It has not been created yet.

This will have impact on the direction of the 1 way cross connect primitive. This example involves three nodes. the Parameters Step 1 page appears. g) For a ROADM cross connection: Use the Facility Type drop-down list to specify which facility type that will be transported through the optical pathway (channel) this cross-connection represents. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential d) Select Next to continue. 170 User Manual . c) From the To Port. f) For a ROADM cross connection: Use the Path Node drop-down list to specify which number this node is in the sequence of nodes that the optical pathway (channel) traverses. select the CH or VCH facility from which the cross connection shall start.Creating ADM and ROADM Cross Connections Step 5 Specify the1 way cross connect primitive of the cross connection. the To Port page appears. passed through in the next and dropped in the third. This parameter is required to allow scheduled equalization on the channel. Do as follows: a) Select the CH or VCH facility from which the cross connection shall start. FSP 3000R7 R10. In response.3 80000014705 Issue: B. b) Select Next to continue. The nodes are counted from client signal ingress to egress. e) Specify whether the cross connection shall be bi-directional or uni-directional by using the Direction drop-down list. In response. A service can be added in one node.

or Cancel to close the Create Cross Connection wizard and return to the Cross Connections window. User Manual 171 . In response an informational window appears. If this does not look correct: Select Back to make corrections. FSP 3000R7 R10. In response. the Confirm page appears. If this does look correct: Confirm by selecting Next. Step 9 Select Finish to return to the Cross Connections window.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 6 Select Next to continue. In both case the Result page appears. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 8 If this is meant to be a bi-directional cross connection: Select OK and the wizard will create the reverse direction for you. Step 7 Check the displayed information about the first 1 way cross connect primitive.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Otherwise: Select Cancel.

Creating ADM and ROADM Cross Connections Step 10 If relevant: Add an alias/comment to the 1 way cross connect primitive. In response. select the cross connection you just created. FSP 3000R7 R10. Do as follows: a) In the Cross Connections window. the Cross Connection Details window appears. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential d) Select Close to return to the Cross Connections window. c) select the Modify button and enter an alias/comment.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 172 User Manual . b) Select the Details button.

two conditions must be met before placing the cross-connection in service. e) If relevant: Modify the Path Node and Facility Type. • To enable equalization to occur when 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM and ROADM-C80/0/OPM module cross-connections are enabled. • Yes indicates that you are not allowed to delete the connection. change the Red Lined State setting. • No indicates that you are allowed to delete the connection. in which case the control plane deletes the connection as required. Set the Admin State to In Service.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Pass-through channels must be User Manual 173 . traffic cannot flow through the pass-through cross connection. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential c) For the 1 way cross connect primitive. d) If the control plane is in use: The Tunnel AID field will show which tunnel that this cross-connection is associated with. You could also set the red lined state to Yes without the control plane being in use. the Cross Connection Details window appears. select the Modify button. If required. Do as follows: a) Select the cross connection you just created.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 11 If this is a ROADM cross-connect primitive: Edit the settings for the cross-connections as relevant. Do not edit this field. In this case: do not change this setting. In response. • If the network ports are not physically connected in a system with ROADM-C40/40/2-3HU-2DC shelves. b) Select the Details button. f) If relevant at this time: enable the cross-connection so traffic can flow when applied. The Red Lined State indicates whether a cross-connection is allowed to be deleted or not. the control plane controls this field when applicable. This would help prevent accidentally deleting a cross-connection. FSP 3000R7 R10. This is typically the case if the control plane is in use.

the Direction drop-down list already is set to Bi. Step 12 If the cross connection you just defined the 1 way cross connect primitive for is bi-directional: a) You can now complete the bi-directional cross connection creation. as described in Step 7. h) Select Close to return to the Cross Connections window. Select Next to continue. at a later time: Go to Step 19.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 14 Since this is the second 1 way cross connect primitive of a bi-directional cross connection. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . the Confirm window appears. and all devices between the network interface and the 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM or ROADM-C80/0/OPM module should be placed In Service and have the power levels adjusted. the Parameters Step 1 page appears. In response. b) If you wish to create the second 1 way cross connect primitive of the cross connection. In response. This primitive is for the reverse direction. g) Select OK to apply the changes or Cancel to cancel them. 174 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 13 Create the second 1 way cross connect primitive of the cross connection by selecting the Create Reverse Direction link. Step 15 Check the displayed information about the second 1 way cross connect primitive. by creating the reverse direction 1 way cross connect primitive as described from Step 13. Step 16 Close the Create Cross Connection wizard by selecting Finish. the Result page appears.Creating ADM and ROADM Cross Connections present at the receive network interface. the reverse direction. In response.

A bi-directional cross connection will not be functional until both 1 way cross connect primitives have been created. follow this procedure to create the second 1 way cross connect primitive now. User Manual 175 . Do as described in Step 10. If you during the creation of the bi-directional cross connection chose to not immediately create the second 1 way cross connect primitive.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 17 If relevant: Add an alias/comment to the second 1 way cross connect primitive of the cross connection you created. In response the Cross Connections window appears. select Cross Connections. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential If this is a ROADM cross-connect primitive: Edit the settings for the cross-connections as described in Step 11. End of Procedure How to Create a 1 Way ADM or ROADM Cross Connect Primitive This instruction describes how to create a single 1 way ADM or ROADM cross connect primitive that forms the return path of a bi-directional cross connection.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 20 Close the Cross Connections window. FSP 3000R7 R10. Procedure Step 1 From the Configuration menu. Step 18 Step 19 Go to Step 20 Select Finish to close the Create Cross Connection wizard and return to the Cross Connections window.

select the bi-directional cross connection that consists of only 1 way cross connect primitive. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . the Confirm window appears. the Parameters Step 1 page appears. Step 7 Close the Create Cross Connection wizard by selecting Finish. If this does not look correct: Select Back to make corrections. or Cancel to close the Create Cross Connection wizard and return to the Cross Connections window. In response.Creating ADM and ROADM Cross Connections Step 2 Step 3 From the cross connections list. Select Details. the Cross Connection Details window appears. and select the belonging Create button. Step 5 Step 6 Check the displayed information about the new 1 way cross connect primitive.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 176 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. the Direction drop-down list already is set to Bi. the Result page appears. In response. Step 4 In the 1 WAY Cross Connection Primitives section. identify the 1 way cross connect primitive that needs to be created. Since this is the second 1 way cross connect primitive of a bi-directional cross connection. If this does look correct: Confirm by selecting Next. In response. Select Next to continue.

Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 8 If relevant: Add an alias/comment to the 1 way cross connect primitive. FSP 3000R7 R10. b) Select the Details button. User Manual 177 . select the Modify button and enter an alias/comment.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential d) For each 1 way cross connect primitive. c) In response. e) Select Close to return to the Cross Connections window. the Cross Connection Details window appears. Do as follows: a) Select the cross connection you just created.

• To enable equalization to occur when 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM and ROADM-C80/0/OPM module cross-connections are enabled. • Yes indicates that you are not allowed to delete the connection. the control plane controls this field when applicable. You could also set the red lined state to Yes without the control plane being in use. two conditions must be met before placing the 178 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. g) The Red Lined State indicates whether a cross-connection is allowed to be deleted or not. e) If relevant. Do not edit this field. the Cross Connection Details window appears. Do as follows: a) Select the cross connection you just created. This would help prevent accidentally deleting a cross-connection. h) If relevant at this time: enable the cross-connection so traffic can flow when applied. In this case: do not change this setting. in which case the control plane deletes the connection as required. This is typically the case if the control plane is in use. • If the network ports are not physically connected in a system with ROADM-C40/40/2-3HU-2DC shelves.Creating ADM and ROADM Cross Connections Step 9 If this is a ROADM cross-connect primitive: Edit the settings for the cross-connections as relevant. • No indicates that you are allowed to delete the connection. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . d) For the first 1 way cross connect primitive. Set the Admin State to In Service. b) Select the Details button.3 80000014705 Issue: B. traffic cannot flow through the pass-through cross connection. enter an alias/comment. If required. f) If the control plane is in use: The Tunnel AID field will show which tunnel that this cross-connection is associated with. c) In response. change the Red Lined State setting. select the Modify button.

select Cross Connections. traffic cannot flow through the pass-through cross connection. select the cross connection to enable. In response the Cross Connections window appears. End of Procedure How to Enable a ROADM Cross-connection ROADM cross-connections must be enabled before the cross-connection will let traffic flow through it.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs cross-connection in service. Pass-through channels must be present at the receive network interface. User Manual 179 . If the network ports are not physically connected in a system with ROADM-C40/40/2-3HU-2DC shelves. FSP 3000R7 R10. and all devices between the network interface and the 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM or ROADM-C80/0/OPM module should be placed In Service and have the power levels adjusted. From the cross connections list. Disabling the cross-connection is achieved by setting the administrative state to anything but In Service. two conditions must be met before placing the cross-connection in service. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential To enable equalization to occur when 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM and ROADM-C80/0/OPM module cross-connections are enabled. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 From the Configuration menu. and all devices between the network interface and the 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM or ROADM-C80/0/OPM module should be placed In Service and have the power levels adjusted. Pass-through channels must be present at the receive network interface. i) j) Step 10 For the second 1 way cross connect primitive. select the Modify button and follow point Step e through Step h Select Close to return to the Cross Connections window.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Close the Cross Connections window. This is done by setting the administrative state for the cross-connection to In Service.

select the Modify button. the Cross Connection Details window appears.3 80000014705 Issue: B. If there is a second 1 way cross connect primitive: Repeat Step 4 and Step 5 for the second 1 way cross connect primitive. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 4 For the first 1 way cross connect primitive. Requirements • • ROADM cross-connect primitives can only be deleted if their Red Lined State is No. Close the Cross Connections window. and their administrative state is not In Service. Ensure that traffic is not running by checking that the entities that are being cross-connected do not have administrative state In Service. All other cross-connections can be deleted at any time and deletion can thus interrupt traffic. End of Procedure How to Delete a Bi-directional ADM or ROADM Cross Connection This instruction describes how to delete both 1 way cross connect primitives in a bi-directional ADM or ROADM cross connection at one time.Creating ADM and ROADM Cross Connections Step 3 Select Details. Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Set the Admin State to In Service. In response. Select Close to return to the Cross Connections window. 180 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. .

In response the Cross Connections window appears. the Cross Connection Details window appears. In response. 180. If it is necessary to change the administrative state. select the cross connection to delete. Yes indicates that you are not allowed to delete the connection. select Cross Connections. Requirements • • ROADM cross-connect primitives can only be deleted if their Red Lined State is No.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Select the Delete button. Deleting both 1 way cross connect primitives in a cross connection gives the same result as in “How to Delete a Bi-directional ADM or ROADM Cross Connection” on p. Ensure that Red Lined State is set to No. while No indicates that you can delete the connection. End of Procedure How to Delete 1 Way ADM or ROADM Cross Connect Primitives This instruction describes how to delete a single 1 way ADM or ROADM cross connect primitive. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 4 Select Close to return to the Cross Connections window. Step 7 Step 8 FSP 3000R7 R10. Select from the following: • If this is a ADM cross-connection: Go to Step 8 • If this is a ROADM cross-connection: Go to Step 4 Select Details. left corner of the Cross Connections window. use the Modify button. Step 5 Step 6 Ensure that the administrative state is not In Service. and their administrative state is not In Service. All other cross-connections can be deleted at any time and deletion can thus interrupt traffic.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 From the Configuration menu. Ensure that traffic is not running by checking that the User Manual 181 . In response a Warning window appears. The Red Lined State indicates whether a cross-connection is allowed to be deleted or not. Step 9 Select OK to proceed with the deletion. Progress is shown in the lower. From the cross connections list.

From the cross connections list. d) Go to Step 10. b) In response a warning window appears. or cancel it by selecting Cancel. select Cross Connections. Step 4 Step 5 If you wish to delete one 1 way cross connect primitive: Go to Step 7. 182 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. In response. the Cross Connection Details window appears. If you wish to delete two 1 way cross connect primitives: a) Select the Delete Both button. identify the 1 way cross connect primitive that you want to delete. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .Creating ADM and ROADM Cross Connections entities that are being cross-connected do not have administrative state In Service.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response the Cross Connections window appears. Step 6 In the 1 WAY Cross Connection Primitives section. c) Confirm the deletion by selecting OK. select the cross connection that consists of the 1 way cross connect primitive. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 From the Configuration menu. Select Details.

208. Each primitive must be created individually. and flow cross-connections. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Confirm the deletion by selecting OK. In response. and Cross Connections This section describes how to create Ethernet layer 2 flow points. A bi-directional cross connection is built up from two 1 way cross connect primitives. or cancel it by selecting Cancel.3 80000014705 Issue: B. If you want to delete.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 7 If this is a ROADM cross-connection: a) Ensure that the administrative state is not In Service. Each cross connection is built up from one or two 1 way cross connect primitives. Step 11 End of Procedure Creating Flow Points. Yes indicates that you are not allowed to delete the connection. bridges. and the Create Flow Cross Connection wizard supports the user in doing this easily. 189 User Manual 183 . b) Ensure that Red Lined State is set to No. Step 9 Step 10 FSP 3000R7 R10. 184 “How to View Flow Points” on p. If it is necessary to change the administrative state. It assumes that the relevant modules are already correctly provisioned. Bridges. c) The Red Lined State indicates whether a cross-connection is allowed to be deleted or not. use the Modify button. and how to keep an overview of the flow points and flow cross-connections on an individual NE. Close the Cross Connection Details window when you are finished. while No indicates that you can delete the connection. a warning window appears. Flow points and flow cross-connections are supported by xPCA channel modules. The following topics are provided: “How to Create a Flow Point (FLW)” on p. You are returned to the Cross Connection Details window. create or modify 1 way cross connect primitives in other cross connections: Use the Previous or Next buttons to reach the relevant cross connections and follow instructions in the relevant procedures in the “Creating DCN Cross-Connections” on p. Step 8 Select the Delete button that belongs to the cross-connect primitive to delete.

201 “How to Delete 1 Way Flow Cross Connect Primitives” on p.. Requirements FSP 3000R7 R10. select Configuration -> Flow Connections. using the Provisioning Manager window. Bridges. and Cross Connections “How to Create a Bridge (BRG)” on p. 196 “How to Delete a Bi-directional Flow Cross Connection” on p. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The port’s ETH or VETH entity must already be provisioned correctly and the administrative state is Automatic In Service or In Service. Procedure Step 1 From the Main Menu. the flow point is selectable as the AID FLW-<shelf>-<slot>-<{C{1. After creation.. 206 How to Create a Flow Point (FLW) This procedure describes how to create a flow-point on an xPCA Ethernet port (ETH entity) or an xPCA virtual Ethernet port (VETH entity).10}||NE|NW}-{F{1. In response. the Flow Connections window opens. Step 2 Select the Flow Point tab. 184 User Manual .Creating Flow Points.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 191 “How to View Bridges” on p. 203 “How to View Flow Cross-connections” on p. 194 “How to Create a Flow Cross Connection” on p.400}>-from the Flow Connections window. A flow point holds the shaping and policing properties for an Ethernet flow (EVC) on an xPCA channel module.

User Manual 185 . Select Next to continue. In response the Create Flow Point window content changes.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The SVID value is used later when cross-connecting ports. In response. Step 4 Use the Equipment drop-down list to select which xPCA module to add a flow point to. the Create Flow Point window opens. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 5 Enter a Service VLAN Identifier (SVID) value to identify the flow point at the selected port. FSP 3000R7 R10. Avoid using SVID=4095 as this SVID value is normally used for ECC within ADVA Optical Networking networks.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 3 Select Create.

Select Next to continue. and Cross Connections Step 6 Use the Port drop-down list to select the AID of the port you are defining a flow point for. If only one ETH or VETH entity exists. 186 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B. • If you are creating a flow point on an Ethernet port. this is an ETH entity. • If you are creating a flow point on a virtual Ethernet port (LAG group). this will be auto-selected. In response the Parameters Step 1 page appears. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Bridges. this is a VETH entity.Creating Flow Points.

Enable/disable policer at Rx for this flow point Do not change the value of the Red Lined State.3 80000014705 Issue: B. If the maximum frame length is configured to 0-15% less than the CBS-RCV value. Enable/disable the shaper2 at Tx for this flow point. • For port mode CTAG. To stop forwarding of all traffic from the flow point. For E-LAN services shaping is defined by the bridge entity. or a mix of flow points and bridges per xPCA module. User Manual 187 .Therefore the flow point creation wizard for E-LAN flow points do not offer configuration of a shaper. To resolve this situation. the policer will become less accurate and let through 2-10% too high bit rate. 2. The default CoS used by this flow point. Enable/disable performance monitoring on this flow point.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 7 The contents of the next “pages” in the Create Flow Point window depend on which port mode the port was provisioned to operate in: • For all port modes. both CIR-TRMT and CBS-TRMT must be set to zero Enter the Committed Burst Size used by the shaper at Tx for this flow point. The system supports performance monitoring on up to 100 flow points. bridges. no traffic will be forwarded from the flow point. Enter the Committed Burst Size used by the policer at Rx for this flow point Enter the Committed Information Rate used by the shaper at Rx for this flow point1. Use Next to continue to each new page. Do not change the value of the Tunnel AID. configure the parameters shown inTable 5. The measured rate can be up to 1. configure CBS-RCV to the next higher value. • For port mode STAG. configure in addition the parameters shown inTable 7. configure in addition the parameters shown inTable 6. if the Control Plane has been enabled Enter the Admin State.5% higher than the value you enter here. Table 5: Parameter CIR-RCV Flow Point Parameters for all Port modes Definition Enter the Committed Information Rate used by the policer at Rx for this flow point1. It is used by the Control Plane. It is used by the Control Plane. In this release only PCP=7 is supported. if the Control Plane has been enabled. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential CIR-TRMT CBS-TRMT Shape Enablement Default EVC COS PM mode Police Enablement Red Lined State3 Tunnel AID3 Admin State 1.. CBS-RCV FSP 3000R7 R10. xPCA modules do not support individually configurable shapers at Tx for E-LAN member ports. typically Automatic In Service or In Service. If both CIR-RCV and CBS-RCV are set to zero.

Step 10 188 User Manual . and Cross Connections 3. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential CVIDs registered 1.Creating Flow Points. If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Complete page.3 80000014705 Issue: B. This is in IEEE Provider Bridge known as PEP Port Default VID (PVID). the Complete page appears. PUSH PVID Enter the CVID of the C-tag that is added to untagged frames at Rx Transmit1 The C-tag can be removed from frames at Tx and at Rx. When these SVIDs are different an SVID translation will occur. Bridges. • If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. any CVID you entered in the Port VLAN ID field must be included in the CVIDs registered list A C-tag can be added to untagged frames at Tx and/or at Rx. then enter that external VID. In response the Confirm wizard page appears. POP CTAG receive Enter the CVID of the C-tag which shall be removed at Rx POP CTAG transmit Enter the CVID of the C-tag which shall be removed at Tx FSP 3000R7 R10. Table 7: Parameter External VID Flow Point Parameters for Port mode STAG Definition If the SVID to be used externally on this SVID flow is different than the entry in Step 5. Check that the displayed settings are correct. Table 6: Parameter Flow Point Parameters for Port mode CTAG Definition Enter the list of the CVID flows that shall be mapped into the SVID flow. External VID is in IEEE referred to as “local VID”. Prio PVID Transmit Enter the PCP priority for the C-tag that is added to untagged frames at Rx. This is applicable at both Tx and Rx. In response. Step 8 Step 9 Select Next to continue. This parameter is only supported for flow points with facility type E-Line. If you have configured acceptance of untagged frames. Avoid using SVID=4095 as this SVID value is normally used for ECC within ADVA Optical Networking networks. • If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm. Configuration of C-tag addition at Rx is done on the ETH entity (the Port default PCP and Port VLAN ID field).

Go to Step 9. Use the Equipment drop-down list to select which modules to display flow points for. End of Procedure How to View Flow Points This section describes how to view flow points. Select the Flow Points tab. you are returned to the Provisioning Manager window. • Use the Port Role drop-down list to select which ports to display flow points for based on the port roles. • To view flow points by SVID. • Use the Connections State drop-down list to select which flow points to display based on the connection’s (EVC’s) state. • Use the Connections State drop-down list to select which flow points to display based on the connection’s (EVC’s) state. This can be done only for the whole NE. • Use the Port drop-down list to select which ports to display flow points for. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 User Manual 189 . Make a decision about how to filter your view: • To view flow points by port. Close the Provisioning Manager window by selecting Close. go to Step 7. Display flow points per SVID by doing as follows: • Select Flow Points by SVID in the View Mode drop-down list.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 11 Step 12 If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 From the Configuration menu. Display flow points per port by doing as follows: • Select Flow Points by Port in the View Mode drop-down list. go to Step 5. Go to Step 9. FSP 3000R7 R10. select Flow Connections. • Use the SVID From-To fields to enter the range of SVIDs to display. not individually per module.

This column displays which port role the port that the flow is defined on has. This column displays the service type of the EVC. This column displays the state of the connection (EVC). Bridges. This column shows the flow point’s alias. This column displays the CVIDs that have been registered to this EVC. Busy indicates that it is used in a cross-connection. The connection is in Idle state before it has been cross-connected. This column displays the Admin State of the flow point. This column displays the SVID for the flow point.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Creating Flow Points. and Cross Connections Step 9 In response the Flow Connections window is updated. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . if any has been entered. CVIDs registered Port Role Alias 190 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. The following information is provided in the table in this window: Column Name AID SVID EVC Type Admin State Connection State Description This column displays the AID for the flow point.

• • Step 11 If appropriate you can: • Select Print to print the Flow Point list. using the Provisioning Manager window. Turn on display of a horizontal scroll bar by clicking the icon and selecting Horizontal Scroll from the list that appears. Turn off display of a column by clicking the icon and selecting the column name from the list that appears. the bridge point is selectable as the AID BRG-<shelf>-<slot>-<{C{1.400}>-from the Flow Connections window. User Manual 191 . This toggles between ascending and descending display.. Step 12 End of Procedure FSP 3000R7 R10. After creation. A check mark indicates that the column will be displayed. • Select Refresh to update the content of the window.3 80000014705 Issue: B. A bridge contains the shaping properties for the EVC flow segment on an xPCA channel module.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 10 Customize the information that is displayed in the table: • Sort the table based on a column. by clicking the column title. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential How to Create a Bridge (BRG) This instruction describes how to create a bridge on an xPCA Ethernet module . • Select Save to save the Flow Point list as a comma separated file.. • Adjust the column widths to match the content by clicking the icon and selecting Pack All Columns or Pack Selected Column from the list that appears. A check mark indicates that the horizontal scroll bar will be displayed. Select Close to finish viewing the flow points.10}||NE|NW}-{F{1.

In response. and Cross Connections Requirements The xPCA channel module has been provisioned and the administrative state is Automatic In Service or In Service. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .Creating Flow Points.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 2 Step 3 Select the Bridges tab. select Configuration -> Flow Connections. Select Create. Procedure Step 1 From the Main Menu. In response. the Flow Connections window opens. the Create Bridge window opens. 192 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Bridges.

Step 5 Enter the internal Service VLAN Identifier (SVID) value it shall be identical to the flow number of the bridge. Avoid using SVID=4095 as this SVID value is the default value for ECC. The SVID value is used later when cross-connecting ports. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 6 Table 8: Configure the parameters shown in Table 8. FSP 3000R7 R10. Select Next to continue.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 4 Use the Equipment drop-down list to select which xPCA module to add a bridge to. Parameter CIR-TRMT CBS-TRMT User Manual 193 . Select Next to continue. Use Next to continue to each new page as needed. In response the Create Bridge window content changes. Bridge Parameters for all Port modes Definition Enter the Committed Information Rate used by the shaper at Rx for this port1. both CIR-TRMT and CBS-TRMT must be set to zero Enter the Committed Burst Size used by the shaper at Tx for this port. To stop forwarding of all traffic to all bridge ports. In response the Parameters Step 1 page appears.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

Use the Equipment drop-down list to select which modules to display bridges for. the Complete page appears. • If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. or a mix of flow points and bridges per xPCA module.Creating Flow Points. you are returned to the Provisioning Manager window. Enter the Admin State. typically Automatic In Service or In Service. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. Select the Bridges tab. The system supports performance monitoring on up to 100 flow points.5% higher than the value you enter here. 194 User Manual . Step 7 Step 8 Select Next to continue. If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Complete page. • If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm. FSP 3000R7 R10. Shaping is enabled by default. Close the Provisioning Manager window by selecting Close. Display bridges per SVID by using the SVID From-To fields to enter the range of SVIDs to display. In response. not individually per module. Shape Enablement PM mode Admin State 1. Check that the displayed settings are correct. Bridges. Enable/disable performance monitoring for the queue entity that belongs to the bridge. The measured rate can be up to 1. In response the Confirm wizard page appears.3 80000014705 Issue: B. no action is required. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 From the Configuration menu. This can be done only for the whole NE. The field shows the facility type of the bridge. bridges. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 End of Procedure How to View Bridges This section describes how to view bridges. select Flow Connections. In response. and Cross Connections Table 8: Parameter Facility Type Bridge Parameters for all Port modes Definition No entry is required.

• Adjust the column widths to match the content by clicking the icon and selecting Pack All Columns or Pack Selected Column from the list that appears. This column shows the flow point’s alias. by clicking the column title. The following information is provided in the table in this window: Column Name AID SVID Admin State FSP 3000R7 R10. This column displays the SVID for the flow point. Alias Step 6 Customize the information that is displayed in the table: • Sort the table based on a column. A check mark indicates that the horizontal scroll bar will be displayed. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Description This column displays the AID for the flow point. Step 8 End of Procedure User Manual 195 . This toggles between ascending and descending display. • Select Refresh to update the content of the window.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 5 In response the Flow Connections window is updated. Select Close to finish viewing the bridges. Turn on display of a horizontal scroll bar by clicking the icon and selecting Horizontal Scroll from the list that appears. Turn off display of a column by clicking the icon and selecting the column name from the list that appears. This column displays the Admin State of the flow point. • • Step 7 If appropriate you can: • Select Print to print the list. if any has been entered. • Select Save to save the list as a comma separated file.3 80000014705 Issue: B. A check mark indicates that the column will be displayed.

Step 3 Use the Equipment drop-down list in the Filter section to select which module(s) you wish to display FLW facilities for. and Cross Connections How to Create a Flow Cross Connection This section describes how to create a flow cross connection. 196 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 2 Select the Create button. A flow cross connection consists of one or two 1 way cross connect primitives. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . where a bi-directional cross-connection requires two 1 way cross-connect primitives. and the Create Cross Connection wizard supports the user in doing this easily. select Flow Connections. These primitives must be created individually. the Create Flow Cross Connection wizard appears.Creating Flow Points. In response the Flow Connections window appears. Procedure Step 1 From the Configuration menu. Bridges. In response.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response the From Port list displays all flow points (FLW) on the module or on the NE that can be cross connected.

the Parameters Step 1 page appears. b) Select Next to continue. In response. 184 for guidance on creating a FLW. Step 5 Specify the1 way cross connect primitive of the cross connection. select the FLW facility to which the cross connection shall end. Do as follows: a) Select the FLW facility from which the cross connection shall start. See “How to Create a Flow Point (FLW)” on p. the To Port page appears.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 4 Identify the FLW that shall be used to form the 1 way cross connect primitive of the cross connection. In response. User Manual 197 . d) Select Next to continue. This will have impact on the direction of the 1 way cross connect primitive. and you must create it before returning to this step again. If you cannot see the FLW facility that you need: It has not been created yet. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential c) From the To Port.3 80000014705 Issue: B. e) Optionally enter an alias for this cross connection by using the Alias field. FSP 3000R7 R10.

In response. the Confirm page appears. Select OK and the wizard will create the reverse direction for you.Creating Flow Points. and Cross Connections Step 6 Select Next to continue. If this does not look correct: Select Back to make corrections. In response an informational window appears. Bridges. Close the Flow Connections window. Step 9 Step 10 Select Finish to return to the Flow Connections window. or Cancel to close the Create Flow Cross Connection wizard and return to the Flow Connections window. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Step 8 Only bi-directional cross-connections are supported. End of Procedure 198 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. If this does look correct: Confirm by selecting Next. Step 7 Check the displayed information about the first 1 way cross connect primitive. The Result page appears.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

For example Add. In response the Flow Connections window appears. Use the Equipment drop-down list to select which modules to display flow cross-connections for. • Use the Port Role drop-down list to select which ports to display flow points for based on the port roles.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs How to Create a 1 Way Flow Cross Connect Primitive This instruction describes how to create a single 1 way flow cross connect primitive that forms the return path of a bi-directional cross connection. Go to Step 9. Select the Flow Cross Connections tab. follow this procedure to create the second 1 way cross connect primitive now.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Display flow cross-connections per port by doing as follows: • Select Flow Cross Connections by Port in the View Mode drop-down list. go to Step 5. Display flow cross-connections per SVID by doing as follows: • Select Flow Points by SVID in the View Mode drop-down list. For example Add. select Flow Connections. • Use the CRS Config drop-down list to select what type of flow cross connections to display. Go to Step 9. • Use the Port drop-down list to select which ports to display flow points for. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 From the Configuration menu. • Use the SVID From-To fields to enter the range of SVIDs to display. Step 5 FSP 3000R7 R10. go to Step 7. • Use the CRS Config drop-down list to select what type of flow cross connections to display. • To view flow cross-connections by SVID. If you during the creation of the bi-directional cross connection chose to not immediately create the second 1 way cross connect primitive. Make a decision about how to filter your view: • To view flow cross-connections by port. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 User Manual 199 .

the Parameters Step 1 page appears. Bridges. and Cross Connections Step 9 In response the Flow Connections window is updated. Select Details. In response. Step 13 Step 14 200 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Since this is the second 1 way cross connect primitive of a bi-directional cross connection. identify the 1 way cross connect primitive that needs to be created. Step 12 In the 1 WAY Cross Connection Primitives section. Step 10 Step 11 From the flow cross connections list. In response. If relevant: Add an alias/comment to the 1 way cross connect primitive. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . select the bi-directional cross connection that consists of only 1 way cross connect primitive. the direction is already is set to Bi. the Layer 2 Cross Connection Details window appears. Select Next to continue. In response. the Confirm window appears. and select the belonging Create button.Creating Flow Points.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

• Use the CRS Config drop-down list to select what type of flow cross connections to display. If this does look correct: Confirm by selecting Next. Ensure that traffic is not running by checking that the entities that are being cross-connected do not have administrative state In Service. If this does not look correct: Select Back to make corrections. Select the Flow Cross Connections tab. FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 5 Step 6 User Manual 201 . In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 From the Configuration menu. Close the Flow Connections window. • To view flow cross-connections by SVID. • Use the Port Role drop-down list to select which ports to display flow points for based on the port roles. End of Procedure How to Delete a Bi-directional Flow Cross Connection This instruction describes how to delete both 1 way cross connect primitives in a bi-directional flow cross connection at one time. Display flow cross-connections per port by doing as follows: • Select Flow Cross Connections by Port in the View Mode drop-down list. Use the Equipment drop-down list to select which modules to display flow cross-connections for. For example Add. Make a decision about how to filter your view: • To view flow cross-connections by port. or Cancel to close the Create Flow Cross Connection wizard and return to the Flow Connections window. • Use the Port drop-down list to select which ports to display flow points for. the Result page appears. Step 16 Step 17 Close the Create Flow Cross Connection wizard by selecting Finish.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 15 Check the displayed information about the new 1 way cross connect primitive. go to Step 7. select Flow Connections. Go to Step 9. go to Step 5. Requirement A flow cross-connection can be deleted at any time and can thus interrupt traffic. In response the Flow Connections window appears.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response the Flow Connections window content changes.

3 80000014705 Issue: B. Bridges. • Use the CRS Config drop-down list to select what type of flow cross connections to display. Select the Delete button. select the cross connection to delete.Creating Flow Points. In response a Warning window appears. left corner of the Flow Connections window. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . • Use the SVID From-To fields to enter the range of SVIDs to display. Step 13 Select OK to proceed with the deletion. In response the Flow Connections window is updated. Progress is shown in the lower. End of Procedure 202 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. From the cross connections table. Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Select Flow Cross Connections by Port or Flow Cross Connections by SVID in the View Mode drop-down list. Go to Step 9. and Cross Connections Step 7 Display flow cross-connections per SVID by doing as follows: • Select Flow Points by SVID in the View Mode drop-down list. For example Add.

Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 User Manual 203 . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential From the Configuration menu. • Use the Port Role drop-down list to select which ports to display flow points for based on the port roles. Use the Equipment drop-down list to select which modules to display flow cross-connections for. Display flow cross-connections per SVID by doing as follows: • Select Flow Points by SVID in the View Mode drop-down list. go to Step 7. For example Add. Requirement A flow cross-connection can be deleted at any time and can thus interrupt traffic. In response the Flow Connections window content changes.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs How to Delete 1 Way Flow Cross Connect Primitives This instruction describes how to delete a single 1 way cross connect primitive. Make a decision about how to filter your view: • To view flow cross-connections by port. 201. Go to Step 9. For example Add. Select the Flow Cross Connections tab. • To view flow cross-connections by SVID. Display flow cross-connections per port by doing as follows: • Select Flow Cross Connections by Port in the View Mode drop-down list. Go to Step 9. • Use the CRS Config drop-down list to select what type of flow cross connections to display. Ensure that traffic is not running by checking that the entities that are being cross-connected do not have administrative state In Service. In response the Flow Connections window appears. go to Step 5.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 FSP 3000R7 R10. select Flow Connections. • Use the Port drop-down list to select which ports to display flow points for. Deleting both 1 way cross connect primitives in a flow cross connection gives the same result as in “How to Delete a Bi-directional Flow Cross Connection” on p. • Use the CRS Config drop-down list to select what type of flow cross connections to display. • Use the SVID From-To fields to enter the range of SVIDs to display.

Bridges. Step 12 If you wish to delete one 1 way cross connect primitive: Go to Step 14. and Cross Connections Step 9 In response the Flow Connections window is updated. Select Details. 204 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 10 Step 11 From the cross connections table. In response.Creating Flow Points. the Cross Connection Details window appears.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . select the cross connection that consists of the 1 way cross connect primitive.

3 80000014705 Issue: B. You are returned to the Cross Connection Details window. If you want to delete. c) Confirm the deletion by selecting OK. b) In response a warning window appears. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 16 Step 17 Confirm the deletion by selecting OK. or cancel it by selecting Cancel. a warning window appears. In response. d) Go to Step 16. create or modify 1 way cross connect primitives in other flow cross connections: Use the Previous or Next buttons to reach the relevant flow cross connections. Close the Cross Connection Details window when you are finished. Select the Delete button that belongs to the cross-connect primitive to delete. identify the 1 way cross connect primitive that you want to delete. Step 18 End of Procedure User Manual 205 . or cancel it by selecting Cancel.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 13 If you wish to delete two 1 way cross connect primitives: a) Select the Delete Both button. FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 14 Step 15 In the 1 WAY Cross Connection Primitives section.

not individually per module. For example Add. Display flow cross-connections per port by doing as follows: • Select Flow Cross Connections by Port in the View Mode drop-down list. • Use the CRS Config drop-down list to select what type of flow cross connections to display. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . For example Add. Procedure Step 1 From the Configuration menu. • To view flow cross-connections by SVID. In response the Flow Connections window appears.3 80000014705 Issue: B. • Use the Port Role drop-down list to select which ports to display flow points for based on the port roles. Display flow cross-connections per SVID by doing as follows: • Select Flow Points by SVID in the View Mode drop-down list. This can be done only for the whole NE.Creating Flow Points. • Use the CRS Config drop-down list to select what type of flow cross connections to display. • Use the SVID From-To fields to enter the range of SVIDs to display. and Cross Connections How to View Flow Cross-connections This section describes how to view flow cross connections. go to Step 7. Make a decision about how to filter your view: • To view flow cross-connections by port. Go to Step 9. Use the Equipment drop-down list to select which modules to display flow cross-connections for. • Use the Port drop-down list to select which ports to display flow points for. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Select the Flow Cross Connections tab. select Flow Connections. Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 206 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. go to Step 5. Bridges.

This column displays the SVID for the flow points that are cross-connected. The following information is provided in the table in this window: Column Name From/To FSP 3000R7 R10. This column displays what type of cross connection this is. This column displays the service type of this cross connection. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Description These columns displays the AIDs for the flow points that are cross-connected. Do not edit this field. User Manual 207 . while a single arrow indicates a unidirectional cross connection as well as the direction of it.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 8 Step 9 Go to Step 9. When the symbol is red. this indicates that the cross connections’s state is Disabled. In response the Flow Connections window is updated. The double arrow indicates a bi-directional cross connection. while green indicates that it is In Service. the control plane controls this field when applicable. • • Add/Drop: cross-connect between Client and Network ports Pass Through: cross-connect between Network ports Graphic symbol SVID Connection Direction Facility Type CRS Config Tunnel EVC • Hairpin: cross-connect between Client ports If the control plane is in use: This column shows which tunnel that this cross-connection is associated with. This column displays Bi to indicate that the cross connection is bi-directional.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

The cross-connect should not be deleted without ensuring that the PPP IP link and EOC/ECC channel entities that are being cross-connected do not have administrative state In Service.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Select Close to finish viewing the flow points. Turn on display of a horizontal scroll bar by clicking the icon and selecting Horizontal Scroll from the list that appears. A DCN cross-connection can be deleted at any time and can thus interrupt DCN traffic. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Creating DCN Cross-Connections This section describes how to create DCN cross-connections. • • Step 11 If appropriate you can: • Select Print to print the Flow Cross Connections list. A check mark indicates that the column will be displayed. 208 “How to View ECC Channels” on p. are already correctly provisioned. • Select Save to save the Flow Cross Connections list as a comma separated file. This toggles between ascending and descending display. It assumes that the relevant channel modules as well as the NCU module. The following topics are provided: “How to Cross-connect PPP IP and EOC/ECC Interfaces” on p. • Adjust the column widths to match the content by clicking the icon and selecting Pack All Columns or Pack Selected Column from the list that appears. PS 208 User Manual . Step 12 End of Procedure FSP 3000R7 R10. • Select Refresh to update the content of the window. 210 How to Cross-connect PPP IP and EOC/ECC Interfaces This section describes how to cross-connect the EOC/ECC channel on the channel module with the PPP IP link on the NCU. by clicking the column title.Creating DCN Cross-Connections Step 10 Customize the information that is displayed in the table: • Sort the table based on a column. Turn off display of a column by clicking the icon and selecting the column name from the list that appears. Note Requirements • A PPP IP link and an EOC/ECC channel must already have been created. A check mark indicates that the horizontal scroll bar will be displayed.

See the Detailed System Description. Use the left hand hierarchical entity list in the Provisioning Manager window for this selection. 116) is lower than the absolute maximum that can be carried by the ECC/EOC entity.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs • Ensure that there is enough un-used backplane bandwidth to support this backplane connection. the Create ECC Connection window displays the Parameters Step 2 page. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Note The Create ECC Connection list section is only available when the maximum transmit rate for the PPP IP link (see “How to Create a PPP IP Interface” on p. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 PS Select which PPP IP link and EOC/ECC channel to interconnect as follows: a) Use the PPP IP AID drop-down list to select the relevant PPP IP link. This information can be found on the NE tab of the network element. User Manual 209 . b) Use the ECC AID drop-down list to select the relevant EOC/ECC channel. the Create ECC Connection window displays the Parameters Step 1 page. FSP 3000R7 R10. c) Select Next to continue. Procedure Step 1 Select the NCU.3 80000014705 Issue: B. “Deployment Restrictions” for information about backplane bandwidth restrictions and allocated backplane bandwidth per DCN entity. The Provisioning Manager window will display the Create ECC Connection list section on the right side. Use the CRS Type drop-down list. Select one of the NCU PPP IP links from the list (for example CRS_DCN-1-A-1). Specify whether communication over this DCN channel shall be two-way or not. In response.

Step 4 Step 5 End of Procedure 210 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 6 If you wish to continue provisioning: Select the relevant entity type to provision from the Continue Provisioning? list on the right hand side of the Complete page. Per Interconnection Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Select the PPP IP link in the Entities. If you do not wish to continue provisioning: Select Finish. In response. Step 7 Step 8 End of Procedure How to View ECC Channels This section describes how to view cross-connections of EOC/ECC channels and PPP IP links for the NE. b) If the settings are incorrect: Select Back to go back and correct the settings. c) If the settings are correct: Select Next to confirm.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Select the ECC/EOC channel in the Entities. In response. This can be done per cross-connection. Tree tab. Select the Info tab in the Parameters pane to see: • The bit rate the ECC/EOC channel supports. Close the Provisioning Manager window by selecting Close. in the Maximum ECC Bitrate field. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . or for the whole NE at once. Tree tab. in the PPPIP AID field. Select the Config tab to see: • The Committed Information Rate (CIR) for the PPP IP link in the Max Tx Rate field.Creating DCN Cross-Connections Step 5 When the Confirm wizard page appears: a) Check that the displayed settings are correct. Select the Info tab in the Parameters pane to see which ECC/EOC channel the link is connected to. • The PPP IP link that the ECC/EOC channel is connected to. • The near end IP address for the PPP IP link in the IP Address field. you are returned to the Provisioning Manager window. the Complete window appears. • The far end IP address for the PPP IP link in the Far End IP Address field.

From the Configuration menu. The following information is provided in this window: Column Name PPP AID FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Description This column displays the AID for each PPP IP link in the NE.3 80000014705 Issue: B. This column displays the maximum transmit rate that the PPP IP link supports. This column displays the channel number for the channel carrying the ECC. This column displays the IP address of the PPP IP link in this NE. This column displays the maximum bit rate that the ECC channel supports. In response the ECC List window appears. This column displays the IP address of the PPP IP link in the far end NE. Tree tab.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Per NE Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select any module in the NE in the Entities. select ECC List. This column displays the AID for each ECC channel in the NE. ECC AID IP Address Far End IP Address Max Tx Rate Maximum ECC Bitrate Channel User Manual 211 .

A check mark indicates that the horizontal scroll bar will be displayed. this can affect the DCN. Turn off display of a column by clicking the icon and selecting the column name from the list that appears.How to Delete Equipment/Facilities Manually Step 3 Customize the information that is displayed in the ECC List window: • Sort the table based on a column. The only exception is for modules. Turn on display of a horizontal scroll bar by clicking the icon and selecting Horizontal Scroll from the list that appears. Therefore. Step 5 End of Procedure FSP 3000R7 R10. Select Close to finish viewing the ECC list. PS 212 User Manual . • Adjust the column widths to match the content by clicking the icon and selecting Pack All Columns or Pack Selected Column from the list that appears. regardless of whether traffic is running or not. a forced deletion option is supported for these. • • Step 4 If appropriate you can: • Select Print to print the ECC list. you cannot delete a port that is part of a cross-connection. Note Requirement The system will allow deletion of all cross-connections except ROADM cross-connections. This toggles between ascending and descending display. An entity cannot be deleted before the entities that are dependent on it are deleted. Be careful when deleting an EOC/ECC channel. • Select Refresh to update the content of the window. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential How to Delete Equipment/Facilities Manually This section contains the instruction for deleting an entity. by clicking the column title. For example. • Select Save to save the ECC list as a comma separated file. A check mark indicates that the column will be displayed.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Deleting a service from the internal database is service affecting. allowing deletion of all dependent entities regardless of administrative state.

Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant entity in the Entities pane. select the Refresh button. The window can be used in parallel with the rest of the Element Manager. select Configuration -> Provisioning -> Delete. • From the context sensitive menu that appears. the Delete window appears.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs before deleting a non-ROADM cross-connection. In response. If the entity you wish to delete has dependent entities: a) Select each dependent entity and notice the administrative state in the Admin State column. Maintenance or Disabled. c) Select the Delete button. that entity is removed from: • • the Name column in the Delete window the Entities pane If this deletion does not occur immediately. In response. FSP 3000R7 R10. This window displays a hierarchical list of all entities that are supported by the entity you selected in Step 1. ensure that the entities that are cross-connected do not have administrative state In Service.3 80000014705 Issue: B. select Management. b) If the Admin State is In Service: Change the administrative state as follows: • Select the Set Admin State button. I User Manual 213 . From the Main Menu. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 3 Step 4 If you wish to delete a module: You can delete the module and all dependent entities all at once by selecting the Force Delete button.

PROVISION. You can print a list of the network element user accounts or save the list from the User Management window. End of Procedure Handling Network Element User Accounts FSP 3000R7 R10. In response the User Management window appears. Maintenance or Disabled. When saving the file formats HTML. 214 User Manual . Step 6 Close the Delete window by selecting Close. select Configuration -> User Management. OPERATOR and MONITOR.Handling Network Element User Accounts Step 5 Select the entity you wish to delete and do as follows: a) Notice the administrative state in the Admin State column. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant network element in the Managed Elements pane. From the Main Menu. b) If the Admin State is In Service: Change the administrative state as follows: • Select the Set Admin State button. d) In response. • From the context sensitive menu that appears. CSV. and delete user accounts on individual Network Elements. select the Refresh button. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential This section describes how to add. ADMIN.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Requirements The Element Manager must manage the network element with SNMPv3 access using a user account with ADMIN privileges. The Network Elements all are set up with four default user accounts. The following sections are provided: Adding a User Account Modifying an User Account Deleting a User Account Adding a User Account This section contains the procedure for adding a network element user account. that entity is removed from: • the Name column in the Delete window • the Entities pane If this deletion does not occur immediately. modify. c) Select the Delete button. text and PDF are supported. select Management.

Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 3 Select Create.] Not include an associated username string. The password is not case-sensitive and must fulfil the following requirements: • • • • • Be 6-10 characters long Include at least one alpha character [a. ).3 80000014705 Issue: B. The privilege levels are: ADMIN. no privacy • AuthPriv . ]. OPERATOR AND MONITOR. #. The options are: • NoAuthNoPriv -no authentication. no privacy • AuthNoPriv . PROVISION. TMOUTA and TMOUT pertain only to TL1 usage.9] Include at least one punctuation character [!. {.@.z. ^. which is not relevant here. Step 6 Use the Privilege drop-down list to select the privilege level that this new user account shall have.. -. $.. +. }. The user account name must have 4-10 characters (for example your name) and is not case-sensitive.authentication. FSP 3000R7 R10.authentication. End of Procedure User Manual 215 .Z] Include at least one numeric character [0. Select Close to close the User Manager window. Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Select OK to add the account. (. |. privacy The fields UISTATE. %. . _. In response the Create User Account window appears. Step 4 Step 5 Fill in the following fields: Enter the name of the new NE user account in the User Name field. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 7 Use the Security Level drop-down list to select the SNMP security level for the new user account.. and re-type the password in the Retype Password field. [. A. This setting determines the permitted level of security. Enter a password for the new user account into the Password field. ~.

Step 5 If relevant: Use the Privilege drop-down list to change the privilege level that this user account shall have. no privacy • AuthNoPriv . which is not relevant here. This setting determines the permitted level of security. select Configuration -> User Management. TMOUTA and TMOUT pertain only to TL1 usage. OPERATOR AND MONITOR.authentication.Handling Network Element User Accounts Modifying an User Account This section contains the procedure for modifying a network element user account. In response the User Management window appears. PROVISION. Step 6 If relevant: Use the Security Level drop-down list to change the SNMP security level for the user account. Step 4 If relevant: Modify the name of the NE user account in the User Name field. Select Modify.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The privilege levels are: ADMIN. no privacy • AuthPriv . privacy The fields UISTATE.authentication. In response the Modify User Account window appears. Step 7 216 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Requirements The Element Manager must manage the network element with SNMPv3 access using a user account with ADMIN privileges. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . The options are: • NoAuthNoPriv -no authentication. From the Main Menu. The user account name must have 4-10 characters (for example your name) and is not case-sensitive. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Select the relevant network element in the Managed Elements pane.

Z] Include at least one numeric character [0.. but the user will be warned that the account is used by an active SNMPv3 session. After a certain period of user inactivity. ~. SSH (Craft Console).. -. SNMPv3 based management tools use a network element user account to regulate access to the network element. The user will also have the option to cancel the deletion. Telnet (Craft Console). #.] Not include an associated username string. SNMPv1 based management applications do not use a network element user account to regulate access to the network element.The network element considers a user account to be in use in the following situations: FSP 3000R7 R10..@. • Figure 17 shows the relationships between management applications. and FTP. and re-type the password in the Retype Password field. This includes connections using http (Web Console). [. Step 9 Step 10 Select OK to apply the changes to the account. A.3 80000014705 Issue: B. SCP. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential • When a user has logged on to the network element with this user account. The password is not case-sensitive and must fulfil the following requirements: • • • • • Be 6-10 characters long Include at least one alpha character [a. When a management application (for example an NMS system) has a virtual SNMPv3 session with the network element. End of Procedure Deleting a User Account This section contains the procedure for deleting a network element user account. {. It is possible to delete this user account even though a virtual SNMPv3 session uses it. Management applications using SNMP to communicate with the network element are connectionless. and users.z. The network element will deny deletion of a user account when a user has logged on with it. • Connection-oriented management applications establish connections to the network element by allowing the user to log on. It is not advisable to delete user accounts which are in use. .9] Include at least one punctuation character [!. _. ^. • User Manual 217 . %. the network element will terminate the connection. Select Close to close the User Manager window. user accounts.Chapter 3 Provisioning NEs Step 8 If relevant: Enter new password for the user account into the Password field. }. using this user account (see Figure 17). $. (. they use SNMP community strings. The network element considers a session to be active for 10 minutes after it was terminated. |. ). ]. +. They establish a virtual session with the network element by using polling.

select Configuration -> User Management. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Select the relevant network element in the Managed Elements pane.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response a confirmation window appears. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential End of Procedure 218 User Manual . FSP 3000R7 R10. Select Delete. In response the User Management window appears. or Cancel to cancel the deletion. Select Yes to delete the account.Handling Network Element User Accounts Figure 17: User Accounts and Management Applications Requirements The Element Manager must manage the network element with SNMPv3 access using a user account with ADMIN privileges. From the Main Menu. Select Close to close the User Manager window.

The parameters that define these features are not configurable afterwards. which contains instructions for enabling and disabling FTP server/client. which contains instructions for viewing configuration information about the protection groups. which contains instructions for changing configurable parameters. which describes how to trace a wavelength channel or sub-channel through the NE. FSP 3000R7 R10. This section gives an introduction to provisioning of the FSP 3000R7.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs In the FSP3000R7. SSH protocol and adding known hosts. Configuring DCN Features. modules. which contains instructions for setting the date and time. which contains instructions for viewing configured information about the entities an NE. Working with Protection. Viewing Node Channel Traces. pluggable transceivers. or NTP servers for the NE. which describes how to provision an OTDR shelf and open the OTDR application. channels and virtual channels to the internal database. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 219 . and Operations Manual. most features are configured during provisioning. which contains instructions for configuring the NE for use of OSC. Configuring the OTDR. Configuring Date and Time. 83. How to Change the Administrative State. The following topics are provided: Configuring Parameters. How to set these parameters is described in “Creating Equipment/Facilities Manually” on p. Provisioning. which describes how to change the administrative state for equipment or facilities. Configuring Security.3 80000014705 Issue: B. by using the Element Manager. How to configure OTDR measurements and operate the OTDR is described in the OTDR Installation. and how to operate the protection switch. It contains instructions for provisioning shelves. and for configuring LAN IP on the NCU. Viewing Information About the NE.

FSP 3000R7 R10. 365. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Configuring Parameters Most parameters in the NE can only be changed during provisioning. with the new parameter value. the parameters can be modified directly. and then added again. How to Configure Loop-Backs. which contains instructions for viewing and configuring messages for the Trace comparison process. 362. 360. which contains instructions for configuring the thresholds for Threshold Crossing Alerts. “How to Change Equipment Capabilities” on p. “How to Set the Automatic Laser Shutdown Mode” on p. which contains instructions for configuring remote syslog server destinations for the NE. How To Configure Scheduled Equalization. which contains the instructions for how to enable use of automatic deletion of dependent entities. “How to Force a Laser On” on p. How to Configure TCA Thresholds. Viewing and Configuring Trace Messages.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 358. 364. which contains the instructions for changing the ALS mode. The following topics are provided: “How to Configure Parameters” on p. “How to Allow Forced Deletion of Entities” on p. This section gives descriptions of how to change these configurable parameters. the entity must first be deleted. For some entities. which contains the instructions for forcing a laser on. 353. which describes how to configure telemetry input and output ports on the UTM module.Configuring Parameters Configuring Remote Syslog Servers. which contains instructions for setting up scheduled equalization for NEs containing 8ROADM devices. “Managing Cables in the Internal Database” on p. which contains the instructions for changing the force-laser fallback timer. which contains instructions for setting up span equalization in both ROADM and FOADM networks. which contains instructions for configuring the Ethernet OAM/CFM entities. 363. “Enabling Use of SCU Ring Interconnection” on p. which contains the instructions for adding new connections to the Physical Connections List. Configuring Span Equalization. which describes how to increase the capabilities of a module. How to Configure Tandem Connection Monitoring. which contains the instructions for how to enable or disable a NE for ring interconnection of the SCUs and ROADMs. 221 220 User Manual . Configuring Ethernet OAM/CFM. “How to Configure TIF Contacts” on p. 363. which contains instructions for configuring Tandem Connection Monitoring. “How to Set the Forced-Laser Fallback/Release Timer” on p. This means that to change the parameters for an entity. which contains the instructions for setting and releasing a loop-back.

In response. Step 5 Use the provided drop-down lists to select a new value for the parameter. In response. In response. See the document Management Data Guide for descriptions of all parameters that may be displayed here. End of Procedure User Manual 221 . Select the entity to view parameters for in the Entities pane. Step 4 FSP 3000R7 R10. The parameters that are displayed here. depend on the entity that you selected previously.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 223 How to Configure Parameters This section gives a general description on how to change configurable parameters. In response all configured parameters for the selected entity are displayed. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Select the Modify button. the Parameter pane displays. the Modify Configuration window appears. 222 “How to Configure NE Mode” on p. all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameters pane. Value range and default values for the parameters are listed in the document Management Data Guide. Step 6 Select OK to apply the change or Cancel to discard.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs “How to Configure System Parameters” on p. per module type. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. Step 3 Select the Config tab in the Parameters pane.

Select the System tab in the Parameters pane. if the NE will be managed later using the Craft Console. a-z. the Modify Configuration window appears.45 mm. In response. The system ID can be used to identify an NE instead of the NEs IP address. Your entry must conform to the following rules: • • • • • • • must begin with any one of the 52 alphabetic characters A through Z in upper case and a through z in lower case may contain [ A-Z. This value must be changed so that each NE in the network has a unique system ID. The system ID is required for proxy access via TL1 (acts as TL1 TID) or proxy access via http/https. One HU is 44. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane.Configuring Parameters How to Configure System Parameters This instruction describes how to change system parameters for the NE. ] as a domain separator must be minimum 1 character and maximum 20 characters. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Step 3 Select the Modify button. the Parameter pane displays. if the NE will be managed later using TL1 must be minimum 1 character and maximum 64 characters. 0-9] may contain [ . Step 4 Enter a text string to identify the NE in the System ID field. The default value is FSP3000.3 80000014705 Issue: B. using the GNE's http or TL1 proxy functionality. 0-9] Step 5 Enter the height of the rack. in Height Units (HUs). Web Console or Element Manager Must end with [A-Z. In response all configured parameters for the selected entity are displayed. OSPF-enabled NEs exchange their known system ID to system IP mappings. 222 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. The mapping between system ID and system IP address is stored on the NE (no DNS required). In response. a-z. into the Size of the Rack field. The system ID can for example be used to address the NE via a GNE.

Enter information about a contact person for the NE into the System Contact field. In response all configured parameters for the selected entity are displayed. Select OK to apply changes or Cancel to discard.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Use the provided drop-down lists to select a new value for the parameter.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Enter a name for the NE in the NE Name field. In response. End of Procedure How to Configure NE Mode This instruction describes how to configure which mode the NE shall work in. Step 4 Use the Traffic Config drop-down list to select the relevant mode for this NE. Enter information about where the NE is located into the System Location field. the Parameter pane displays. The options are: • Optical terminal multiplexer node • Optical add drop multiplexer node • Optical converter node • In line amplification node • Hub node. In response. User Manual 223 . Step 2 Step 3 Select the Modify button. Select the System tab in the Parameters pane. for example add-drop multiplexing. The NE mode must reflect the traffic configuration the NE shall handle. Procedure Step 1 FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. the Modify Configuration window appears.

the Modify window appears.255. 225 “Configuring OSPF for the System Interface” on p. In response. In order to comply with the IP standards. If this interface shall be a numbered IP interface: Fill in the IP Address and the IP Mask in the relevant fields. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential How to Configure a LAN IP Address This procedure describes how to configure the IP address of the LAN IP entity on the NCU. Attempting to use non-unique addresses will be denied.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 235 “Assigning a Default Gateway via the IP Ethernet Interface” on p. using 255. 237 “Connecting the OSC and LAN IP Ethernet Interface” on p. If relevant. enter an alias for this interface. The system IP address is used as the SNMP trap sender address.1 PS 224 User Manual . Note Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Select the SC LAN IP entity on the NCU in the Entities pane.Configuring DCN Features Step 5 Select OK to apply the change or Cancel to discard. so this is the IP address that should be entered in the Element Manager.255. Select the Config tab and the Modify button. It assumes that the relevant modules are already correctly provisioned. 233 “Assigning/Removing a Default Route” on p. the Ethernet IP interfaces and the PPP IP interfaces are unique. End of Procedure Configuring DCN Features This section describes how to configure DCN features. if the Element Manager shall be used for management of the NE. 232 “Assigning/Removing Static Routes” on p. 230 “Defining OSPF for Ethernet PPP IP/LAN IP Interfaces” on p. 224 “How to Configure the System IP Address” on p. The following topics are provided: “How to Configure a LAN IP Address” on p. Ensure that the planned IP addresses for the System.254 as a subnet mask value is not allowed. 238 FSP 3000R7 R10.

This has implications if Control Plane provisioning is active. Additional considerations if the Control Plane is active If you change the System IP address. User Manual 225 . the OSPF router ID.255. Set the administrative state to the relevant value at this time. and for ring group switching. A change to the mapping between IP address and TID is not automatically reflected on the LIF_CP configuration. 1.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the Element Manager will lose contact with the NE. The system IP address is always OSPF enabled. Please contact ADVA Optical Networking for more information if you want to use this value. and you have chosen to use TIDs to identify neighboring elements when configuring LIF_CP entities. the LIF_CP will have to be removed and re-added. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The system IP address is the loopback IP address for the NE.255. The value 255. this will naturally change the mapping between the Target Identifier (TID) (System Identity) for the NE and the IP address to which that TID resolves. you must set the administrative state to In Service or Automatic In Service. change the auto-negotiation setting for the Ethernet IP interface by selecting Enabled or Disabled in the Auto-Negotiation drop-down list. Select OK to apply the changes and close the Modify window. indicated by four consecutive beeps and the MOD LED shining green. as it may be needed for special use cases.255 is allowed. In order for the interface to become operational. Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 End of Procedure How to Configure the System IP Address FSP 3000R7 R10. A reboot causes the management computer to momentarily lose connection to the NE. This can be avoided by choosing to enter LIF_CP configuration information using IP addresses rather than TIDs. The NE's management connectivity is restored at a later time. so if you change this address.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 5 If required. The Element Manager uses the System IP Address for connecting to the NE. Select the State tab and the Modify button. and is used as the SNMP trap sender address. The NE's IP connectivity should be restored within a few minutes. This instruction describes how to configure the System IP address of the NE. Reboot the NE for the new IP addresses to take effect. In order to update any local LIF_CP entities affected by such a change to IP/TID mapping at a remote element.

Configuring DCN Features Procedure Step 1 If the NE shall use OSPF: Ensure that the planned IP addresses for the system IP address. the Modify Configuration window appears. If the IP addresses are not unique. 226 User Manual . Select the Modify button. so they must be changed in this case. so this is the IP address that should be entered in the Element Manager. FSP 3000R7 R10. If the NE shall not use OSPF: The system IP address and the Ethernet address may be the same. the Ethernet IP interfaces and the PPP IP interfaces are unique. The system IP address is used as the SNMP trap sender address. Step 2 Right-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane and select System IP Settings. The default values for the system and Ethernet IP addresses are not unique. Enter the loop-back IP address in the IP Address field. the DCN will be non-functional because OSPF will not announce multiple IP interfaces with the same IP address. Likewise the PPP IP addresses may be the same. In response. In response the current System IP address and mask is displayed. In response. Make a note of the existing address in the IP Address field. if the Element Manager shall be used for management of the NE. the System IP Settings window displays. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Note Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 PS Select the System IP tab.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

Four consecutive beeps and the MOD LED shining green indicate that the NE has completed the reboot and can be accessed again. a warning will be displayed. using 255. In response.255 is allowed.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In order to comply with the IP standards. Step 12 End of Procedure 1. see “How to Add a Single IP Connection” on p. However. FSP 3000R7 R10.254 as a subnet mask value is not allowed. A reboot causes the management computer to momentarily lose connection to the NE.255.255. 39 for guidance. you can choose to reboot later. the subnet mask is simply ignored. 52 for guidance. The value 255. The mask entered is only used for any existing unnumbered Ethernet interface in the NE. If you selected Yes. Step 11 Remove the old IP address (see note you made in Step 5) that the Element Manager was connected to. User Manual 227 . a warning will be displayed.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 7 Enter the mask for the loop-back IP address in the IP Mask field. as it may be needed for special use cases. Please contact ADVA Optical Networking for more information if you want to use this value.255. Step 9 Confirm that you want to continue. Add the new system IP address to the Element Manager’s list of managed elements. b) Make a note to remember to reboot at a later time. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 10 It is necessary to reboot the NE for the new system IP address to take effect. or cancel the application of your entry.255. The NE is again ready for operation within approximately five minutes. do as follows: a) Stop the automatic reboot process by selecting Cancel. if no such interface exists.1 Step 8 Select OK to apply the change or Cancel to discard. see “How to Delete IP Connections” on p.

For OSPF to work. FSP 3000R7 R10.Configuring DCN Features Configuring OSPF Areas In the OSPF routing protocol each router keeps track of the neighboring routers.0). and adds routes to its routing table accordingly. a single or multiple areas may be configured.0.0. Select the OSPF tab in the Parameter pane. A DCN configuration with non-unique numbered interfaces will be rejected. An NE having interfaces in multiple areas is called an Area Border Router (ABR) and must always have at least one interface configured in the backbone area (0. calculates the shortest path to all the reachable IP destinations. This instruction describes how to configure OSPF areas for the system. and the System IP address will always be advertised. In response. Please refer to the DCN chapter in the Detailed System Description for more information on stub areas. 228 User Manual . the Parameter pane displays. exchanges the IP networks that are reachable through each router. all available OSPF information is displayed.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the Entities pane. the IP addresses of numbered interfaces in the DCN must be unique. OSPF is enabled per IP interface. An area can also be configured to be a stub area. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential In response. Depending on the size of the OSPF domain. The System IP address is used as the OSPF Router ID.

which is expressed in dotted decimal format. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Select the area type from the Area Type drop-down list. Step 4 Enter the area ID for the System interface in the Area ID field. OSPF areas are identified by the 32-bit area ID. area 0. In response. For example.1. either Stub or Normal.15 is the same as area 271 in decimal format. This is a metric that is advertised for the default route into the stub area.0. In response.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 3 Select the Add button. The lower the number.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 5 Step 6 FSP 3000R7 R10. the Create OSPF Area window content changes. Step 7 Enter the Stub Default Route Cost for this stub area. User Manual 229 . the more likely this area border router is used for external/default traffic. It ranges from 0 to 65535. the Create OSPF Area window appears. Select Next.

The System IP will only take effect as the OSPF Router ID. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .3 80000014705 Issue: B. the Create OSPF Area window content changes. Ensure that all required OSPF areas for this NE have been created by checking the OSPF area list. Each OSPF area can be identified by its AID. then toggle the Config button.The OSPF area settings will be displayed below the OSPF area list. In response. To view the settings of any OSPF area.Configuring DCN Features Step 8 Select Next. 230 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. which reflects its area ID. This instruction describes how to configure the redistribution and area ID for the system interface. Step 9 Select Next. Step 12 End of Procedure Configuring OSPF for the System Interface OSPF is always enabled for the System (Loopback) interface. after the NE has been rebooted. the Create OSPF Area window content changes. select that area in the OSPF area list. The OSPF protocol uses the System IP address as the OSPF router ID. Step 10 Step 11 Select Finish to close the Create OSPF Area window.

similarly an NE which is internal to a stub area shall not redistribute static routes over OSPF. Step 4 Step 5 Use the Area ID drop-down list to select the correct OSPF area. Note PS User Manual 231 . FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 3 Select the Modify button to change any of these parameters. In response. • Select Static to redistribute static routes using OSPF. • Select None if static routes will not be distributed using OSPF. Static routes shall not be redistributed into stub areas. all available information about the entity is displayed in the OSPF pane. Use the Route Redistribution drop-down list to specify how the routes shall be redistributed. In response. This is the initial default value.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the Entities pane. the Modify window appears. the Parameter pane displays. Select the OSPF tab in the Parameter pane. In response.

232 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.Configuring DCN Features Step 6 Select OK to apply your settings. Select from the NCU submenu either: • the supervisory channel (SC-1-A-C LANIP) • the PPP IP channel (LINK-1-A-<n> PPP IP) Select the Config tab. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 5 Set the OSPF routing properties for the interface as follows: a) Activate OSPF by setting OSPF Routing to the relevant option. select Modify. Step 3 Step 4 To make changes to the current OSPF parameter values. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant Network Element in the NE Pane. End of Procedure Defining OSPF for Ethernet PPP IP/LAN IP Interfaces This instruction describes how to configure the redistribution and area ID for the system interface. This example shows the supervisory channel.

0. An NE configured as an area border router must have at least one IP interface assigned to the backbone area ID 0. The default OSPF costis 100. the System IP Settings window displays. FSP 3000R7 R10. no reboot is required). A static route will become active immediately (i. In response. The DCN plan should give you the needed information to configure static routes: for each new destination the gateway and IP interface towards the gateway must be defined. the NE operates as an area border router. a user account of ADMIN level is required. User Manual 233 . End of Procedure Assigning/Removing Static Routes This procedure describes how to add or delete a static route to the routing table. which is independent of the IP interface's bandwidth. For a static route using a PPP IP interface towards the gateway. You can view both the active and the inactive routes.0. In the case of an unnumbered PPP IP interface. as well as the IP interface over which the gateway can be reached. the gateway IP address must be equal to the local/near-end IP address of that PPP IP interfaces. A gateway in a static route must therefore always be in the same IP subnet as the IP interface towards the gateway in that static route.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs b) Enter the OSPF cost for this interface in the Routing Metric field. If multiple area ID's are configured. The higher the OSPF Cost.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Viewing the inactive routes allows you to delete static route configurations that are not currently active. The area ID may be different for different IP interfaces on a network element. but only if its IP interface towards the gateway is operationally up. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Static routes can be configured to be able to reach new destinations (destinations that are not immediately reachable through the configured IP interfaces). Static routes must point out the next hop or gateway to reach the new destination. c) Select the OSPF area ID for this interface. Procedure Step 1 Right-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane and select System IP Settings. use the local System IP address as the default gateway. the less likely the OSPF routing protocol will enter routes to the attached network which go via this interface into the routing tables of the OSPF routers. To define static routes.0.e. Step 6 Select OK to apply your changes or Cancel to cancel them.

The higher this number is. Enter the IP address of the local interface gateway in the Gateway field. If required.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 3 Select Add to open the Add Route window. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Enter the destination IP address for this new route in the Destination field. You can now see the route you added in either the Active Routes or Inactive Routes section. In the case of multiple routes to the same destination. change the default routing metric value displayed in the Metric field. Select Refresh in either the Active Routes or Inactive Routes section to update the list of routes after your change.Configuring DCN Features Step 2 Select the Routing Table tab. Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 In the Device field. Changing the routing metric will be taken into account immediately. 234 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. the route with the lower metric is preferred. Enter the subnet mask for the destination in the Mask field. Apply your setting by selecting OK or cancel them by selecting Cancel. use the drop-down list to select the IP interface that the gateway is reachable over. In response the current active routes in the system are displayed. the more expensive a route becomes when using this link. This value represents the weight for the OSPF interface in the OSPF calculation.

237.0". To define static routes. namely for the destination "0. namely as a fall-back solution in case OSPF would fail. Configuring a default static route is the easiest way to perform static routing. There is one special option for configuring a default route using an Ethernet interface: see “Assigning a Default Gateway via the IP Ethernet Interface” on p.0. User Manual 235 . In response. However. Step 13 Step 14 Select Yes to confirm the deletion or Cancel to cancel the deletion. this default route cannot be advertised by OSPF. select Close to close the System IP Settings window.0. End of Procedure Assigning/Removing a Default Route This procedure describes how to add or delete a default route to the routing table. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Procedure Step 1 Right-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane and select System IP Settings. and select Delete. This method provides a very simple way of configuring a default route. When you are finished working with routes. FSP 3000R7 R10. a user account of ADMIN level is required. If no other. Consider whether this option is relevant. the default route will always apply as a last resort. and this configuration will be taken into account by the Linux system and be operational independently of the ADVA specific NE software. A default route is just a special case of a static route. select the route in the Active Routes or Inactive Routes list. the System IP Settings window displays.3 80000014705 Issue: B. This default route will have metric 0. more specific static routes are present for the destination being looked up.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 12 If you wish to remove either an active or inactive route. Activating this configuration requires a reboot. and thus have the highest priority. and can still be useful in combination with dynamic routing. In response a warning window appears. by design.

Step 3 Select Add to open the Add Route window.0.0.0 in the Mask field. Enter the 0. Changing the routing metric will be taken into account immediately. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Step 7 If required. This value represents the weight for the OSPF interface in the OSPF calculation. Step 9 Step 10 Select Refresh in either the Active Routes or Inactive Routes section to update the list of routes after your change. The options are: • LINK-1-A-x. use the drop-down list to select the local IP interface for the default route. In response the current active routes in the system are displayed.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the more expensive a route becomes when using this link. Step 8 In the Device field. The higher this number is.Configuring DCN Features Step 2 Select the Routing Table tab. Apply your setting by selecting OK or cancel them by selecting Cancel.0. 236 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. change the default routing metric value displayed in the Metric field.0. if the PPP IP interface has been provisioned. Enter the IP address of the local interface that shall be the default route in the Gateway field. Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Enter the value 0.0 in the Destination field. This IP address must be entered manually even if the local interface is unnumbered (=System IP address).

However. Procedure Step 1 Right-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane and select System IP Settings. In response. this gateway will only be used if OSPF fails.3 80000014705 Issue: B. and this configuration will be taken into account by the Linux system and be operational even if the NE software is not running.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 11 Step 12 You can now see the route you added in either the Active Routes or Inactive Routes section. Activating this configuration requires a reboot. and thus have the highest priority. this default route cannot be advertised by OSPF. In response a warning window appears. select Close to close the System IP Settings window. End of Procedure Assigning a Default Gateway via the IP Ethernet Interface FSP 3000R7 R10. This method provides a very simple way of configuring a default route. the System IP Settings window displays. If you wish to remove the default route. This default route will have metric 0. If dynamic routing using the OSPF protocol is used. by design. and select Delete. select it in the Active Routes or Inactive Routes list. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential This section describes special option for configuring a default route using an Ethernet interface. When you are finished working with routes. Step 13 Step 14 Select Yes to confirm the deletion or Cancel to cancel the deletion. User Manual 237 .

Step 3 Select the Modify tab. . Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. Select the Config tab in the Parameters pane. Select Close to close the System IP Settings window.Configuring DCN Features Step 2 Select the Default Gateway tab. End of Procedure Connecting the OSC and LAN IP Ethernet Interface This procedure describes how to connect the OSC and the Ethernet IP interface. In response. 238 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the Modify window displays. Expand the list of equipment in the Entity pane and select the OSCM (MOD-x-y-OSCM). © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 4 Enter the IP address of the default gateway in the Default Gateway field. Step 5 Step 6 Apply your setting by selecting OK or cancel them by selecting Cancel.

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 4 Select Modify. a PC running an FTP server is required. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The following topics are provided: How to Enable/Disable the FTP Server How to Enable/Disable the FTP Client How to Enable/Disable Use of SSH How to Configure Known Hosts How to Enable/Disable the FTP Server Software update files. For example: LAN-1-A-1. also have an FTP server on board. Apply your setting by selecting OK or cancel them by selecting Cancel. Thus. The FTP server is disabled by default. Step 5 Use the LAN-AID drop-down list to select the LAN IP Ethernet interface on the NCU to connect the OSC to. database update files and alarm profile files can be imported and exported from the NE using an FTP client-server pair. FSP 3000R7 R10. The Element Manager has an FTP client on board. In this case no external FTP server is necessary. The NCU-II is an example of this. the FTP server should be disabled after the software update. In order to upload files to the NE. the FTP server functionality will be disabled again. NEs with a NCU with a 1 GB CompactFlash (CF) installed. If use of FTP is considered a security threat. Step 6 End of Procedure Configuring Security This section contains instructions for configuring security related aspects of the NE. User Manual 239 . if use of the FTP server is required. thus after installation of a software update.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the FTP server must be enabled after a software update.

In response the Security Settings window appears. the Modify window appears. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant Network Element in the NE Pane.3 80000014705 Issue: B. or Cancel to discard the change.Configuring Security This section contains the instruction to enable the FTP server. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 4 Step 5 Use the FTP Server drop-down list and select Enable to enable the FTP Server. End of Procedure 240 User Manual . In response. To disable it. From the Main Menu select Configuration -> Security Settings. select Disable. Step 3 Select the Modify button. FSP 3000R7 R10. Select OK to apply the change.

Step 4 Step 5 Use the FTP Client drop-down list and select Enable to enable the FTP client. Select OK to apply the change. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 3 Select the Modify button.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs How to Enable/Disable the FTP Client Software update files. This section contains the instruction to enable or disable the FTP client that is built into the Element Manager. End of Procedure User Manual 241 . From the Main Menu select Configuration -> Security Settings. select Disable. In response the Security Settings window appears. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant Network Element in the NE Pane. or Cancel to discard the change. FSP 3000R7 R10. the Modify window appears. The Element Manager has an FTP client on board. database update files and alarm profile files can be imported and exported from the NE using an FTP client-server pair. To disable it.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

From the Main Menu select Configuration -> Security Settings. End of Procedure How to Configure Known Hosts The secure shell protocol (SSH) allows data to be exchanged over secure channels. Select OK to apply the change. 242 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. This instruction describes how to define known hosts and their public keys. the Modify window appears. Step 3 Select the Modify button. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . select Disable. To disable it. and these items must be defined for each known host that may access the NE. In response the Security Settings window appears. or Cancel to discard the change.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Configuring Security How to Enable/Disable Use of SSH This instruction describes how to enable or disable use of SSH for secure communication with the NE. Step 4 Step 5 Use the SSH Server drop-down list and select Enable to enable the use of the SSH protocol. This involves use of private and public keys for exchanging the data with known hosts. In response. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant Network Element in the NE Pane.

SSH converts the public key of the remote host to this unique. In response the Security Settings window appears. • To modify an the fingerprint for an existing known host. This is the host's SSH public key encryption algorithm. go to Step 11. In response the Security Settings window displays a list of the known hosts. User Manual 243 . This is a readable form of the remote host’s public key. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The following information is displayed: Column Name Known Host IP Type Description This is the IP address of the remote host that shall de defined as a known host for the NE.3 80000014705 Issue: B. form that you can use to exchange and compare with other key authentication data. • To delete a known host from the list. Fingerprint Step 4 Select which action you wish to take: • To add a new known host to the list. RSA1 or DSA are supported. By applying the cryptographic hash function MD5.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Select the relevant NE in the Entity pane. and the SSH server on the remote host will negotiate which one to use. go to Step 5. Select the SSH Fingerprints tab. The SSH client. more readable. FSP 3000R7 R10. go to Step 15. RSA. Select Configuration -> Security Settings from the main menu.

FSP 3000R7 R10. RSA.Configuring Security Step 5 Select the Add button. Select the known host that you wish to delete from the known hosts list. Enter the fingerprint for the host’s public key in the Fingerprint field. Select OK to apply the new fingerprint. Continue from Step 15. Continue from Step 15. Select OK to add the known host. Specify the host's SSH public key encryption algorithm by using the Type drop-down list. In response.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the Add Known Host dialog appears. In response. 244 User Manual . Select the Delete button. in the Fingerprint field. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Modify the fingerprint for the host’s public key. Step 6 Step 7 Enter the IP address of the new known host in the Known Host IP field. RSA1 or DSA are supported. or Cancel to discard your entries and return to the Known Hosts tab. the Modify Fingerprint dialog appears. or Cancel to discard your entries and return to the Known Hosts tab. a confirmation window appears. Select the Modify button.

the list of known hosts is updated. 247 “How to View All Protection Group Settings” on p. virtual channel. 249 FSP 3000R7 R10. 254 “How to Inhibit Protection Switch (Method B)” on p.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 17 Select Yes to complete the deletion. 256 User Manual 245 . You can view information about the current protection configuration at the entity level. 255 “How to Inhibit an Ethernet Linear Protection Switch” on p. 250 “How to Make a Manual Ethernet Linear Protection Switch” on p. 252 “How to Inhibit Protection Switch (Method A)” on p. The following topics are provided: “How to view Single Protection Group Settings (Method A)” on p. channel card or versatile protection has been provisioned. If you selected Yes. protection is active. 246 “How to View Single Protection Group Settings (Method B)” on p. you can refresh the list of known hosts by selecting the Refresh button. or at the NE level. You can also operate the protection switch manually. If necessary. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential “How to Make a Manual Protection Switch (Method B)” on p. End of Procedure Working with Protection When channel.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 248 “How to Make a Manual Protection Switch (Method A)” on p. or Cancel to abort the action.

For example. Step 4 To view all protection details that were entered during provisioning. You can select either of these two here. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant channel module that is used in a protection group. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . meaning that the information about that protection group can be viewed by selecting either of the two FFP entities. Note that the defined working AID is indicated here. This list contains the FFP-CH entities. Step 3 Select which protection group to view. FFP-CH-1-18-NE1 and FFP-CH-1-18-NW1 can be defined to be in a protection group.3 80000014705 Issue: B. or select Configuration->Protection from the Main Menu.Working with Protection How to view Single Protection Group Settings (Method A) This instruction describes how to view the protection settings for one single protection group. 246 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. and there is on entity for each end channel in the protection group. read the top section of the Protection window. Either right-click the module and select Protection from the context sensitive menu that appears. In response. using the Protection Group drop-down list. while the status for each of the working and protection AIDs are shown in the Working AID and Protection AID sections. the Protection window appears.

select the Config tab. In response. User Manual 247 . This section can be expanded or collapsed. FSP 3000R7 R10. These settings are not editable from this window. the configured parameters for this channel are displayed. Procedure Step 1 Select one of the network side channels in a protection group from the Entities pane hierarchical list. Step 2 In the Parameter pane. End of Procedure How to View Single Protection Group Settings (Method B) This instruction describes how to view the protection settings for one single protection group. End of Procedure Each of the protection parameters are described in the FSP3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 5 Refresh the contents of this window when needed.3 80000014705 Issue: B. using the Refresh button. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The protection settings that were entered during provisioning are displayed in the Protection section. Such channels are named: CH-<shelf #>-<slot #>-N|NE|NW.

From the Main Menu. End of Procedure 248 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 3 Display the protection type that you wish to see protection groups for by selecting the relevant tab in the Protection Group window. Close the Protection Groups window by selecting the Close button. In response. Save the protection groups list to file by selecting the Save button.Working with Protection How to View All Protection Group Settings This instruction describes how to view the protection settings for all protection groups in an NE at once. select Configuration -> Protection Groups. Print the protection groups list by selecting the Print button. Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 This list is not updated automatically after it has been opened. . The Protection Group window can display protection groups for the following protection types: • • • channel protection channel group protection (versatile protection) Ethernet linear protection The protection parameters are described in the FSP3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual. To refresh the contents: Select the Refresh button. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the NE from the Entities pane hierarchical list.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the Protection Group window appears.

using the Protection Group drop-down list. Note Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant channel module that is used in a protection group. In response.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs How to Make a Manual Protection Switch (Method A) This instruction describes how to issue manual protection switching commands using the Protection window. For channel card protection: when ALS is enabled on the client port of the channel modules. the Protection window appears. User Manual 249 . This instruction is not applicable for Ethernet linear protection. the start time of the ALS will contribute to the protection switch time. If the Working AID or Protection AID has a selectable Modify button. this is the currently used AID. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 3 Select the correct protection group. PS FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B. or select Configuration->Protection from the Main Menu. Either right-click the module and select Protection from the context sensitive menu that appears.

Note Procedure Step 1 Select one of the network side channels in a protection group from the Entities pane hierarchical list. Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Switch to the other AID by using the Protection Switch drop-down list and selecting the option Manual Switch. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential How to Make a Manual Protection Switch (Method B) PS .Working with Protection Step 4 Select the Modify button of the currently used AID. Such channels are named: CH-<shelf #>-<slot #>-N|NE|NW. For channel card protection: when ALS is enabled on the client port of the channel modules. Update the displayed information in the Protection window by selecting Refresh. In response the Modify window appears. Close the Protection window by selecting Close. This instruction is not applicable for Ethernet linear protection. the start time of the ALS will contribute to the protection switch time.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Check the sections Working AID or Protection AID to see whether the switch took place. End of Procedure This instruction describes how to issue manual protection switching commands using the Operation tab. 250 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Apply the entry by selecting OK.

In response. FSP 3000R7 R10. • Release Switch releases the manual setting. In response. select the Operation tab. the commands that can be issued are displayed. the Modify Operation window appears. Step 4 End of Procedure User Manual 251 . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 3 Use the Protection Switch drop-down list to issue the relevant command.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Select the Modify button. Select OK to apply the command. • Manual Switch results in switching to the other path (working or protection). or Cancel to discard it.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 2 In the Parameter pane.

252 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. the Flow Connection window content changes. In response. Step 2 Select the Ethernet Linear Protection Group tab. or select Configuration->Flow Connections from the Main Menu. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .Working with Protection How to Make a Manual Ethernet Linear Protection Switch This instruction describes how to issue manual protection switching commands for Ethernet linear protection.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the Flow Connection window appears. Procedure Step 1 Either right-click the NE where the protection module resides and select Flow Connections from the context sensitive menu that appears. In response.

Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 End of Procedure User Manual 253 . Right-click the correct Ethernet linear protection group in the table and select Details from the context sensitive menu that appears. Step 4 FSP 3000R7 R10. Port.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Close the Ethernet Linear Protection window by selecting Close. Switch to the other AID by using the Protection Switch drop-down list in the active path’s section to select Manual Switch. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 5 Find out whether it is the working or protection path that is active by checking the Secondary States field In the Working AID or Protection AID section. Update the displayed information in the Protection window by selecting Refresh. In response the Ethernet Linear Protection Group Details window appears. SVID From and SVID To fields in the Filter section to filter the display of Ethernet linear protection groups.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 3 If necessary use the Equipment. Check the Secondary States fields in the sections Working AID or Protection AID to see whether the switch took place. Apply the entry by selecting Apply.

Either right-click the module and select Protection from the context sensitive menu that appears. using the Protection Group drop-down list. Step 3 Select the correct protection group. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant channel module that is used in a protection group. Step 4 Select the Modify button of the currently used AID. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . In response the Modify window appears. or select Configuration->Protection from the Main Menu. 254 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response. the Protection window appears. If the Working AID or Protection AID has a selectable Modify button. this is the currently used AID.Working with Protection How to Inhibit Protection Switch (Method A) This instruction describes how to inhibit a protection switch to the protection path using the Protection window.

select the Operation tab. which indicates normal working operation Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Select OK to apply the command.3 80000014705 Issue: B. No. which inhibits switching to the working path. which inhibits switching to the protection path. Update the displayed information in the Protection window by selecting Refresh. Close the Protection window by selecting Close. Such channels are named: CH-<shelf #>-<slot #>-N|NE|NW. User Manual 255 . Procedure Step 1 Select one of the network side channels in a protection group from the Entities pane hierarchical list.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 5 If you see the Inhibit Switch to PROTN drop-down list: Use the drop-down list to select: • Yes. End of Procedure How to Inhibit Protection Switch (Method B) FSP 3000R7 R10. the commands that can be issued are displayed. Step 2 In the Parameter pane. or Cancel to discard it. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential This instruction describes how to inhibit a protection switch to the protection path. which indicates normal protection operation If you see the Inhibit Switch to WKG drop-down list: Use the drop-down list to select: • • Yes. • No. Check the sections Working AID or Protection AID to see whether the setting has been applied.

or select Configuration->Flow Connections from the Main Menu.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Working with Protection Step 3 Select the Modify button. Step 5 End of Procedure How to Inhibit an Ethernet Linear Protection Switch FSP 3000R7 R10. In response. Step 4 Use the Inhibit Switch to PROTN drop-down list to select: • Yes. In response. 256 User Manual . the Flow Connection window appears. which inhibits switching to the protection path. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential This instruction describes how to inhibit a protection switch away from the currently active path for Ethernet linear protection. Procedure Step 1 Either right-click the NE where the protection module resides and select Flow Connections from the context sensitive menu that appears. • No. which indicates normal protection operation Select OK to apply the command. or Cancel to discard it. the Modify Operation window appears.

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 2 Select the Ethernet Linear Protection Group tab. Step 3 If necessary use the Equipment. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 5 Find out whether it is the working or protection path that is active by checking the Secondary States field In the Working AID or Protection AID section. Step 4 FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response the Ethernet Linear Protection Group Details window appears. Right-click the correct Ethernet linear protection group in the table and select Details from the context sensitive menu that appears. In response. SVID From and SVID To fields in the Filter section to filter the display of Ethernet linear protection groups. Port. User Manual 257 . the Flow Connection window content changes.

Apply the entry by selecting Apply. using the Protection window. or select Configuration->Protection from the Main Menu.Working with Protection Step 6 Inhibit protection switching to the other AID by using the Inhibit Switch to PROTN or Inhibit Switch to WKG drop-down list in the active path’s section to select Yes. Either right-click the module and select Protection from the context sensitive menu that appears. 258 User Manual . Step 7 Step 8 End of Procedure How to Configure APS Hold-Off Time (Method A) This instruction describes how to configure the hold-off time between a protection switch trigger and the actual switching. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant channel module that is used in a protection group. FSP 3000R7 R10. using the Protection Group drop-down list.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Close the Ethernet Linear Protection window by selecting Close. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 3 Select the correct protection group. the Protection window appears.

In response the Modify window appears. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential This instruction describes how to configure the hold-off time between a protection switch trigger and the actual switching. Select OK to apply the command. The option None means that no hold-off time will be used. select the Config tab. Check the field APS Hold-Off to see whether the setting has been applied.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select one of the network side channels or virtual channels in a protection group from the Entities pane hierarchical list. End of Procedure How to Configure APS Hold-Off Time (Method B) FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Use the APS Hold-Off drop-down list to select the hold-off time. Close the Protection window by selecting Close.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 4 Select the Modify button in the top section. In response. using the Config tab. In the Parameter pane. or Cancel to discard it. User Manual 259 . Update the displayed information in the Protection window by selecting Refresh. the configured parameters for this channel are displayed.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . alarms are not reported. Update the displayed information in the Protection section by selecting Refresh. The option None means that no hold-off time will be used. Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Use the APS Hold-Off drop-down list to select the hold-off time. Check the field APS Hold-Off to see whether the setting has been applied. Select the State tab. End of Procedure How to Change the Administrative State This section describes how to change the administrative state for an entity. Step 5 Use the Admin State drop-down list to select the relevant administrative state option for the entity. out of service MGT 260 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. service affecting operations are allowed. Management. Select Modify. In response the Modify window appears. Behavior in service out of service Abbreviation IS AINS Option In Service.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Select the NE in the Managed Elements pane. In response the Modify window appears. Select OK to apply the command. or Cancel to discard it.How to Change the Administrative State Step 3 Select the Modify button in the Protection section. Select the relevant entity in the Entities pane. alarms are not reported but service-affecting operations cannot be performed. alarms are reported Automatic In Service.

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Option Maintenance.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Disabled. Provisioning. Procedure FSP 3000R7 R10. In response the Equipment pane displays the OTDR. and Operations Manual. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 1 Select the OTDR in the Entities pane. alarms are suppressed. please see the OTDR Installation. alarms are not reported. Behavior out of service out of service Abbreviation MT DSBLD Step 6 Select OK to apply your change or Cancel to reject the changes. This section describes how to open the OTDR application. End of Procedure Configuring the OTDR The OTDR is configured using the separate OTDR application. User Manual 261 . For information about configuring the OTDR. The OTDR is represented by the shelf entity SHELF-OTDR 8-OTDR3HU. service affecting operations are allowed. service affecting operations are allowed.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . displaying the login window for the OTDR application. End of Procedure Viewing Node Channel Traces The FSP 3000R7 system supports NEs with multiple degrees. optical channel power control. Users can compare values to verify signal flow and to ensure that fibers are clean and properly connected. and directionless add/drop capabilities. Node channel trace determines the path that a service follows through a node. starting from the user-specified point to the other end-point.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Viewing Node Channel Traces Step 2 In the Equipment pane. select Open in browser. In response a browser opens. Provisioning. starting from a designated point. tunable lasers and filters. Step 3 Consult the OTDR Installation. or multicast channels. Service trace may be a single channel path for uni-directional channels or multiple channel paths for bi-directional. One or both of the service end points are Optical Lines (OL). Tracing a service through the node identifies the ports on modules that support that service. The current performance monitoring (PM) values can also be displayed. channel switching. This procedure describes how to view service traces in an NE. drop-and-continue. A service may be traced through the node at the wavelength level. 262 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. and Operations Manual for instructions on logging in to the OTDR application and using it.

select Node Channel Trace. do as follows: • Select the Optical Line radio button. If you wish to trace the channel path from one port to another port. • Select the optical line that the channel passes through by using the Optical Line drop-down list. • Select the relevant channel carried on this optical line by using the Channel Number drop-down list. do as follows: • Select the Port radio button. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential If you wish to trace the channel path through an optical line.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Procedure Step 1 From the main menu. In response. Step 2 FSP 3000R7 R10. • Select the port the channel originates from in the Port drop-down list.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 3 User Manual 263 . Continue from Step 4. the Node Channel Trace window opens.

• • If this is an optical line. which is displayed in this field. This field identifies the service trace’s source-point by its AID.Viewing Node Channel Traces Step 4 In response the Node Channel Trace window displays the channel path in tabular form. • • If this is an optical line. This field shows the specific type of a channel path route. The following information is provided in the node channel trace table. also the module equipment point displays. The following types are supported: • • • • Backplane Cable Equipment Fiber From AID • Provisioned This field identifies the service trace’s source-point by its AID. To AID If this is a port. also the channel number is displayed.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 264 User Manual . If this is a port. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Each uni-directional trace is represented by a different number. also the module equipment point displays. Column Name Id Route Type Description FSP 3000R7 R10. also the channel number is displayed.

3 80000014705 Issue: B.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 5 If you want to view the measured optical power at the source and destination facilities of the channel. FSP 3000R7 R10. In response the Node Channel Trace window table changes. This option is not selected by default because the retrieval of performance monitoring data can be a lengthy operation. place a check mark in the Display Optical Power PM check box. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The following additional information is provided in the node channel User Manual 265 .

which indicates that the port or OL does not support performance monitoring. Either the facility is provisioned but not equipped. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . power at the transmission port and <ppc> signifies the power per-channel. Column Name Tx (a/ppc) [dBm] Description This column shows the transmitted optical power measured at the trace’s source-point. which indicates that the port or OL does not support performance monitoring. The following values can be shown: • <a>/<ppc>. or optical power. or total. which indicates that an error has • occurred. where <a> signifies the aggregate. • no value. for a particular service. n/a. • Rx (a/ppc) [dBm] no value. This column shows the received optical power measured at the trace’s destination-point or optical line. or total power at the transmission port and <ppc> signifies the power per-channel. Either the facility is provisioned but not equipped. 266 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. where <a> signifies the aggregate. for a particular service. or a Loss of Signal (LOS) alarm is raised against the port. or optical power.3 80000014705 Issue: B. which indicates that an error has • occurred.Viewing Node Channel Traces trace table:. n/a. The following values can be shown: • <a>/<ppc>. or a Loss of Signal (LOS) alarm is raised against the port.

select the Graph tab. 272 “How to View Interface Information” on p. 275 User Manual 267 . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential To refresh the content of the table or graph. 270 “How to View Inventory for an Entity” on p. When you are finished. Step 7 FSP 3000R7 R10. 274 “How to View the OSPF Information” on p. In response the Node Channel Trace window displays a graph instead of a table. select Close to close the Node Channel Trace window.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 6 To see a graphical view of the channel path. 271 “How to View Inventory for a NE” on p. select Refresh.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 8 End of Procedure Viewing Information About the NE This section collects all instructions for viewing information about the entities in the NE. 268 “How to View Configured Parameters” on p. 273 “How to View the Routing Table” on p. The following topics are provided: “How to View System Information” on p.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . 268 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Procedure Step 1 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Viewing Information About the NE How to View System Information This instruction describes how to view system information for the NE. In response. the Parameter pane displays.

The default value is “FSP3000”. it shows what kind of configuration the node is defined to work in.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response. in Height Units (HU). all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameters pane. This field shows that the NE is WDM type equipment. This field is user configurable and shows the contact person that has been defined for the NE. This shows the product name of the NE. NE Name Network Element Type Model Manufacturer name Grade Traffic Config Size of the Rack System ID System Location System Contact User Manual 269 . Field Name NE SW Version FSP 3000R7 R10.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 2 Select the System tab in the Parameters pane. This field is user configurable and shows the NE’s name. This field is user configurable and shows the location that the NE is installed at. For example.45 mm. One HU is 44. This field shows the manufacturer of the NE. The options are: o Optical terminal multiplexer node o Optical add drop multiplexer node o Optical converter node o In line amplification node o Hub node This field is user configurable and shows the size of the rack. as a optical add drop multiplexer. The following information is provided. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Description This shows the name of the SW package file that is currently running. This field is user configurable. This field is a user-configurable system identification text for the NE. This shows the grade of the NE.

all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameters pane. FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Select the entity to view parameters for it in the Entities pane. See the document Management Data Guide for descriptions of all parameters that may be displayed for the selected module type and all its dependent entities. the Parameter pane displays. In response. Alarm Deactivation Time End of Procedure How to View Configured Parameters This instruction describes how to view parameters that have been configured for the NE. End of Procedure 270 User Manual .3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. Step 3 Select the Config tab in the Parameters pane. The Fault Cause Persistency filter clears alarms after they are gone for the configured amount of time (Alarm Deactivation Time). The parameters that are displayed in this tab depend on the entity you selected. In response all configured parameters for the selected entity are displayed.Viewing Information About the NE Field Name Alarm Activation Time Description The Fault Cause Persistency filter raises alarms only after being present for a configurable amount of time (Alarm Activation Time).

Official Name Serial Number uCM Revision FPGA Revision Hardware Revision Part Number Vendor Code End of Procedure User Manual 271 . The revision numbers for each of these can be found in the software and database control page of the management tools The name of the equipment.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The following fields are used in the Inventory table: . select the Inventory tab. In response. It shows the revision for the FPGA. The ADVA part number for this equipment. The firmware package contains both software for the network element and equipment firmware for each module. Shows the Common Language Equipment Identifier (CLEI) for this equipment. It shows the revision for the micro-controller software.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs How to View Inventory for an Entity This instruction describes how to view the inventory information for a single piece of equipment. the inventory information is displayed. module or pluggable transceiver from the Entities pane hierarchical list. In the Parameter pane. This field is not relevant for all modules. This field is not relevant for all modules. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant shelf. Field Name CLEI Code FW Package Revision Description. This field is only relevant for SFP Transceivers. The equipment’s serial number. The revision of the equipment’s hardware. FSP 3000R7 R10. It shows the name of the vendor for the equipment. The revision number of the firmware package (FWP) that this equipment is using.

Save the list to file by selecting the Save button. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Use the Equipment Category drop-down list to filter the display of items in the Inventory List window. In response. . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Each of the inventory items are described in “How to View Inventory for an Entity” on p. From the Main Menu.Viewing Information About the NE How to View Inventory for a NE This instruction describes how to view the inventory information for a whole NE. This list is not updated automatically after it has been opened. Print the list by selecting the Print button. select Configuration -> Inventory List. Close the Inventory List window by selecting the Close button. the Inventory List window appears. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE from the Entities pane hierarchical list. End of Procedure 272 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. To refresh the contents: Select the Refresh button.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 271.

To refresh the contents: Select the Refresh button. information about the interfaces on this module is displayed. End of Procedure User Manual 273 .3 80000014705 Issue: B. FSP 3000R7 R10. In the Parameter pane. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant module from the Entities pane hierarchical list. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 3 This list is not updated automatically after it has been opened. In response.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs How to View Interface Information This instruction describes how to view information about channel module interfaces. select the Info tab.

Viewing Information About the NE How to View the Routing Table This instruction describes how to view the routing table for the NE.255. or OSPF. FSP 3000R7 R10. The possible types are Local. and the Mask is 255. Static and OSPF routes are set so the NE can reach addresses outside the NE’s subnet.0 is the default route.255. It is not possible to define or delete routes with the Element Manager. This column shows which IP interface that the gateway is reachable over. the Destination is a single IP address. The routing table can display both the currently active routes and the inactive routes. This column show the gateway that is used to reach the Destination IP address. This column shows the type of route. This column shows the mask for the Destination IP address. Static routes are added manually.For a network route. Column Name Destination Description This column shows the IP address for the destination of the route. the less priority this route has over other routes. while OSPF routes are added by the OSPF protocol.0.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The higher the metric value.0. Figure 18: Routing Table The following information is provided. This column shows the metric value for the route. Static. the Destination is the IP subnet ID and the Mask is the IP subnet mask.255. For a host route. The routing table is shown in Figure 18. The entry 0. For a local route there is no gateway. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Gateway Mask Routing Type Metric Device 274 User Manual . The local route is the route the NE uses when reaching addresses in the same subnet as the NE itself.

the Parameter pane displays. expand the Inactive Routes section. Procedure Step 1 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. FSP 3000R7 R10. In response. the System IP Settings window displays. It is not possible to define routes with Element Manager. In response.3 80000014705 Issue: B. User Manual 275 . In response. Select the Refresh button to update the window contents. Step 2 Select the Routing Table tab. the active routes are displayed in the Routing pane. End of Procedure How to View the OSPF Information This instruction describes how to view the routing table for the NE.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs To open the routing table: Procedure Step 1 Right-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane and select System IP Settings. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 3 Step 4 To display the inactive routes.

This is the initial default value. Select the Refresh button to update the window contents. Route Redistribution Area Type Stub Default Route Cost Step 3 To view which interfaces use an OSPF area.Viewing Information About the NE Step 2 Select the OSPF tab in the Parameters pane. The option Static means that static routes are redistributed using OSPF. Step 4 End of Procedure 276 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. The option None means that static routes will not be distributed using OSPF. select that OSPF area in the OSPF Areas list and toggle the Config button to display the information about that OSPF area. This field shows the OSPF cost for any stub areas.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Field Name Area ID Description This reduces the resources needed for the OSPF calculation by segmenting the routing domain into areas where routing information is exchanged (routing information exchange between areas is limited). © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The following information is provided. all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameters pane. This field shows how the routes shall be redistributed. . In response. This field shows whether the OSPF area is a normal area or a stub area.

should preferably be done when commissioning the system. date and time zone of the NE.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Configuring Date and Time This section describes how to manually set the time. PS PS Any action which changes the date and time may affect the performance records in an already operating system. Note Any action which changes the date and time will result in an entry in the event log. i. or via changes to the NTP configuration. Moreover. either directly. To avoid confusion. Changes to the date and time of the NE. User Manual 277 . you end up with multiple performance records with the same timestamp. multiple performance records with identical timestamps will still be listed chronologically. it is best to retrieve already collected performance records from the NE prior to changing the time. will be incomplete and therefore those performance records will be marked as invalid. FSP 3000R7 R10. if the time is set back in an already operating system. The entry will indicate whether the change was due to a manual change (including the user account that made the change). in the order they were gathered. Features such as scheduled equalization of ROADMs cannot take place unless NTP synchronization is configured and enabled for the NE.e. via the time zone. For your convenience. and to synchronize NE time using the Network Time Protocol (NTP). or due to a daylight saving time action.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Note The intervals of the performance records that were being gathered when the time was changed. due to an NTP step correction.

Time. and time zone of the NE. and Time Zone” on p. Use the FSP 3000R7 Element Manager or the Network Manager to collect performance records. time zone. Time. When the NE is configured to operate as an NTP client (i. • 278 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. You must be logged on with a user account which has ADMIN privileges. How to Manually Set the Date. time. and time zone settings. 280. 278. it is suggested that you retrieve your performance record history from the NE. However. Figure 19: The Date and Time Window The following procedures are provided: • • “How to Manually Set the Date. date. Note Requirements • Before making changes to the date. and Time Zone This procedure describes how to manually set the time. NTP Mode is set to Client-Only or Relay). Collect all performance records and store them in a safe place before following this procedure. The NTP Servers section shows the IP addresses for the remote NTP servers that are defined. time. then the time will be synchronized via NTP and it is not possible to set the time or date manually for this NE. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The Time Settings section shows the current date.3 80000014705 Issue: B. and NTP time synchronization is done in the Date and Time window. time zone. PS .Configuring Date and Time All configuration for date. or NTP configuration in an already operating system. “Synchronizing NE time via NTP” on p.e. the time zone can always be changed. time.

Step 4 To change the NE time. One cannot set the date or time manually when time synchronization with a remote server using NTP is configured (the NTP service mode is Client Only or Relay). © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 5 If relevant. In response the Modify window appears. or simply “GMT+<offset>”. button to display a calendar for easy date Step 6 Step 7 If relevant. This is indicated by the Daylight Savings Time field after applying the time zone. using the syntax yyyy-mm-dd. the resulting offset from GMT will be displayed in the Time Zone Offset field. or click the selection. Only some time-zone options contain info about Daylight Saving Time. where offset is the desired offset from GMT. FSP 3000R7 R10.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Select the NE in the Managed Elements pane. Select a time zone from the Time Zone drop-down list. do as follows: a) Change the field to NTP Disabled. enter the correct date in the Date field. enter the correct time in the Time field. The Daylight Savings Time field does however not indicate whether Daylight Saving Time is currently in effect or not. From the Main Menu. or Cancel to cancel it. The time zone options are named after country names. Ensure that your time zone settings are correct. User Manual 279 . Step 8 Step 9 Select OK to apply the new settings.3 80000014705 Issue: B. select Configuration->Date and Time. Whether the time zone contains information about daylight saving time or not will be indicated in the Daylight Savings Time field. city names. select Modify from the Time Settings section. In response the Date and Time window appears. If you entered a country or city. GMT+x represents a time zone west of Greenwich and GMT-x represents a time zone on the east side of Greenwich. using the syntax hh:mm:ss and 24 hour time. If the NTP Service Mode field is Client Only or Relay. b) Select OK to apply the change.

time.Configuring Date and Time Step 10 Select Close to close the Date and Time window. receiving its timing information from some remote NTP server. Each system at a certain level obtains the time from its peers at the same or some lower stratum. any other remote NTP server will be prioritized over an FSP 3000R7 NTP server. The NE will operate as an NTP server. maximally one NE in the network should be set to server-only mode. The most accurate servers have the lowest stratum numbers. In this mode. This mode is typically used for a gateway NE. When used as a back-up. distributing time to other NTP clients. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential PS . This means that time can be distributed without overloading one single reference. NEs operating as NTP clients can therefore configure this NE as their remote NTP server. distributing time to NTP clients. where each level is termed a stratum and is assigned a number. the NE receives its time information from the local hardware clock. NEs operating as NTP clients can therefore configure this NE as their remote NTP server. or use it as a back-up in case such more precise remote NTP servers fail. It is common practice in carrier and enterprise networks to synchronize all the system clocks via NTP. and will simultaneously operate as an NTP server. as the latter's stratum is set to the highest possible value. The NE will operate as an NTP client and receive its timing information from some remote NTP server. • Because the local hardware clock of the NE is not very precise. Date. Note 280 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. End of Procedure Synchronizing NE time via NTP The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a standard protocol for distributing accurate time around a computer network. Relay mode. If Server Only mode is used. and time zone must therefore be set manually for this NE. and all other nodes in the network should point to this node as their remote NTP server. Server Only mode. receiving time information from a remote NTP server in the external network. The numbering starts with zero at the top (i. It operates hierarchically. only use Server Only mode if no other remote NTP servers (with a precise clock) are available. the lowest stratum). The following modes of operation are supported: • • Client Only mode. and distributing it further to the NEs in the internal network.e. The NE will operate as an NTP client.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

or if the remote NTP server is not reachable via the DCN. This means that packets have been sent to the remote peer.. the NE does not listen on UDP port 123. while a falseticker is a clock that does not User Manual 281 . It may be normal for this system peer selection to change over time. This will for example appear if the IP address of a host without NTP server capabilities was entered.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs When time synchronization via NTP is enabled. the NE listens on UDP port 123 (regardless of whether the NE is configured in Client Only. This means that the remote NTP server has been discarded as invalid by the sanity test algorithm (for example because the remote NTP server is sending packets with an invalid header or stratum). especially if multiple remote NTP servers are of similar quality. UDP port 123 will appear “open” to port scanning applications when use of NTP is enabled. and the time-out to receive packets in response has not been exceeded yet. A truechimer is a clock that maintains timekeeping accuracy to a previously published (and trusted) standard. When NTP is not enabled. This system peer selection takes place even if the local NE is operating in Client Only mode. This means that in Relay mode the local NTP server will inherit system statistics from this remote NTP server to pass along to any dependent NTP client. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential False Ticker1 Candidate System Peer PS 1. This means that the remote NTP server has not been retained by the Clock Select Algorithm as a truechimer. This means that the remote NTP server has been retained by the Clock Cluster Algorithm and its clock info is used by the Combine Algorithm to calculate corrections to the local clock. Server Only or Relay mode). This means that the remote NTP server is selected as the system peer (there can be only 1 system peer at any given time). Note The synchronization status for remote NTP servers is described in Table 9. Status Message In Progress Discarded FSP 3000R7 R10. Table 9: No Data Remote NTP Server Synchronization Status Description This means that no contact whatsoever has been established with the remote peer.

• • Requirements • FSP 3000R7 R10. The following sections are provided: “How to Configure an NE for Client-Only or Relay Mode” on p. For an NE operating as an NTP client. 286 “How to Check NE to Remote NTP Server Connectivity” on p. Collect all performance records and store them in a safe place before following this procedure. another NE which is operating as an NTP server can be configured as (one of the) remote NTP servers. This involves ensuring that at least one remote NTP server that is reachable for the NE is configured correctly and enabled. it is suggested that you retrieve your performance record history from the NE. 289 How to Configure an NE for Client-Only or Relay Mode This instruction describes the following aspects of NTP configuration: • How to configure an NE to operate in Client-only mode or in Relay mode.3 80000014705 Issue: B. You must be logged on with a user account which has ADMIN privileges. • • 282 User Manual . You must know the IP addresses of the remote NTP servers that shall be used. Use the FSP 3000R7 Element Manager or the Network Manager to collect performance records.Configuring Date and Time This section describes how to configure the use of NTP on an NE. time. time zone. 288 “How to Disable Time Synchronization with NTP” on p. How to check that the NE can reach the configured remote NTP server(s) How to check the status of synchronization with a remote NTP server. or NTP configuration in an already operating system. The procedures apply to both first-time configuration and later changes. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Before making changes to the date. 282 “How to Configure an NE for Server-Only Mode” on p.

This column shows which IP address the NE uses in the source field of the IP header when communicating with the remote NTP server. FSP 3000R7 R10. From the Main Menu. select Configuration->Date and Time.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the NE in the Managed Elements pane. For each listed remote NTP server the following information is displayed: Note Field Name IP Address Own IP Admin State Synchronization State PS Description This column lists the IP addresses of the configured remote NTP servers. Up to three remote NTP servers can be configured. User Manual 283 . This column shows whether the remote NTP server is enabled (Admin State = IS) or not. Neither does the order in the list of configured remote NTP servers imply any such priority. In response the Date and Time window appears. The NTP protocol contains multiple mechanisms for an NTP client to automatically determine which NTP servers provide the best quality time information. The options are shown in Table 9. This column shows the status of the last synchronization with the remote NTP server. Overruling this automatic prioritization is not supported on the Element Manager. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 3 Check in the NTP Servers list whether the correct NTP servers have already been configured.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

Configuring Date and Time

Step 4

If the required remote NTP servers are in the list, go to Step 8. If the required remote NTP server has not been configured, or has been configured but not enabled, take appropriate action.

To: add a new remote NTP server delete an existing remote NTP server enable an existing remote NTP server Step 5

Then: Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7

If relevant, add another remote NTP server by selecting Add. It is not possible to add another remote NTP server if three servers already have been configured. You must then delete a remote NTP server from the list first (see Step 6).

Enter the following settings for the new remote NTP server: a) Enter the IP address for the remote NTP server in the IP Address field. b) When the NE communicates with the NTP server, it identifies itself with its IP address. In a bi-directional IP communication the two IP hosts involved need to be able to reach each other. Because both IP hosts identify each other by the IP addresses in the IP header of the IP packets, a successful IP communication relies on the availability of routes for these IP addresses in all the routers along the path between the IP hosts. Some network operators may configure their network in such a way that only the IP range in which the System IP addresses reside will be routed through their network. In this case it must be made sure that the NE uses the System IP to identify itself as the source in the IP header of packets it is sending. If the network operator has configured his network to route the IP range in which the IP addresses of the physical IP interfaces reside, the default IP address as chosen by the IP stack can be used. Use the Own IP drop-down list to specify the IP address to use in the IP header as follows: • Select Default-IP if the IP address that the IP stack would choose by default should be used (this is the IP address of the interface through which the packet is sent) • Select System IP if the system IP address should be used
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

284

User Manual

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs

c) The new remote NTP server is enabled for use by default. This can be seen by the entry In Service in the Admin State field. The remote NTP server will not be used for synchronization unless it is In Service. d) Select OK to apply your entries, or Cancel to cancel them. In response to OK, the new remote NTP server will be displayed in the NTP servers list in the Date and Time window. e) Check that the NE can reach this remote NTP server, see “How to Check NE to Remote NTP Server Connectivity” on p. 288. f) Step 6 Go to Step 8. If relevant, delete an already configured remote NTP server. Do as follows: a) Select the remote NTP server in the NTP Servers list in the Date andTime window. b) Disable the remote NTP server by setting the administrative state to Disabled. This setting is available when you select the Modify button in the NTP Servers list.

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

c) Delete the remote NTP server with the Delete button in the Date and Time window. You will be requested to confirm the deletion. d) Check that the deleted remote NTP server no longer is displayed in the NTP servers list in the Date and Time window. e) Go to Step 4. Step 7 If relevant, enable an already configured remote NTP server. Do as follows: a) Select the remote NTP server in the NTP list in the Date and Time window. b) Enable the remote NTP server by setting the Admin State to In Service. This setting is available when you select the Modify button in the NTP Servers list.

c) Select Check NTP Server(s) to check that the NE can reach this remote NTP server (see also “How to Check NE to Remote NTP Server Connectivity” on p. 288).

User Manual

285

Configuring Date and Time

Step 8

If the NTP Service Mode field is not already set to Client Only or Relay, do as follows: a) Select Modify from the Time Settings section. In response the Modify window appears. b) Change the NTP Service Mode field to Client Only or Relay. c) Select OK to apply the change.

Step 9 Step 10 Step 11

Look in the NTP Servers list and ensure that the NTP synchronization status is satisfactory (this may take a while). Set the time zone for this NE as described in “How to Manually Set the Date, Time, and Time Zone” on p. 278. Close the Date and Time window.

End of Procedure

How to Configure an NE for Server-Only Mode
This instruction describes how to configure an NE to operate in Server-only mode. In this mode the NE receives its time information from the local hardware clock. Date, time, and time zone must therefore be set manually for this NE.
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Requirements
• Before making changes to the date, time, time zone, or NTP configuration in an already operating system, it is suggested that you retrieve your performance record history from the NE. Collect all performance records and store them in a safe place before following this procedure. Use the FSP 3000R7 Element Manager or the Network Manager to collect performance records. You must be logged on with a user account which has ADMIN privileges.

286

User Manual

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs

Procedure
Step 1 Step 2 Select the NE in the Managed Elements pane. From the Main Menu, select Configuration->Date and Time. In response the Date and Time window appears.

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Step 3

Set the NTP Service Mode field to NTP Disabled, do as follows: a) Select Modify from the Time Settings section. In response the Modify window appears.

b) Change the NTP Service Mode field to NTP Disabled. c) Select OK to apply the change,or Cancel to cancel it. Step 4 Set the date, time, and time zone for this NE manually as described in “How to Manually Set the Date, Time, and Time Zone” on p. 278.

User Manual

287

Configuring Date and Time

Step 5

Set the NTP Service Mode field to NTP Disabled, do as follows: a) Select Modify from the Time Settings section. In response the Modify window appears.

b) Change the NTP Service Mode field to Server Only. c) Select OK to apply the change,or Cancel to cancel it. Step 6 Close the Date and Time window.

End of Procedure

How to Check NE to Remote NTP Server Connectivity
This instruction describes how to check that the NE can reach the remote NTP servers that have been configured. It also describes how to find information about the synchronization status for each configure remote NTP server.

Requirements
• You must be logged on with a user account which has ADMIN privileges.

Procedure
Step 1 Step 2 Select the NE in the Managed Elements pane. From the Main Menu, select Configuration->Date and Time. In response the Date and Time window appears.

288

User Manual

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs

Step 3

In the NTP Servers list, select the remote NTP servers that you want to check whether the NE can reach. You can select a single server or mulitple servers. Select Check NTP Server(s). In response the check begins. The status of the ongoing checking process as well as the result of it is displayed in the Last Check Status column of the NTP Servers list. Read the result of the check in the Last Check Status column of the
NTP Servers list.

Step 4 Step 5 Step 6

This column shows the status of the last check of NE to remote NTP server connectivity. The possible values are: In Progress, Success, Failure, and Idle. Idle indicates that no check has been done since the last reboot of the NE. Step 7 Close the Date and Time window.

End of Procedure

How to Disable Time Synchronization with NTP
This instruction describes how to disable time synchronization with NTP.
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Features such as scheduled equalization of ROADMs can not take place unless NTP synchronization is configured and enabled for the NE.

Requirements
• Before making changes to the date, time, time zone, or NTP configuration in an already operating system, it is suggested that you retrieve your performance record history from the NE. Collect all performance records and store them in a safe place before following this procedure. Use the FSP 3000R7 Element Manager or the Network Manager to collect performance records. You must be logged on with a user account which has ADMIN privileges.

User Manual

289

Configuring Remote Syslog Servers

Procedure
Step 1 Step 2 Select the NE in the Managed Elements pane. From the Main Menu, select Configuration->Date and Time. In response the Date and Time window appears.

Step 3

Select Modify from the Time Settings section. In response the Modify window appears.

Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7

Change the NTP Service Mode field to NTP Disabled. Select OK to apply the change, or Cancel to cancel it. If relevant, adjust the current date, time, and time zone as described in “How to Manually Set the Date, Time, and Time Zone” on p. 278. Close the Date and Time window.

End of Procedure

Configuring Remote Syslog Servers
Syslog is a protocol that allows one system to send event notification messages to another system that stores them. The system that stores them is known as a syslog server, or daemon. The following characterizes the support of syslog in the FSP3000R7:

290

User Manual

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs

Syslog messages are transported in UDP (User Datagram Protocol) segments encapsulated in IP (Internet Protocol) packets, and are received on UDP port 514 of the server. Syslog over TLS is not supported. Up to three remote syslog servers (to which the NE will send syslog messages) can be configured. All events listed in the Event Log will also be sent to remote syslog servers, if any are configured, with the exception of events with severity Not Reported. Optionally database change messages may be excepted as well, this is configurable per syslog server.

• •

It is possible to add, delete, enable and disable remote syslog servers. It is also possible to enable or disable sending of database change messages to a remote syslog server. It is not possible to modify the IP address of a configured syslog server. Instead the syslog destination must be deleted and a new one added. The syslog protocol features are located in Syslog tab of the NE information window.

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

This table provides the following information: Field Name IP Address Syslog Description This column lists the IP addresses of the remote syslog server. This column shows whether sending of syslog messages to the remote syslog server is enabled or not This column shows whether database change messages will be sent to the remote syslog server or not.

DB Change events

User Manual

291

Configuring Remote Syslog Servers

You must be logged in with an user account with ADMIN privilege rights (see “Handling Network Element User Accounts” on p. 214) to configure remote syslog servers. The following sections are provided: “How to Add a Remote Syslog Server” on p. 292 “How to Edit a Remote Syslog Server” on p. 293 “How to Delete a Remote Syslog Server” on p. 294

How to Add a Remote Syslog Server
This procedure describes how to add a new syslog destination.

Note

Procedure
Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE from the Entities pane hierarchical list. In response, the table of configured remote syslog servers is displayed.
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Step 3

Step 4

PS

A maximum of 3 remote syslog servers may be configured.

In the Parameter pane, select the Syslog tab.

Select Add. In response, the Add Syslog entry window appears.

Enter the IP address of the remote syslog server into the IP Address field. Ensure that you entered the correct IP address. You cannot modify the IP address after you have applied your entries.

292

User Manual

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs

Step 5

When you add a new remote syslog destination, sending of syslog messages to it is enabled by default. This is indicated by the entry Enable in the Syslog field. Enable or disable whether logged database changes should also be sent to the remote syslog server by using the DB Change events drop-down list. Select Enable to send these messages. Select OK to save settings or Cancel to discard these changes. The new remote syslog server is displayed in the list.

Step 6

Step 7

End of Procedure

How to Edit a Remote Syslog Server
It is only possible to edit the IP address of a remote syslog server by deleting the entry and creating a new one. This procedure describes how to enable or disable a remote syslog server and how to enable or disable sending of database change messages to a remote syslog server.

Procedure
Step 1
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Select the relevant NE from the Entities pane hierarchical list. In the Parameter pane, select the Syslog tab. In response, the table of configured remote syslog servers is displayed.

Step 2

Step 3 Step 4

Select the relevant remote syslog server to edit. Select Modify. In response, the Modify Syslog entry window appears.

Step 5

Enable or disable this remote syslog server by using the Syslog drop-down list.

User Manual

293

or Cancel to stop it. select Refresh to update it. In response. the table of configured syslog server is displayed. In response. Step 7 Step 8 End of Procedure How to Delete a Remote Syslog Server This procedure describes how to delete an existing remote syslog server from the Syslog Destination IP Table.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Configuring Remote Syslog Servers Step 6 Enable or disable whether logged database changes should also be sent to the remote syslog server by using the DB Change events drop-down list. Select OK to save any changes or Cancel to discard them. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . a warning window appears. End of Procedure 294 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Select Enable to send these messages. Step 3 Step 4 Select the relevant remote syslog server to delete. Select Delete. select the Syslog tab. If the syslog table does not immediately display your changes. If the syslog table does not immediately display your changes. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE from the Entities pane hierarchical list. In the Parameter pane. Step 5 Step 6 Select OK to confirm the deletion. select Refresh to update it.

during each scheduled equalization interval. If it is not. All scheduled equalizations are based on UTC. Scheduled equalization is specified on a network basis. At maximum. when hardware allows. and ROADM-C80/0/OPM modules support scheduled equalization. at the same moment in time. along the channel path. see “How to Add a Remote Syslog Server” on p. Adjustments occur incrementally. all nodes should use one or more third-party NTP servers as their common server. For more information about operating NTP on a node in client or relay mode. thus all NEs in the network must be scheduled for equalization at the same time. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential If all nodes in the network are not in the same time zone. The scheduled equalization process performs adjustments. the scheduled equalization process stops. from the network input to the network output. and the alarm clears. for all nodes in the network. As soon as NTP synchronization is achieved. 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM. the system displays the local NE time automatically. one node should be set to server-only mode. see “Synchronizing NE time via NTP” on p. Requirements Observe these rules when setting the parameters for a scheduled equalization: • Network Time Protocol (NTP) must be enabled in server. Scheduled equalization is intended to correct slow.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs How To Configure Scheduled Equalization The 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM. If NTP is not enabled on a ROADM node. you must take this into consideration to schedule equalization at the same date and time.3 dB) and less than or equal to the scheduled equalization limit (3. and an alarm condition is raised. Scheduled equalization adjusts channel optical power towards the set point when the power level is greater than or equal to the tolerance limit (0. Scheduled equalization must be completed within 41 minutes. 280. Alternatively. Once a UTC time value is entered. and all other nodes should point to this node as their remote NTP server. time-varying optical power changes in wavelengths that result from a number of conditions. If the NE is operating as an NTP client or relay. and an alarm condition is raised. Scheduled equalization attempts to keep channel power at the set point. which can be different from the Element Manager’s time zone. For more information about enabling NTP on a node. and interval. Note PS FSP 3000R7 R10. Multiple scheduled equalization intervals may be required to compensate for larger channel power changes. client. The date and time you define in the schedule are in the NE’s time zone.3 80000014705 Issue: B. as required. scheduled equalization restarts. in 0. Scheduled equalization ensures that the equalization is performed consistently. the scheduled equalization process stops. Scheduled equalization start time and interval must be the same for all nodes in the network.0 dB) from the set point. • • User Manual 295 . 292. date. that NE must be synchronized with at least one remote NTP server.3 dB steps. The designated scheduled equalization start time is based on coordinated universal time (UTC). or relay modes on all ROADM nodes in the network.

Step 3 Select Modify. Select the Equalization tab in the Parameters pane. The options are: • 5-MIN: Every 5 minutes (Not recommended. Step 4 Enable use of scheduled equalization by setting the Schedule EQLZ Admin drop-down list to Enabled. This setting must be equal for all network elements in the network. This setting does not take effect until you later apply the settings. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Setting the Schedule EQLZ Admin field to Disabled disables scheduled equalization for the whole network element and consequently also disables scheduled equalization for virtual channels that have Schedule EQLZ Admin set to Enabled. using the Schedule EQLZ Interval drop-down list. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Step 5 Specify the interval between each scheduled equalization. In response the Modify window will appear.) • 2-HR: Every 2 hours • 4-HR: Every 4 hours • 12-HR: Every 12 hours • 1-DAY: Every 24 hours • 7-DAY: Every week 296 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.How To Configure Scheduled Equalization Follow this instruction to setup and activate scheduled equalization on an NE with a ROADM module.

Step 7 Enter the start time for the initiating equalization into the EQLZ Start Time field using the format hh:mm:ss. and line-amplifiers between network elements. month and day (YY-MM-DD). using the EQLZ Start Date drop-down list. on a span basis. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Span equalization automates the gain provisioning of variable gain pre-amplifiers. All NEs in the network must be scheduled to equalize at the same time. dynamic span equalization adds the ability to constantly monitor the span loss in an operational network and dynamically compensate for span loss drift. By default.3 80000014705 Issue: B. PS Automatic span equalization applies only to C-band amplifiers. The time must be according to universal coordinated time (UTC). by adjusting the gains of the appropriate amplifiers. boosters.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 6 Enter the start date for initiating equalization. minutes and seconds (HH:MM:SS). at the time of 03-00-00. End of Procedure Configuring Span Equalization FSP 3000R7 R10. or Cancel to discard them. Step 8 Select OK to apply your settings. Use the format hours. User Manual 297 . but must be according to universal coordinated time (UTC). a span begins at the output of a booster amplifier at a node and ends at the output of the pre-amplifier or line-amplifier of the adjacent downstream node. Span equalization itself has three primary functions: • • • Setting the gain of qualified EDFA amplifier modules automatically during initial network commissioning Adjusting the gain of qualified EDFA amplifier modules automatically when a fiber is cut and re-spliced Adjusting the gain of a replacement qualified EDFA amplifier module automatically In addition to the three primary functions. All NEs in the network must be scheduled to equalize at the same time. The date you enter must not be according to local time. Use the format year. equalization is scheduled on all nodes to begin on the date of 08-01-01. Note In general terms. Span equalization and ROADM channel power equalization automatically perform overall network equalization and simplify the management of complex optical networks.

• • • Configuration Procedures This section describes how to turn-up span equalization for two example linear networks.3 80000014705 Issue: B. • Span Equalization Limitations • Span equalization does not set the gain of Raman amplifiers in a node. In network spans containing Raman amplifier modules. 299 “How to Provision Span Equalization in an Existing Network” on p. perform an explicit equalization request to adjust the gain on the far-end pre-amplifier module at the end of the span. the attenuation between the booster amplifier and the Raman amplifier could be altered when a fiber between a booster amplifier module and a Raman amplifier is replaced. The following sections are provided: • • “How to Provision Span Equalization in a New Network” on p. and limitations. or the booster amplifier module is replaced. An EDFA module booster amplifier must be associated with every transmit network interface. functionality. Span equalization does not support networks with VSM or RSM modules protecting the network interfaces.Configuring Span Equalization Span Equalization Requirements Span equalization requires these conditions to operate in a network: • • An optical supervisory channel (OSC) must be enabled on each span between every node. refer to the FSP 3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual. 353. accounting for the Raman amplifier gain. please refer to the Note FSP 3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual. 301 298 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. span equalization provisions the gain setting of qualified EDFA amplifier modules. For a more detailed description of span equalization operational principles. In addition the section contains supporting procedures for the central sub-tasks required during this turn-up. Span equalization does not operate on nodes that contain more than one pre-amplifier on a span. The procedures in this section support the use of the Element Manager to provision span equalization. These procedures are designed to complement the procedures described in the FSP 3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual. For more information about entering cable connections into the database. All cable connections to the EDFA modules must be represented in each node database by valid PTP connections (fibermap representations) in the PTP & Physical Connections Table. After a Raman amplifier has been installed and successfully provisioned. see “Managing Cables in the Internal Database” on p. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential PS . For instructions on how to perform an explicit equalization request. In the event of such an attenuation change.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential X P D R Link 1-2 Link 2-3 Link 3-4 X P D R PPC /OPT PPC/OPT PPC/OPT This example assumes these conditions: • • The network is a new. the goal is to establish a service from Node 1 to Node 4. An optical supervisory channel (OSC) service is active between nodes. 303 “How to View the List of Qualified EDFAs” on p. 308 “How to Change Qualified EDFA Set Point and PPC” on p. 314 “How to Enable/Disable Dynamic Equalization” on p. Figure 20: Terminal Node 1 SetPoint C1 Span Equalization Linear Network Example: New Network Through Node 2 PPC D1 A2 Line amp Node 3 SetPoint C2 Terminal Node 4 PPC A4 B4 B3 PPC B2 PPC D2 A3 PPC 1. User Manual 299 . All FOADM or ROADM connections for service between Node 1 and Node 4 have been manually and correctly entered. For more information about how to provision amplifier gain settings. FOADM Booster Line-amp Pre-amp 1. 305 “How to View Span Equalization Status. • • • For this example. refer to the FSP 3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual. ROADM 2. or greenfield.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs • • • • • • • • “How to Initiate Equalization” on p. ROADM 2. equipment installation in which all cables are properly connected. 306 “How to Configure Span Equalization Options” on p. but with no services established other than the OSC.3 80000014705 Issue: B. All EDFA amplifier modules are out of service without power applied. four-node linear network. FOADM Booster Pre-amp 1. and Configuration” on p. ROADM 2. 309 “How to Change Qualified EDFA Gain” on p. FOADM FSP 3000R7 R10. All physical cable connections are represented in the database by valid PTP (fibermap) connections in the Physical Terminations window and in the Physical Connections List. Alarms. 315 How to Provision Span Equalization in a New Network The first example demonstrates a greenfield. 311 “How to Change Qualified EDFA Administrative State” on p.

308. On Node 1. See “How to Change Qualified EDFA Administrative State” on p. output power per channel. b) Check that the expected EDFA modules have been qualified. set the administrative state of the qualified pre-amplifier EDFA optical transmit port to In Service. On Node 1. See “How to Change Qualified EDFA Set Point and PPC” on p. Do as follows: a) Configure span equalization to Qualify Only as described in “How to Configure Span Equalization Options” on p. 314 for guidance. In response the optical power received (OPR) value at the Node 2 pre-amplifier is retrieved.3 80000014705 Issue: B. trigger the EDFA module qualification process. After a qualified EDFA module is placed in service. 309 or “How to Change Qualified EDFA Gain” on p. The gain is now set. set the administrative state of the network port of the channel module (marked XPDR in Figure 20) to In Service.Configuring Span Equalization Procedure Step 1 For each node in Figure 20. Changes to the gain should therefore be performed at this point. If your network plan requires other settings than the default settings on the EDFAs for set point. if required. Step 2 For each node in Figure 20. however a change to the GainCal offset parameter could disrupt the service. as described in “How to View the List of Qualified EDFAs” on p. Step 6 On Node 2. The gain can be changed while the EDFA module is in service. then change these as relevant for Nodes 1 through 4. 260 for guidance. In response automatic span equalization sets the gain of the Node 1 booster amplifier and begins transmitting valid output power per channel (PPC) and optical power transmitted (OPT) values to Node 2 through the OSC. enable the gain calculation process by configuring span equalization to mode Enable Calculate Gain as described in “How to Configure Span Equalization Options” on p. set the administrative state of the qualified booster EDFA optical transmit port to In Service. and automatic span equalization calculates the gain setting for the Node 2 pre-amplifier based on validated PPC and OPT messages and OPR measurements. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential PS . no further changes to the set point and PPC values are allowed. 314 for guidance. 311 for guidance. See “How to Change Qualified EDFA Administrative State” on p. Step 3 Note Step 4 Step 5 300 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. 308. 305. and GainCal offset value gain settings. See “How to Change the Administrative State” on p.

3 80000014705 Issue: B. and automatic span equalization calculates the gain setting for the Node 4 pre-amplifier module based on validated PPC and OPT messages and OPR measurements. and the booster amplifier begins to send valid PPC and OPT values to the Node 3 line-amplifier module through the OSC. and the module begins to send valid PPC and OPT messages to Node 4 through the OSC. End of Procedure How to Provision Span Equalization in an Existing Network The second example demonstrates an existing. User Manual 301 . See “How to Change Qualified EDFA Administrative State” on p. four-node linear network. In response. FSP 3000R7 R10. 314 for guidance. Step 9 On Node 4. 314 for guidance. In response automatic span equalization sets the gain of the Node 2 booster amplifier module. set the administrative state of the qualified booster EDFA optical transmit port to In Service. OPR values at the Node 3 line-amplifier module are retrieved. set the administrative state of the qualified pre-amplifier EDFA optical transmit port to In Service. This procedure should only be performed during a maintenance window. set the administrative state of the qualified line-amplifier EDFA optical transmit port to In Service. The Node 4 pre-amplifier module gain is now set. and light is received by the Node 4 transponder input. In response. The Node 3 line-amplifier module gain is now set. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 10 Place all qualified EDFA amplifier modules in the network in service. See “How to Change Qualified EDFA Administrative State” on p. Step 8 On Node 3.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 7 On Node 2. and automatic span equalization calculates the Node 3 line-amplifier module gain value based on validated PPC and OPT messages and OPR measurements. See “How to Change Qualified EDFA Administrative State” on p. OPR values at the Node 4 pre-amplifier module are retrieved. or brownfield. 314 for guidance. NOTICE Performing this procedure could cause service interruptions in your network.

FSP 3000R7 R10. as described in “How to View the List of Qualified EDFAs” on p. the goal is to enable span equalization for all nodes in the existing network. do as described in Step 3 • For a ROADM node. b) Check that the expected EDFA modules have been qualified. All qualified EDFA amplifier modules are in service and not in LOS condition. take precautions to ensure that all in service amplifier module gain settings have been set properly. trigger the EDFA amplifier module qualification process. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential • • • For this example. ROADM 2. An EDFA amplifier module can be in service but not be in an LOS condition due to excessive amplified spontaneous emission (ASE) noise at the network input with node channels present. or brownfield. ROADM 2. do as described in Step 4 PS 302 User Manual . FOADM Booster Pre-amp 1. FOADM Booster Line-amp Pre-amp 1. Before selecting the Enable Adopt Gain option. Do as follows: a) Configure span equalization to Qualify Only as described in “How to Configure Span Equalization Options” on p. Step 2 For each node in Figure 21 enable span equalization as follows: • For a FOADM or line-amplifier node. All ROADM virtual channels (VCHs) are established. 308. ROADM 2. 305. An optical supervisory channel (OSC) service is active between nodes. equipment installation in which all cables are properly connected. FOADM X P D R Link 1-2 Link 2-3 Link 3-4 X P D R PPC /OPT PPC/OPT PPC/OPT This example assumes these conditions: • • The network is an existing. All physical cable connections are represented in the database by valid PTP (fibermap) connections in the Physical Terminations window and in the Physical Connections List.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Note Procedure Step 1 For each node in Figure 21.Configuring Span Equalization Figure 21: Terminal Node 1 Span Equalization Linear Network Example: Existing Network Through Node 2 SetPoint C1 Line amp Node 3 SetPoint C2 Terminal Node 4 PPC A4 B4 B3 PPC D1 A2 PPC B2 PPC D2 A3 PPC 1.

3 80000014705 Issue: B. For more information about NCU software actions when using Enable Adopt Gain mode on a FOADM or line-amplifier node. with the cross-connection Admin State set to In Service. For more information about using OSAs to measure optical power levels. For more information about NCU software actions when using Enable Adopt Gain mode on a ROADM node. the user can initiate equalization. refer to the FSP 3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 3 Enter manually the set point and PPC values for the FOADM node as follows: a) For each qualified booster-amplifier EDFA on the node. c) For each qualified pre-amplifier and line-amplifier EDFA on the node. End of Procedure How to Initiate Equalization For ROADM devices. the equalization operation only has a physical effect on the wavelengths (channels) that are currently supporting cross-connections. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential e) Adopt existing gain settings for the qualified EDFAs by configuring span equalization to Enable Adopt Gain as described in “How to Configure Span Equalization Options” on p. enter the measured average channel power level into the Power per channel field as described in “How to Change Qualified EDFA Set Point and PPC” on p. A user-initiated equalization is never denied. 308. refer to the FSP 3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual. This procedure only describes how to use the Element Manager to start the actual initiation. b) For each qualified booster-amplifier EDFA on the node enter the measured average channel power level into the Power per channel field as described in “How to Change Qualified EDFA Set Point and PPC” on p. as long as the requested ROADM device is equipped. There are several requirements before initiating equalization. User Manual 303 . 308. 309. connect an OSA to the output tap ports to determine the average channel power levels. 309. refer to the “Measuring and Leveling of the Network Line” section of the FSP 3000R7 Installation and Commissioning Man- ual. FSP 3000R7 R10. The NCU software computes the set point value for each booster amplifier module. Step 4 Adopt existing gain settings for the qualified EDFAs by configuring span equalization to Enable Adopt Gain as described in “How to Configure Span Equalization Options” on p. However. connect an optical spectrum analyzer (OSA) to the output tap ports to determine the average channel power levels. d) For each qualified pre-amplifier and line-amplifier EDFA on the node.

including requirements and restrictions. select an OM entity. or Cancel to reject it. • For a global wavelength equalization. Select the Operation tab. see the FSP 3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual. or the VCH-1-6-N3 OCH entity for the 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM or ROADM-C80/0/OPM module. 358. Select OK to apply your change. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential PS . In response. the OM-19-N OM entity for the ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU/2DC shelf. Select Modify. Do as follows: • If the channel module supports turning off ALS. view cross-connections for the SHELF X EROADM-DC. Turning off ALS or setting the laser to “Forced on” ensures that light is present during equalization. • If the channel module supports forcing the laser on. the VCH-19-N3 OCH entity for the ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU/2DC shelf.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 7 Step 8 Select Operate from the Initiate Equalization drop-down list. • For an individual wavelength equalization: select a VCH entity. An individual wavelength power equalization request on a 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM or 8ROADM-C80/0/OPM module results in global power level equalization for all virtual channels on the module network port. In response. force the laser on as described in “How to Force a Laser On” on p. For example. Select the relevant ROADM entity in the Entities pane.Configuring Span Equalization For the full procedure. turn off ALS as described in “How to Set the Automatic Laser Shutdown Mode” on p. • To equalize the ROADM shelf (ROADM-C40/40/OPM-3HU/2DC). 166. Note Procedure Step 1 Identify the channel module that is cross-connected to the ROADM device as described in “How to View ADM and ROADM Cross Connections” on p. the Modify window appears. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 304 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. For example. equalization is initialized. Select this channel module that is cross-connected to the relevant ROADM device in the Entities pane. 360. Ensure that light is present during equalization. • To equalize ROADM modules (8ROADM-C40/0/OPM or ROADM-C80/0/OPM). or the OM-1-6-N OM entity for the 8ROADM-C40/0/OPM or ROADM-C80/0/OPM module. view cross-connections for the the MOD-x-y [8]ROADM-C[40/80].

Procedure Step 1 Right-click the NE in the Managed Elements pane. you can use the yellow arrows to browse the list. In response the Span Equalization window appears. FSP 3000R7 R10. Booster-Amp. or Line-Amp.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Displays whether the qualified EDFA has been configured as Pre-Amp. right corner of the list.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 9 If the network contains a ROADM-C40/40/2-3HU-2DC shelf: you may turn the ALS back on or remove the Forced On setting for the channel module lasers after the equalization is complete. Setpoint Step 2 The number of qualified EDFA modules is displayed under the lower. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The following information is displayed for each qualified EDFA: Column Name AID OL-AID Equipment Qualified Description Displays the AID of the qualified EDFA. End of Procedure How to View the List of Qualified EDFAs This section describes how to view the list of EDFA modules that have been qualified for span equalization at a NE. If the list of qualified EDFAmodules is long. Displays the AID of the optical line entity which is associated with the qualified EDFA. User Manual 305 . Displays the input per-channel optical power to a booster amplifier. and select Span Equalization from the context-sensitive menu that appears. Displays the EDFA equipment type.

as well as far-end qualified EDFA settings. The current setting for the output power per channel for the qualified EDFA. not in the Parameter pane like the rest of the EDFA module related information. and looks similar to the Parameter pane content. and Configuration When an EDFA module has been qualified for span equalization. • • • The State tab shows the administrative state and the operational state for the selected qualified EDFA. booster-amplifier. The current setting for the optical set point for the qualified EDFA. The Info tab shows measurements for both the near-end qualified EDFA power (this EDFA) and far-end qualified EDFA power.Configuring Span Equalization Step 3 Select Close to close the Span Equalization window. The current setting for the gain calibration offset for the qualified EDFA. Alarms. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Whether the qualified was found to be configured as a pre-amplifier. Standard tabs are provided for each information type. the span equalization related properties for the EDFA module are displayed in the Span Equalization window. The Fault tab only shows faults related to span equalization on the selected qualified EDFA. The current calculated gain for the qualified EDFA. The Config tab shows the following information o o o o o • • The Operation tab shows whether manually triggered gain calibration is ongoing or not. or line-amplifier. End of Procedure How to View Span Equalization Status. .3 80000014705 Issue: B. The span equalization related information is presented in the Parameters section of the Span Equalization window. 306 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.

User Manual 307 . Procedure Step 1 Right-click the NE in the Managed Elements pane. FSP 3000R7 R10. Expand the Parameters section by clicking the + symbol.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response the Span Equalization window content is updated. and select Span Equalization from the context-sensitive menu that appears.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs This instruction describes how to view all parameters which are related to span equalization for a qualified EDFA module. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 2 Step 3 Select the qualified EDFA in the list. In response the Span Equalization window appears. Step 4 Select the relevant tab in the Parameters section in order to view the span equalization parameters for this qualified amplifier.

While operating in this mode. 298 308 User Manual . Note PS • Qualify Only: The NCU software queries the node database PTP and PhysiFSP 3000R7 R10. While operating in Enable Gain Adopt mode. When in Disabled mode. span equalization automatically calculates and sets the initial gain values for all qualified EDFA amplifier modules at a node after an LOS condition clears. This instruction describes how to use the Element Manager to enable span equalization options for an EDFA module. or greenfield. The query action of the Qualify Only option is the first step towards enabling automatic span equalization. span equalization only re-calculates the gain of an EDFA pre-amplifier or line-amplifier module when an LOS transition is detected and has cleared. span equalization only recalculates the gain of an EDFA pre-amplifier or line-amplifier module when an LOS transition is detected and has cleared. Enable Gain Adopt mode is used primarily in existing. calculates the values of the control parameters based on the gain settings of the qualified amplifier modules. End of Procedure How to Configure Span Equalization Options Enabling of span equalization options should only be done in conjunction with following the Provisioning and Operations Manual procedure to turn up span equalization for a network. Enable Calculate Gain is utilized primarily in new. networks. or brownfield.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential cal Connections list to determine which EDFA amplifier modules qualify for span equalization adoption. • Enable Calculate Gain: By using a combination of parameters described in detail in the FSP 3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual. • Enable Gain Adopt: Span equalization adopts the current gain settings for all qualified EDFA amplifier modules at a node. or upon an explicit request. all qualified EDFA amplifier module PPC and set point values are reset to default values. for either Enable Calculate Gain or Enable Gain Adopt modes. The NCU software makes no changes to the gain settings for these amplifier modules when operating in Qualify Only mode.Configuring Span Equalization Step 5 Select Close to close the Span Equalization window. These are the span equalization operational mode provisioning options and which effect they have: • Disabled: Gain settings must be provisioned manually for all EDFA amplifier modules in the network. Requirements See “Span Equalization Requirements” on p. or upon an explicit request. networks. and stores those values persistently in the NCU database.

In response the Span Equalization window appears. select Disable.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Procedure Step 1 Right-click each node in the Managed Elements pane. User Manual 309 . Step 2 Select Modify. select Enable Adopt Gain. • To trigger the automatic span equalization and adopt current gain values. • To disable automatic span equalization. select Enable Calculate Gain. Select OK to apply your change. Requirements The qualified EDFA must have administrative state Maintenance. or Cancel to reject it. select Qualify Only. In response the Modify window appears. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 4 Step 5 End of Procedure How to Change Qualified EDFA Set Point and PPC This instruction describes how to change the set point or the output power per channel (PPC) for a qualified EDFA. • To trigger the automatic span equalization without adopting current gain values. and select Span Equalization from the context-sensitive menu that appears. Changing the set point and PPC for a qualified EDFA should only be done in conjunction with following the Provisioning and Operations Manual procedure to turn-up span equalization for a network.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 3 Select one of the following options from the SPEQ Configuration field: • To trigger the process of qualifying EDFAs for span equalization in this node. Select Close to close the Span Equalization window. as well as gives guidance on selecting values. The turn-up procedure takes into account restrictions as to when such a change is allowed. FSP 3000R7 R10. The set point parameter is only relevant for booster-amplifier EDFAs.

and select Span Equalization from the context-sensitive menu that appears. 310 User Manual .3 80000014705 Issue: B.Configuring Span Equalization Procedure Step 1 Right-click the NE in the Managed Elements pane. FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 2 Step 3 Select the qualified EDFA to change set point or PPC for. In response the Span Equalization window appears. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential In response the Span Equalization window content is updated. Expand the Parameters section by clicking the + symbol.

If relevant. or Cancel to reject it. select Modify. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential In the Config tab. It is recommended to change gain for a qualified EDFA only in conjunction with following the Provisioning and Operations Manual procedure to turn-up span equalization for a network. Step 5 FSP 3000R7 R10. User Manual 311 . Select Close to close the Span Equalization window. Changing the gain is supported also after the EDFA has been put In Service. In response the Span Equalization window content is updated. The turn-up procedure takes into account restrictions and recommendations as to when such a change is allowed.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Select OK to apply your change.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 4 Select the Config tab in the Parameters section. Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 If relevant. End of Procedure How to Change Qualified EDFA Gain This instruction describes how to change the gain of a qualified EDFA. enter the new value for the optical set point in the Optical Setpoint field. This is relevant to do in order to fine tune the gain. enter the new value for the power per channel in the Power per channel field. but such a change could affect service. In response the Modify window appears.

and select Span Equalization from the context-sensitive menu that appears. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential In response the Span Equalization window content is updated. Expand the Parameters section by clicking the + symbol. 312 User Manual .Configuring Span Equalization Procedure Step 1 Right-click the NE in the Managed Elements pane. Step 2 Step 3 Select the qualified EDFA module in the list. In response the Span Equalization window appears.3 80000014705 Issue: B. FSP 3000R7 R10.

In response the Span Equalization window content is updated. Step 5 FSP 3000R7 R10. Select OK to apply your change. Select Close to close the Span Equalization window. In response the Modify window appears. or Cancel to reject it. Enter the new value for the gain offset in the GainCal Offset field.3 80000014705 Issue: B. select Modify.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 4 Select the Config tab in the Parameters section. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential In the Config tab. Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 End of Procedure User Manual 313 .

3 80000014705 Issue: B. 314 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. In response the Span Equalization window content is updated. Step 2 Step 3 Select the qualified EDFA in the list. and select Span Equalization from the context-sensitive menu that appears.Configuring Span Equalization How to Change Qualified EDFA Administrative State This section describes how to change the administrative state of a qualified EDFA. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Procedure Step 1 Right-click the NE in the Managed Elements pane. In response the Span Equalization window appears. Expand the Parameters section.

this can disrupt traffic. and select Span Equalization from the context-sensitive menu that appears.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 4 Select the Modify button. Select OK to apply your change or Cancel to reject the change. In response the Modify window appears. In response the Span Equalization window appears.3 80000014705 Issue: B. FSP 3000R7 R10. In response the Modify window appears. the NCU dynamically computes a new gain value for pre-amplifier and line-amplifier modules every two seconds and makes automatic adjustments to those gain settings to compensate for span loss drift. Note This instruction describes how to enable dynamic span equalization for an NE. End of Procedure How to Enable/Disable Dynamic Equalization Dynamic span equalization can be enabled separately from the span equalization configuration mode. Step 2 Select Modify. Select Close to close the Span Equalization window. so fast transitions in span loss requires several seconds to complete compensation. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential When dynamic span equalization is enabled. in small increments. These gain adjustments are made slowly. Procedure Step 1 Right-click the NE in the Managed Elements pane. provided span equalization configuration is in either Enable Gain Calculate or Enable Gain Adopt modes. PS User Manual 315 . Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Use the Admin State drop-down list to select the relevant administrative state. either In Service or Maintenance. When the gain setting of an EDFA that is in service is changed.

Select the Config tab in the Parameters pane. A Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) alarm can be raised upon detection of such a mismatch. 317 and “Trace Pane Content for OTN Signals” on p. by using the trace byte. The principle is that an expected trace message is defined for a connection. 317. drop-down list to select Enable or Disable field: Select OK to apply your change. Select Close to close the Span Equalization window. see the FSP3000R7 User Documentation. Expand the Trace section. 318 FSP 3000R7 R10. End of Procedure 316 User Manual . The Trace pane content depends on whether the signals are SDH/ SONET or OTN. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Select the relevant channel entity in the Entity pane. The following topics are provided: “How to View the Trace Messages” on p. or Cancel to reject it. The values and information displayed may vary depending on which channel entity you have selected. may not be correctly connected. For more detailed information about Trace. 316 “How to Configure the Trace Messages” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The receiver checks the message received in the trace byte against the expected message. Raising of the TIM alarm is configurable for each trace message. see “Trace Pane Content for SDH/SONET Signals” on p. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential How to View the Trace Messages This procedure explains how to view the current settings for Trace messages.Viewing and Configuring Trace Messages Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Use the SPEQ Dynamic Comp. TIM Mode etc. End of Procedure Viewing and Configuring Trace Messages Trace is a way to ensure connectivity within a network. The transmitter enters this message in the trace overhead byte when sending. In response the Trace pane appears. A mismatch indicates that the sender and receiver that were supposed to be connected.

Shows the trace message you sent. you must select the Modify button.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Radio buttons to let you select whether you want to view the trace messages in ASCII or hexadecimal format. Field Name Layer TIM Mode FSP 3000R7 R10. To modify any of the field values. you see the fields described below. The option Enabled_AISDisabled indicates that a TIM alarm will be raised if there is a mismatch between the received and expected trace message. Format ASCII and Hex Expected Transmitted Trace Pane Content for OTN Signals User Manual 317 . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Description This drop down list is used to select which layer you want to measure on. Shows the trace message you expect to receive.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Trace Pane Content for SDH/SONET Signals For SDH and SONET signals. but no AIS is raised as a consequent action. Shows the format (64 Byte. 16 Byte or 1 Byte).

Radio buttons to let you select whether you want to view the trace messages in ASCII or hexadecimal format. Select the Config tab in the Parameters pane. Shows the SAPI trace message you received. For OTN. TIM Mode ASCII and Hex SAPI Expected SAPI Tx DAPI Tx OPSP TX SAPI Rx DAPI Rx OPSP Rx How to Configure the Trace Messages This procedure explains how to configure the settings for the trace messages. Expand the Trace section. End of Procedure 318 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. you must select the Modify button. it will be easier to identify errors. The option Enabled_AISDisabled indicates that a TIM alarm will be raised if there is a mismatch between the received and expected trace message. Shows the DAPI (Destination Access Point Identifier) trace message you sent.Viewing and Configuring Trace Messages For OTN signals. DAPI and OPSP are not used. Field Name Layer Description This drop down list is used to select which layer you want to measure on.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 320. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Select the relevant channel entity in the Entity pane. Remember to select layer before you select the Modify button. The fields and options available may vary depending on which channel entity you have selected. If you select a sublayer. go to “Configuring Settings for SDH/SONET Signals” on p. go to “Configuring Settings for OTN Signals” on p. Select the Modify button In response the Modify window appears. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . To modify any of the field values. but no AIS is raised as a consequent action. Shows the OPSP (Operator Specific) trace message you sent. Shows the SAPI trace message you sent. For SDH/SONET. Shows the DAPI trace message you received. 319. Shows the trace message you expect to receive for SAPI (Source Access Point Identifier). Shows the OPSP trace message you received. The Trace compare process is only based on the SAPI. you see the fields described below.

• The 1 byte frame shall contain one of the codes 0-255 for Decimal format. • In the 64 byte frame the last two bytes are carriage return (0x0d) and a line feed (0x0a).831. ASCII. See Step 4 for more information on these values. write the trace message you expect to receive back. 16 Byte or 64 Byte. If you select Enabled_AISDisabled. or successive bytes may be concatenated to contain a longer message.50 characters. • In the 16 byte frame. You can choose 1 Byte.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Configuring Settings for SDH/SONET Signals This procedure explains how to configure the trace message settings for SDH/SONET signals and follows the procedure in “How to Configure the Trace Messages” on p. This particular combination of values must not be used in other places in the message. Hex (hexadecimal) or G. The supported message length depends on the mapping type. This gives you 15 characters to compose your message. Select the code to enter the message in. TIM Mode is disabled. The trace byte may contain a whole message. the first byte should consist of a CRC-7 calculation over the previous frame. or a hexadecimal code for the Hex format. but there will not be sent any Alarm Indication Signal. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 In the Expected field. Procedure FSP 3000R7 R10. 318. and the following 15 bytes transport the Source Access Point Identifier (SAPI). a TIM Alarm will be raised upon detection of a mismatch between Expected and Received message. By default. expressed in T. User Manual 319 .3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 1 In the TIM Mode field. specify whether the TIM Alarm shall be raised upon detection of a mismatch between Expected and Received trace message. The 64 byte format thus gives you 62 characters to compose your message. Select the message format in the Format field.

• Select G. Procedure Step 1 In the TIM Mode field. 318. Select the code for to enter the trace message in: • Select ASCII to write your trace message in clear text. but there will not be sent any Alarm Indication Signal. write the SAPI trace message you expect to receive back. • Select Hex to write your trace message in hexadecimal code. specify whether the TIM Alarm shall be raised upon detection of a mismatch between Expected and Received trace message.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The sender and receiver should agree upon the Transmitted and Expected trace messages before starting the Trace process. write the trace message you want to send.709 to follow the G. If you select Enabled_AISDisabled. Only SAPI is used for comparison of messages for the Trace functionality. .709 standard where the SAPI and DAPI messages shall consist of a 3 byte country code and a 12 byte National Segment code. In the SAPI Expected field. By default. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential PS Select OK to save your settings and close the Modify window. Step 2 Step 3 320 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. a TIM Alarm will be raised upon detection of a mismatch between Expected and Received message.Viewing and Configuring Trace Messages Step 5 In the Transmitted field. Note Step 6 End of Procedure Configuring Settings for OTN Signals This procedure explains how to configure the trace message settings for OTN signals and follows the procedure in “How to Configure the Trace Messages” on p. TIM Mode is disabled.

For OTN signals. The thresholds are described in the FSP3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual. you may write the Operator Specific trace message you want to send. write the SAPI trace message you want to send. In the OPSP Tx field. Select OK to save your settings and close the Modify window. User Manual 321 . The drop-down list is populated from the provisioned channels. the performance records and thresholds for the selected monitoring point and type are displayed in the Performance Data window. You need to select a monitoring type that monitors on the physical layer. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Select the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane hierarchical list. Note Step 7 End of Procedure How to Configure TCA Thresholds This instruction describes how to configure the thresholds for Threshold Crossing Alerts.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response. you have 15 characters available for your message for the SAPI and DAPI and 32 characters available for OPSP. by using the Monitoring Point drop-down list. Select which channel to view performance data for. Channels are identified by their AID address. You can set these thresholds for performance measurement on the physical layer so that an alert is generated in case a performance measure crosses a threshold.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 In the SAPI Tx field. In the DAPI Tx field. the Performance Data window will appear. From the Main Menu. The length and format for the trace string is the same for all layers in OTN. PS FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 4 Select which type of performance data to configure thresholds for. by using the Monitoring Type drop-down list. select Performance -> Performance Data. In response. you may write the DAPI trace message you want to send. The available options in this list depend on what is selected for Monitoring Point in Step 3.

See “How to Create a Port” on p.How to Configure Tandem Connection Monitoring Step 5 Select the Modify button. TCM is an important feature of the OTN within different administrative domains. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Procedure Step 1 Select the Network Element in the Entities pane. you must create it first. plugs (PL) and/or channels (CH). see the FSP3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual. go to Step 2. For more information about TCM. • If you can see the CH entity. 93.select a correct monitoring type. • If the channel (CH) shows the state UAS. Step 6 Set the preferred threshold values in the fields for Low and High threshold. 93. Select the channel (CH) in the Entities pane. FSP 3000R7 R10. End of Procedure How to Configure Tandem Connection Monitoring This procedure explains how to configure Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM). If the Modify button is inactive. you are not monitoring on the physical layer .3 80000014705 Issue: B. and expand the module so you can see its dependent entities. In response the Modify window appears. • If the CH entity is not visible. See “How to Create a Port” on p. It enables the user to monitor the traffic quality that is transported between segments in the network. allowing errors and defects along the path to be traced to a particular segment. Step 2 322 User Manual . and then select the Config tab. you must create it first.

the Modify window appears. In response.3 80000014705 Issue: B. You can choose the following TCMis: TCM1. TCM-B Activation or TCM-C Activation.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 3 Select the Modify button. Activate one of the three TCMs by selecting the relevant TCMi in the drop-down list called TCM-A Activation. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 4 Choose which one of the three TCM monitoring segments (TCM-A. TCM4. FSP 3000R7 R10. User Manual 323 . TCM-B or TCM-C) you want to activate. TCM5. TCM3. TCM2. TCM6.

The default is 7 seconds. This instruction describes how to store optical power reference values for the modules on the NE. This number of candidate seconds is the integration period. b) In the field for SD Integration Period for the relevant TCM. when measurement of optical power reference values is triggered again. these values are saved persistently for each optical port and will survive both software upgrade/downgrade. and then select the Modify button again. Select OK to save your settings and close the Modify window. then the SD alarm is raised. TCM B and TCM C. Thereafter. PS 324 User Manual . You must logged in with an Element Manager user account that has ADMIN privileges.How to Store Optical Power Reference Values Step 5 Specify settings for Signal Degrade (SD) for the TCM you activated. If you are pre-provisioning. Upon intiation and completion of the optical power reference value storage.3 80000014705 Issue: B. firmware upgrade. Do as follows: a) In the field for BBE Signal Degrade for the relevant TCM. If there are a specified number of consecutive candidate seconds (G. Requirement • • The Element Manager is set to manage the NE via SNMPv3. the system generates transient conditions to indicate this. enter a threshold for the BBE counter. The default value is 15% for TCM A.783). To get to the settings for Signal Degrade. using an user account with ADMIN privileges. you must close the Modify window after you have activated the appropriate TCM. enter the integration period. A candidate second for an SD alarm is present when the BBE counter exceeds the threshold. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential How to Store Optical Power Reference Values When storage of optical power related values is triggered. Up to ten optical power reference values can be stored for each module. the Modify window will look a bit different. and cold or warm restart of a module. the new values overwrite the oldest stored optical power reference values. Note Step 6 End of Procedure FSP 3000R7 R10.

Error. which means that storing is in progress. Step 3 Trigger storage of optical power reference values by selecting Store reference values. FSP 3000R7 R10. which means that storing has successfully completed. the optical power reference options are displayed in the Parameters pane. Select the Opt Pwr Ref tab in the Parameters pane. Success.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. In response. The procedures in this section should only be followed for additional support in conjunction with the procedures for configuring CFM in the FSP 3000 Provisioning and Operations Manual. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential In response.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 329 “Creating a Maintenance Association Component (MAcomp)” on p. storing of optical power reference values starts. In response. Chapter 4. End of Procedure Configuring Ethernet OAM/CFM How to configure and use Ethernet connectivity fault management (CFM) for OAM purposes is described in the FSP 3000 Provisioning and Operations Manual. 333 User Manual 325 . the Parameters pane displays information about this NE. This section supports the FSP 3000 Provisioning and Operations Manual by giving more detailed guidance on using the Craft or Web Console to create each individual CFM entity. which means that storing was interrupted. using the following status messages: • • • In Progress. 326 “Creating a Maintenance Association Network (MAnet)” on p. Progress is indicated by the Status of storing field. The following sections are provided: “Creating a Maintenance Domain (MD)” on p.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . 337 “Viewing and Modifying MAnet or MAcomp Configuration” on p. a customer may relate to one or more providers. who again use one or more operators to deliver the service. 326 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. In response the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window appears. 349 Creating a Maintenance Domain (MD) In a complex Ethernet network. Connectivity fault management can be done for different domains. The MD is a network scope entity. From the Main Menu. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane hierarchical list. select Configuration -> Ethernet Service OAM/CFM. This section describes how to create a maintenance domain (MD) entity.3 80000014705 Issue: B. allowing adaptation to the operator networking model in each case. Requirements • A CFM plan for the network must exist. 341 “Deleting CFM Entities” on p.Configuring Ethernet OAM/CFM “Creating a Maintenance End Point” on p.

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 3 Select the item CFM at the top of the left hand pane. and the final page has the title Confirm. In response the Create Maintenance Domain wizard starts. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Each page in the wizard has a title. Navi- gate between the pages by selecting either: • • Next to continue to the next wizard page. and make changes to the parameters. User Manual 327 . In response the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window displays the maintenance domains defined for this NE. FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 4 Select Add. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. Back to return to the previous wizard page.

Ensure that you enter the correct value. Select Next to continue.3 80000014705 Issue: B. select the planned format type for the maintenance domain name. it cannot be changed later. the Parameters page appears. FSP 3000R7 R10. Select Next to continue. Step 6 In the page Parameters do as follows: a) Enter the planned domain level number in the Domain Level field. b) In the Format Type of Name drop-down list. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential 328 User Manual . In response. the Name page appears.Configuring Ethernet OAM/CFM Step 5 In the page Identifier enter the planned MD identifier for this MD in the MD Identifier field.

In response. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Select Close to close the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window. End of Procedure Creating a Maintenance Association Network (MAnet) In each end the CFM maintenance flow is realized by defining a maintenance association (MA). • User Manual 329 . It lists the end points of the CFM maintenance flow (in NE A and NE B) and the Maintenance Domain (MD) that the end points belong to. The MAcomp has local scope and owns the parameters that are specific to the local end point. and this is displayed in the AID column of the Maintenance Domains table Step 9 FSP 3000R7 R10.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 7 In the page Name enter the maintenance domain name in the Name field. Select Next to continue. Requirements • • A CFM plan for the network must exist. the Confirm page appears. the entity is displayed in the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window if it was successfully created. such as the Ethernet port and the primary VID it belongs to. Together with the MD identifier. This section describes how to create one maintenance association network (MAnet). This MA is represented by two entities: • • The maintenance association net (MAnet) The maintenance association component (MAcomp). The EVC/EVC flow segment that connectivity fault management shall be configured for. must already have been provisioned. It is not necessary that it is in service. the MAnet identifier is used to form the AID for the MAnet.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 8 Select Finish. The MD that the MAnet belongs to must already have been provisioned. The MAnet has network scope.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 3 Select the MD that the MAnet belongs to in the hierarchical list of CFM entities in the left hand pane. From the Main Menu. In response the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window appears. . select Configuration -> Ethernet Service OAM/CFM. 330 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. All maintenance association networks defined for this MD will be displayed. In response the content in the right hand pane changes.Configuring Ethernet OAM/CFM Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane hierarchical list.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

Select Next to continue. and make changes to the parameters. the Parameters page appears. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. In the page Identifier do as follows: a) Ensure that the MD AID that is displayed in the MD field is correct. b) Enter the planned MA identifier for this MAnet in the MA Identifier field.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 4 Select Add. Back to return to the previous wizard page. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Next to continue to the next wizard page. User Manual 331 .3 80000014705 Issue: B. Each page in the wizard has a title. If not. and the final page has the title Confirm. In response. In response the Create Maintenance Association wizard starts. Navi- gate between the pages by selecting either: • • Step 5 FSP 3000R7 R10. cancel the wizard and start it again after selecting the correct MD in the left pane.

Configuring Ethernet OAM/CFM

Step 6

In the page Parameters do as follows: a) In the List of Attached MEPS field, enter the maintenance end-points (MEPs) that are associated with this MAnet. Separate the MEPs with commas.

If the MEP identifiers are not entered, you will not be able to create these MEPs in the appropriate later step.

Note

Step 7

In the page Name enter the planned MAnet name in the Name field. Select Next to continue. In response, the Confirm page appears.

332

User Manual

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

PS

b) Use the CCM Period drop-down list to select the planned CCM period for this CFM maintenance flow. The CCM period is how long time shall pass between each CCM frame transmission. CFM maintenance flows that are used for Ethernet linear protection shall use 3.3 ms. c) In the Format Type of Name drop-down list, select the planned format type for the maintenance association name. Select Next to continue. In response, the Name page appears.

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs

Step 8

Select Finish. In response, the entity is displayed in the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window if it was successfully created. Together with the MD identifier, the MAnet identifier is used to form the AID for the MAnet, and this is displayed in the AID column of the Maintenance Associations table.

Step 9

Select Close to close the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window.

End of Procedure

Creating a Maintenance Association Component (MAcomp)
In each end the CFM maintenance flow is realized by defining a maintenance association (MA). This MA is represented by two entities: • • The maintenance association net (MAnet) The maintenance association component (MAcomp).

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

The MAnet has network scope. It lists the end points of the CFM maintenance flow (in NE A and NE B) and the Maintenance Domain (MD) that the end points belong to. The MAcomp has local scope and owns the parameters that are specific to the local end point, such as the Ethernet port and the primary VID it belongs to. This section describes how to create one maintenance association component (MAcomp).

Requirements
• • A CFM plan for the network must exist. The EVC/EVC flow segment that connectivity fault management shall be configured for, must already have been provisioned. It is not necessary that it is in service. The MD that the MAnet belongs to must already have been provisioned. The MAnet that the MAcomp belongs to must already have been provisioned.

• •

User Manual

333

Configuring Ethernet OAM/CFM

Procedure
Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane hierarchical list. From the Main Menu, select Configuration -> Ethernet Service
OAM/CFM.

In response the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window appears.

In response the content in the right hand pane changes.

Step 4

Select the MACOMP tab. All MA components that exist for this MAnet will be displayed in the MACOMP tab.

334

User Manual

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Step 3

Select the MAnet that the this end of the CFM maintenance flow belongs to in the hierarchical list of CFM entities in the left hand pane.

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs

Step 5

Select Add. In response the Create MACOMP wizard starts.

Each page in the wizard has a title. these titles and their sequence are: Identifier, Parameters, Name, Confirm. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. Navigate between the pages by selecting either: • • Step 6
Next to continue to the next wizard page. Back to return to the previous wizard page, and make changes to

the parameters.
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

In the page Identifier do as follows: a) Ensure that the MAnet AID that is displayed in the Maintenance Association field is correct. If not, cancel the wizard and start it again after selecting the correct MAnet in the left pane. b) Enter the planned MAcomp identifier in the Identifier field. Select Next to continue. In response, the Parameters page appears.

User Manual

335

Configuring Ethernet OAM/CFM

Step 7

In the page Parameters do as follows: a) Use the Port AID drop-down list to select the Ethernet port AID which this CFM maintenance flow is associated with. This must be the same ETH port entity that is used by the EVC or EVC flow segment that this CFM maintenance flow monitors.

Ensure that you enter the correct ETH port entity. It is easy to make a mistake at this point.

PS

P

Note

b) The VLAN Comp Type field content cannot be changed. No action is required. Select Next to continue. In response, the Parameters page content changes.

Step 8

Enter the planned primary VID that the CFM maintenance flow shall use for the CFM frames in the Primary VID field. The primary VID shall be equal to the external VID that was defined for the EVC or EVC flow segment.

Ensure that you enter the correct primary VID. It is easy to make a mistake at this point.

P

Note

Select Next to continue. In response, the Confirm page appears.

336

User Manual

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

PS

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs

Step 9

Select Finish. In response, the entity is displayed in the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window on the MACOMP tab if it was successfully created. Together with the MD identifier, the MAnet identifier and the MAcomp identifier are used to form the AID for the MAcomp, and this is displayed in the AID column of the table on the MACOMP tab.

Step 10

Select Close to close the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window.

End of Procedure

Creating a Maintenance End Point
A CFM maintenance flow is characterized by its end points. These maintenance end points (MEPs) can generate and terminate CFM messages, and they act as filters to confine CFM frames within the domain level, and the flow. End points discard CFM frames at lower domain levels while they are transparent for CFM frames at higher domain levels. Maintenance end points are per MD level and can be associated with a port, a VID (SVID) or an EVC. This section describes how to create one maintenance end point (MEP).

Requirements
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

• •

A CFM plan for the network must exist. The EVC/EVC flow segment that connectivity fault management shall be configured for, must already have been provisioned. It is not necessary that it is in service. The MAnet that the MAcomp belongs to must already have been provisioned. The MAcomp that the MEP belongs to must already have been provisioned.

• •

User Manual

337

Configuring Ethernet OAM/CFM

Procedure
Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane hierarchical list. From the Main Menu, select Configuration -> Ethernet Service
OAM/CFM.

In response the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window appears.

In response the content in the right hand pane changes.

Step 4

Select the Maintenance End Points tab. All MEPs defined for this MD will be displayed in the Maintenance End
Points tab.

338

User Manual

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Step 3

Select the MAnet that the this end of the CFM maintenance flow belongs to in the hierarchical list of CFM entities in the left hand pane.

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs

Step 5

Select Add. In response the Create Maintenance End Point wizard starts.

Each page in the wizard has a title. these titles and their sequence are: Identifier, Parameters, Name, Confirm. This helps you keep track of how far you have come. Navigate between the pages by selecting either: • • Step 6
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Next to continue to the next wizard page. Back to return to the previous wizard page, and make changes to

the parameters. In the page Identifier do as follows: a) Ensure that the MAnet AID that is displayed in the Maintenance Association field is correct. If not, cancel the wizard and start it again after selecting the correct MAnet in the left pane. b) Enter the planned MEP identifier in the Identifier field. Select Next to continue. In response, the Parameters page appears.

User Manual

339

Configuring Ethernet OAM/CFM

Step 7

In the page Parameters do as follows: a) The facility type for the MEP can only be Down MEP, so no action is required for the Facility Type field. b) The AID of the ETH port that this MEP is associated with is displayed in Port AID field. This entry has been deduced from the MAcomp that already is associated with the MAnet. Compare against your CFM plan and ensure that this is the same ETH port as used by the EVC or EVC flow segment to be monitored. c) Enter the priority that is planned for the transmitted ETH-CCM CFM frames, d) To enable CFM monitoring at the far end, generation of ETH-CCM frames must be started in the local end. This can be done now, by leaving the Start CCM generation field set to ENABLE. Otherwise set the field to DISABLE. You can also enable or disable ETH-CCM generation at a later time, using the Config tab of the MEP. Select Next to continue. In response, the Parameters page content changes.

Step 8

Enter the planned primary VID that the CFM maintenance flow shall use for the CFM frames in the Primary VID field. The primary VID shall be equal to the external VID that is defined for the EVC or EVC flow segment. You should already have entered this VID when creating the MAcomp entity belonging to this end of the CFM maintenance flow. If the MAnet name that this MEP is associated with is of type “primary VID”, then the same primary VID must be entered in the Primary VID field.

Ensure that you enter the correct primary VID. It is easy to make a mistake at this point.

P

Note

340

User Manual

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

PS

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs

Step 9

Use the Admin State drop-down list to set the MEP’s administrative state in In Service. Select Next to continue. In response, the Confirm page appears.

Step 10

Select Finish. In response, the entity is displayed in the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window on the Maintenance End Points tab if it was successfully created. Together with the MD identifier, the MAnet identifier and the MEP identifier are used to form the AID for the MEP, and this is displayed in the AID column of the table on the Maintenance End Points tab.

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Step 11

Select Close to close the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window.

End of Procedure

Viewing and Modifying MAnet or MAcomp Configuration
It is possible to modify the following parameters of the MAnet entities: • • CCM period List of attached MEPs

User Manual

341

3 80000014705 Issue: B. select Configuration -> Ethernet Service OAM/CFM. 342 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 3 Select the MAnet that the this end of the CFM maintenance flow belongs to in the hierarchical list of CFM entities in the left hand pane. From the Main Menu. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . In response the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window appears. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane hierarchical list.Configuring Ethernet OAM/CFM This section describes how to view how a MAnet or MAcomp entity is configured. The current configuration of the MAnet parameters is displayed at the top of the right hand pane. In response the content in the right hand pane changes.

3 80000014705 Issue: B. select Modify.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 4 To change the CCM period. In response the Modify List of Attached MEPs appears. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 343 . FSP 3000R7 R10. b) Select OK to apply your changes or Cancel to discard them. Step 5 Make changes to the CCM period as follows: a) Select the relevant CCM period from the CCM Period drop-down list. In response the Modify window appears. select Modify. Step 6 To change the list of MEPs associated with the MAnet.

b) Remove a MEP association with the MAnet by selecting the MEP identifier in the List of Attached MEPs section and then selecting Remove. there will be no MEP AID entry together with it.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential d) You are required to confirm that you wish to discard the changes by selecting Yes. separate them with commas. Only MEP identifiers for which the actual MEP AID is not displayed can be removed from the list. no changes are possible. as this MEP has not yet been created. c) Select OK to apply your changes or Cancel to discard them. However. . Step 8 To view all information for MAcomp. select the Maintenance End Points tab. In response information about the MAcomp appears. If you select Cancel a warning window will appear. you must delete the MEP before removing the MEP identifier from the List of Attached MEPs section. If you enter more than one MEP identifier. In response the new MEP identifier will appear in the List of Attached MEPs section. 344 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. If you select No you will be returned to the Modify List of Attached MEPs window.Configuring Ethernet OAM/CFM Step 7 Make changes to the MEP list as follows: a) Associate a new MEP with the MAnet by entering the MEP identifier(s) in the MEP IDs field and then selecting Add. To remove a MEP association for a MEP which already exists.

FMEP. Config. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane hierarchical list. FSP 3000R7 R10. In response the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window appears. For the MEP entity a standard information window is available. Info. From the Main Menu. with the tabs State. Fault.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 9 Select Close to close the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window. and to change the Admin State of the MEP entity.3 80000014705 Issue: B. This section describes how to view and modify a MEP configuration. It is only possible to alter the Start CCM generation parameter of the MEP entity. select Configuration -> Ethernet Service OAM/CFM. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 345 . End of Procedure Viewing and Modifying MEP Configuration For each CFM entity it is possible to view how it is configured.

b) Select OK to apply the change. Step 7 Change the administrative state as follows: a) Use the Admin State drop-down list to select the relevant administrative state.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response state information in is displayed. select the State tab and then select Modify. In response the Modify window appears.Configuring Ethernet OAM/CFM Step 3 Select the MAnet that the this end of the CFM maintenance flow belongs to in the hierarchical list of CFM entities in the left hand pane. Step 4 Select the MEP to view or modify in the Maintenance End Points tab and then select Config. Step 5 Step 6 To view states for the MEP entity. 346 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. In response the MEP Config window appears. In response the content in the right hand pane changes. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . To change the administrative states for the MEP entity. select the State tab.

select the Config tab and then select Modify.3 80000014705 Issue: B. User Manual 347 . select the Config tab and then select PDU Content. Enable or Disable. b) Select OK to apply the change. In response the configured parameters for the MEP appear. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 10 To enable or disable generation of CCM frames for this MEP. Step 12 To view the PDU Content for the MEP. Step 9 To view the configured parameters for the MEP entity. In response the Modify window appears. FSP 3000R7 R10.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 8 To view faults for the MEP entity. In response fault information for the MEP appears. select the Config tab. Step 11 Enable/disable the CCM generation as follows: a) Use the Start CCM generation drop-down list to select the relevant setting. select the Fault tab.

Whether any RDI condition exists at the far-end MEP. This information is useful when troubleshooting CFM. Step 14 To view information about the far-end MEP entity of this MAnet. select the Info tab.Configuring Ethernet OAM/CFM Step 13 To view information related to the MEP entity.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Select Close to return to the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window. In response information related to the MEP appears. In response information related to the far-end MEP appears. The state of the far-end MEP. select the FMEP tab. End of Procedure 348 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . The MAC address of the far-end MEP. The displayed information is: • • • • • Step 15 The AID of the MEP in the far-end NE. How long the far-end MEP has been up.

b) Select the Maintenance End Point tab. See “Viewing and Modifying MEP Configuration” on p. In response the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window appears. select Configuration -> Ethernet Service OAM/CFM. 345 for guidance. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane hierarchical list. e) Select Delete. A confirmation message appears. This procedure describes deletion of MEPs. A CFM entity cannot be deleted unless its dependent entities already have been deleted.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Deleting CFM Entities This section describes how to delete the various CFM entities for an EVC or EVC segment. d) If that MEP’s administrative state is In Service. you must change the administrative state to any other state in order to be allowed to delete the MEP. or cancel to stop it. c) In the displayed list of MEPs.3 80000014705 Issue: B. User Manual 349 . FSP 3000R7 R10. select the MAnet for which you want to delete a MEP. From the Main Menu. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 3 To delete a MEP do as follows: a) In the right hand hierarchical list. f) Select OK to confirm the deletion. MAcomps. MAnets and MDs. select the MEP to delete. then stop the procedure. To delete any other CFM entity follow the procedure until you have deleted the entity in question. which is the required sequence of deletion to delete a MD.

350 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. See Step 3 for guidance. or cancel to stop it. c) In the displayed list of MAcomps. select the MD to which the MAnet belongs. c) If dependent MAcomps have not yet been deleted. or cancel to stop it. You must delete these MAcomps and MEPs in order to be allowed to delete the MAcomp. select the MAnet for which you want to delete the MAcomp. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . e) A confirmation message appears. b) In the right hand pane. A confirmation message appears. You must delete this MEP in order to be allowed to delete the MAcomp. f) Select OK to confirm the deletion. e) Select Delete. b) Select the MACOMP tab. To delete a MAnet entity do as follows: a) In the left hand hierarchical list. select the MAcomp to delete. d) If that MAcomp has a MEP entity entry in the MEP column. the Delete button is not selectable. f) Step 5 Select OK to confirm the deletion. See Step 4 for guidance. d) Select Delete. the MEP with which the MAnet and MAcomp are associated has not yet been deleted. select the MAnet to delete from the displayed list of MAnets.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Configuring Ethernet OAM/CFM Step 4 To delete a MAcomp entity do as follows: a) In the right hand hierarchical list.

Use the Entities pane hierarchical entity list for this selection. User Manual 351 . select the MD to delete from the displayed list of MDs. or cancel to stop it. e) A confirmation message appears. You must delete these MAnets in order to be allowed to delete the MD.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 6 To delete a MD entity do as follows: a) In the left hand hierarchical list. Such channels are named: CH-<shelf #>-<slot #>-C|C1. Select OK to return to the Ethernet Service OAM/CFM window. f) Step 7 Step 8 Select OK to confirm the deletion. d) Select Delete. the Delete button is not selectable. select the top item.C8 or CH-<shelf #>-<slot #>-N|NE|NW. b) In the right hand pane.3 80000014705 Issue: B. CFM. and how to release either of the loop backs. End of Procedure FSP 3000R7 R10. External and internal loop-backs are described in the FSP3000R7 Detailed System Description. Select [Back] to return to the main menu. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential How to Configure Loop-Backs This instruction describes how to set an external or internal loop-back. Procedure Step 1 Select the client or network side channels that you wish to set a loop for. c) If dependent MAnets have not yet been deleted. See Step 5 for guidance.

Under normal conditions this will show RLS. In response. the Modify Operation window appears.How to Configure Loop-Backs Step 2 In the Parameter pane. In response. select the Operation tab. which indicates that a loop has been released. The options are: • External • Facility • RLS. Step 5 End of Procedure 352 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. The last issued loop-back command is displayed in the Loopback Extern/Facility field.3 80000014705 Issue: B. or Cancel to discard it. Step 3 Select the Modify button. which means to release any loops that currently are active. Select OK to apply the command. the commands that can be issued are displayed. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Step 4 Use the Loopback Extern/Facility drop-down list to issue the relevant command.

Network fiber endpoints are represented by Optical Line (OL) entities. Some network management systems (NMS). including network internal cables. These jumpers are connected during network element installation and carry both client. In this case an optical line can have access identifier OL-1. as well as the control plane. fiber jumpers interconnect various optical modules installed within a single network element. These PTPs represent each point in the NE to which a cable can be connected. prior to entering or exiting the network element itself. Network management systems (NMS). Physical termination point (PTP) entities are automatically created when port entities for a module are created. Therefore. a connection is created in the database between the relevant PTP entities for each fiber jumper in the NE. require the fiber jumpers to be entered into the internal database. In this way the jumpers form the internal optical signal path of the network element. through various active or passive optical modules. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 353 . and physical termination point (PTP) entities are automatically created for these as well. as well as the network fiber endpoints to be entered into the internal database. and the physical termination point is PTP-1A fiber jumper is represented in the database by an interconnection between the PTP entities of the two ports that it interconnects. A connected network fiber endpoint is modeled by an interconnection between the PTP of its OL entity and the PTP of the network port it is connected to. require these fiber jumpers.3 80000014705 Issue: B.and network-side signals from service termination points (such as transponders). Figure 22: Fiber Jumpers and Physical Termination Points FSP 3000R7 R10. as well as the control plane. For example: PTP-1-9-N is the physical termination point for the port CH-1-9-N. The access identifier of a physical termination point is derived from the AID of the port entity.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Managing Cables in the Internal Database In the Element Manager.

Managing Cables in the Internal Database This section contains the following topics: How to View Fibers in the Physical Connections Table How to Enter Fibers into the Physical Connections Table Viewing Physical Termination Points How to View Fibers in the Physical Connections Table This procedure describes how to view all fibers that have been entered into the Physical Connections Table. This column shows the name of the module to which port/channel the other end of the cable is connected. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . From the Main Menu.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the Physical Connections List window appears. This column shows the equipment type of the module that the port/channel in the AID column belongs to. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE from the Entity pane hierarchical list. The following information is presented in this window: Column Name From To Description This column shows the name of the module that the port/channel in the AID column belongs to. select Configuration -> Physical Connections List. Type 354 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. In response.

Delete a connection by selecting the connection and then selecting the Delete button.3 80000014705 Issue: B. This column shows the class a connection is. Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 End of Procedure How to Enter Fibers into the Physical Connections Table This procedure describes how to fill in fiber jumpers or network fibers into the Physical Connections Table. Print the list by selecting the Print button. Close the Physical Connections List window by selecting the Close button. Type to EDFA-DGCV and Class to Standard. or whether it is 1WAY carrying one direction. indicating that is carries both the transmit and receive direction. Save the list to file by selecting the Save button. For example set Entity to SHELF-1. Type and Class drop-down lists. User Manual 355 . use the Entity. • The class standard indicates that the PTP AIDs do not incur any restriction in functionality. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential This list is not updated automatically after it has been opened. Class • Step 3 To filter which equipment to display physical connections for.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Column Name Conn Description This column shows whether the connection is 2WAY. Create a new connection by selecting the Create button. see “How to Enter Fibers into the Physical Connections Table” on p. 355. The table will then display only standard physical connections to and from EDFA-DGCV modules in Shelf 1. Step 4 FSP 3000R7 R10. To refresh the contents: Select the Refresh button. The class Non Standard indicates that the PTP AIDs may limit the functionality of the NE in some way. Standard connections are typically used to connect equipment.

select Configuration -> Physical Connections List. • A PTP of class Standard does not incur any restriction in functionality. For a network fiber there is an optical line PTP and a port PTP.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE from the Entity pane hierarchical list. • A PTP of class Non Standard may limit the functionality of the NE in some way. the Physical Connections List window appears. From the Main Menu. Bi-directional connections carry both transmit and receive traffic and represent two fiber jumpers. Step 5 Step 6 Select the type of connection. Uni-directional connections carry either the transmit or receive traffic and must be used for fiber jumpers attached to EDFAs or attached to modules used as regenerators. In response. For a fiber jumper the PTPs represent two ports. • Setting the class to All results in all classes PTP being displayed.Managing Cables in the Internal Database Requirements • • A cabling plan mapping all internal fiber jumpers in the NE. 356 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. You will need a thorough understanding of how modules are interconnected in the NE. In response the Create Physical Connections window appears. using the Type of Connection radio buttons. The Create button remains inactive (greyed out) until you have selected a valid connection. bi-directional (2WAY) or uni-directional (1WAY). Step 3 Select the Create button. In the From and To panes: select the physical termination points (PTP) that represent the cable you want to enter. Step 4 Use the Class drop-down list to define which class physical termination points (PTP) that shall be displayed in the To pane. Class Standard connections are typically used to connect equipment. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs

Step 7

Select the Create button to create the connection. If the NCU detects no equipment mismatches or other inconsistencies in the attempted connection, the system indicates that the connection has been created successfully in the database and these entities disappear from the list in the Create Connections window. They will appear in the Physical Connections List window after you have selected Refresh in that window, or automatically if you subscribe to Traps for the Network Element (see “Accessing Trap Recipients” on p. 53).

Step 8

Select Close to close the Create Physical Connections window when you are finished creating connections. You are returned to the Physical Connections List window. Select Close.

Step 9

End of Procedure

Viewing Physical Termination Points
This instruction describes how to view all PTPs in the NE, as well as display detailed information about each PTP.
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Procedure
Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE from the Entity pane hierarchical list. From the Main Menu, select Configuration -> PTP Table. In response, the Physical Termination Points window appears.

This window displays the PTPs in the system, as well as whether they are currently part of a connection or not.

User Manual

357

How to Set the Automatic Laser Shutdown Mode

Step 3

Select a PTP in the list, and then select Details. In response the PTP Details window appears. The contents depend on the PTP you selected.

Step 4 Step 5

If there is more information that can be viewed about this PTP, use the Previous and Next buttons to display this. When you are finished, close the PTP Details window by selecting
Close.

You will be returned to the Physical Termination Points window. Step 6 When you are finished viewing PTPs, close the Physical Termination
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Points window by selecting the Close button.

End of Procedure

How to Set the Automatic Laser Shutdown Mode
This instruction describes how to set the automatic laser shutdown mode (ALS) on a channel module. Refer to the Module and System Specification, Appendix A for an overview of the channel modules that support ALS, and an ALS switch-off. ALS is a method of providing eye safety for open fiber connections. When a fiber is detected to be open, the line side transmitter initiates a pulsing behavior to reduce the optical output power and thus provide eye safety. When the fibers are determined to be reconnected, by the end-to-end receivers detecting the pulses, the transmitters are enabled and the link is established again. In certain configurations, the default and normal working condition is to have ALS disabled. Laser safety is not affected by the disabled ALS in this case. An NE with a ROADM is an example of this.

Requirements
You must be logged in to the Element Manager using an account with user account with OPERATOR privilege rights.

358

User Manual

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs

Procedure
Step 1 Select the Network Element in the Entities pane, and expand the relevant shelf and module so you can see the client and network channels. Select the relevant client or network channel where the ALS mode needs to be changed in the Entities pane. In response the Parameters pane displays the parameters for his channel. Step 3 Select the State tab. In response the Parameters pane displays the State parameters.

Step 2

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Step 4

Set the administrative state for the channel to Management, using the Admin State drop-down list. Your choice here depends on the situation requiring the ALS mode change. Laser safety will not be affected. Select the Config tab.

Step 5

Step 6 Step 7

Select the Modify button. To enable the ALS mechanism, select either ALS or SDH-ALS from the ALS Mode drop-down list. Use “SDH-ALS” if your channel carries SDH/SONET traffic (e.g. STM-16). To disable the ALS mechanism, select NONE from the ALS Mode drop-down list. As a result, the channel module transmitter will be on.

Step 8

User Manual

359

How to Force a Laser On

Step 9 Step 10 Step 11

Select OK to save your setting or Cancel to discard them. Select the State tab. Change the administrative state to the value it was before you set the ALS mode, or select Automatic in Service.

End of Procedure

How to Force a Laser On
This section describes how to force a laser on. Once a laser has been forced on the laser release timer (see “How to Set the Forced-Laser Fallback/Release Timer” on p. 362) starts running. When the specified time is reached, the laser is released.

Requirements
You must be logged in to the Element Manager with the ADMIN account

Procedure
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Step 1

Select the Network Element in the Entities pane, and expand the relevant shelf and module so you can see the client and network channels. Select the relevant client or network channel where the Laser shall be forced on or released, in the Entities pane. In response the Parameters pane displays the parameters for his channel.

Step 2

Step 3

Select the State tab. In response the Parameters pane displays the State parameters.

Step 4

Set the administrative state for the channel to Maintenance, using the
Admin State drop-down list.

360

User Manual

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs

Step 5

Select the Operation tab. In response the Parameters pane displays the Operation parameters.

Step 6

Use the Laser Forced ON drop-down list to set the relevant laser operation: • Select OPR (operate), to force a laser on. This setting will override the ALS setting for the laser and should only be used for diagnostic purposes. • Select RLS (release), to release a forced-on laser. If the ALS mechanism is enabled, it will now switch on or off the laser appropriately. Select Apply to save your setting. In response the laser is forced on and the laser release timer starts running. The laser release timer can be observed on the Operation tab. If it does not show progress, use the Refresh button.

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Step 7

Step 8 Step 9

Select the State tab. Use the Admin State drop-down list to set the administrative state to the state it was before you set the Laser Forced ON parameter, or select Automatic in Service.

End of Procedure

User Manual

361

How to Set the Forced-Laser Fallback/Release Timer

How to Set the Forced-Laser Fallback/Release Timer
When a force-laser command is issued, a timer starts running. When a configurable amount of time has elapsed, the forced setting is autonomously released. Such a timer is commonly called a fallback or a release timer. It is normally not necessary to change factory default setting of this timer. This section contains the instruction to change this timer. The change is non-service affecting, and affects all modules in the NE within 60 seconds after the change is applied. The change of this parameter is recorded in the database change log. This makes it possible to reconstruct actions on system-wide parameters.

Procedure
Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant Network Element in the NE Pane. In response, the Parameter pane displays the System page. Select the Database tab. In response, the Parameter pane displays the Database page. In this page parameters that affect the database are displayed. Step 3 Select the Modify button on the Database tab. In response, the Modify window appears.
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Step 4

Enter the new value for the forced-laser fallback timer in the Laser
RLS DEF Timer field.

The default value is 1440 minutes. The timer is configurable between 0 - 1440 minutes with 1 minute granularity. Step 5 Select OK to apply the change, or Cancel to discard the change.

End of Procedure

362

User Manual

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs

How to Allow Forced Deletion of Entities
In order to delete an entity, its dependent entities must first have been deleted. In some situations it is cumbersome to delete each of the dependent entities manually. The FSP3000R7 can do this deletion of dependent entities automatically, if the Force Deletion feature has been enabled. This section contains the instruction to enable the Force Deletion feature. The change is non-service affecting, and affects all modules in the NE within 60 seconds after the change is applied. The change of this parameter is recorded in the database change log. This makes it possible to reconstruct actions on system-wide parameters.

Procedure
Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant Network Element in the NE Pane. In response, the Parameter pane displays the System page. Select the Database tab. In response, the Parameter pane displays the Database page. In this page parameters that affect the database are displayed. Step 3
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Select the Modify button on the Database tab. In response, the Modify window appears.

Step 4 Step 5

Use the Force Delete drop-down list and select Enable to enable the Force Delete feature. To disable it, select Disable. Select OK to apply the change, or Cancel to discard the change.

End of Procedure

Enabling Use of SCU Ring Interconnection
Within a NE, the SCUs and ROADMs in each shelf can be interconnected in both a chain or ring topology. Using the ring topology requires that the SCUs and ROADMs have equipment software (firmware) version R8.2. Therefore use of the ring topology is disabled by default, and must be actively enabled by the

User Manual

363

How to Change Equipment Capabilities

operator. This supports software update without loosing connection to shelves without the correct SCU or ROADM equipment software version. This instruction describes how to enable SCU interconnection for a NE which previously did not support this.

Requirements
• • All SCUs and ROADMs in the NE must be running Release 8.2 equipment software. All shelves must have been registered in the database.

This instruction describes how to enable SCU interconnection for a NE which previously did not support this.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. In response the Parameters pane displays all information about the NE. Step 2 Step 3 Select the Database tab. In response all information related to internal database is displayed. Select Modify.
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

In response the Modify window appears.

Step 4 Step 5

Use the SCU ring intercon. drop-down list to enable or disable use of Ring interconnection. Select OK to apply the change. If the SCUs and ROADMS are registered, running the correct equipment software and cabled correctly, they should all be manageable.

End of Procedure

How to Change Equipment Capabilities
This section describes how to change the capability level of a module. The highest possible capability level contains all features the module can support. After

364

User Manual

Chapter 4 Configuring NEs

updating the NE software, it is wise to check that the equipment capability is configured correctly in the case that expected features can not be found.

Procedure
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Select the module to change capability for. Use the Entity pane hierarchical entity list for this selection. Select the Config tab in the Parameter pane. Note the current capability as displayed in the Prov. Capability level field. Select the Modify button.

Step 5

Use the Prov. Capability level drop-down list to select the correct capability level. For a 10TCC-PC-4GU module, the options could for example be: • • • Level 0: Basic feature set. Level 1: FC400-C, TCA, PM-RST, RPS Level 2: STM64/OC192-N

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

The release notes of the currently running software version will contain information about the supported capabilities. Step 6 Select OK to apply the change, or Cancel to discard the change.

End of Procedure

How to Configure TIF Contacts
This section describes how to configure the telemetry interface (TIF) contacts on the UTM module. There are 16 input and 4 output port contacts that can be used to manage alarms. You may configure whether the input ports (TIFI) use an open or closed contact to trigger an alarm. Alarm groups may be assigned to the output ports (TIFO), one group per port. There are three categories of alarms: NE alarms, FCU alarms, PSU alarms.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the UTM module in the Entity pane hierarchical entity list. If it is not listed, you must first create the UTM module. In response the dependent telemetry input (TIFI) and output (TIFO) ports are displayed.

User Manual

365

How to Configure TIF Contacts

Step 2

Make a choice: • Configure each TIF input port that you will use, as described in Step 3 to Step 9. • Assign an alarm group to each TIF output port that you will use as described in Step 10 to Step 14 Select the relevant input port under the UTM module in the hierarchical entity list. Select the Config tab in the Parameter pane.

Step 3 Step 4

This tab displays the current settings for this TIF input contact. In response the Modify window displays.
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Step 5

Select the Modify button.

Step 6

An alarm will be triggered either when the TIF input contact is closed, or when it is open. Use the Invert TIF input logic drop-down list to set this behavior for the TIF input. Enter the alarm message that shall be displayed when the alarm is raised. Use the TIF alarm message field. The alarm and configured alarm message are displayed in the Current
Conditions window, and in the Event Log.

Step 7

Step 8

Enter the severity for this TIF input alarm into the TIF alarm type field. Use the following abbreviations: CR=critical, MJ=major, MN=minor.

If you do not enter a severity, this TIF input port will be automatically disabled.

Note

Step 9

PS

Select OK to apply the change, or Cancel to discard the change.

366

User Manual

End of Procedure User Manual 367 . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 13 Step 14 Use the TIF output provision drop-down list to select which alarm group that this TIF output shall indicate. This tab displays the current settings for this TIF input contact. In response the Modify window displays. FSP 3000R7 R10. Select the Config tab in the Parameter pane.3 80000014705 Issue: B. or Cancel to discard the change.Chapter 4 Configuring NEs Step 10 Step 11 Select the relevant output port under the UTM module in the hierarchical entity list. Step 12 Select the Modify button. Select OK to apply the change.

368 How to Configure TIF Contacts User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .

which describes how to view physical monitoring measurements and performance monitoring records. which gives a basic understanding of states and how to view them. current conditions (for example. In the Equipment pane. by coloring the “ball” icon. the Element Manager indicates currently present conditions in the Managed Elements pane. or conditions. the color and letter code of the most severe of these conditions is the one displayed. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Monitoring Faults. occur. code and severity is shown in Table 10. Severity is indicated using standardized coding and the relationship between color.Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs This section describes how to monitor the equipment state.3 80000014705 Issue: B. faults). The number indicates the total number of condi- User Manual 369 . When multiple conditions are present. Monitoring States. which gives a basic understanding of faults and current conditions. currently present conditions for the client and network interfaces and for the power supplies are indicated by a condition balloon symbol. The following topics are provided: FSP 3000R7 R10. and how to view these. For quick overview purposes. The color and letter code inside the condition balloon symbol indicates the severity of the condition. performance and physical layer measurements. Monitoring Faults The Element Manager notifies the operator when faults. events. Monitoring Performance.

This is normally not necessary to change.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Procedure Step 1 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. “How to View Current Conditions for All Entities in an NE” on p. 375 provides information about setting severities manually. For more details about Fault Management. Alarm profiles can be exported and imported to other NEs. 370 User Manual . 372 explains how current conditions for the entities are viewed from the Current Conditions window. 370 explains how current conditions for the entities are viewed from the Fault tab. In response. In some situations it is desirable to disable reporting of one or more conditions from the NE in order to inhibit a specific alarm. “Changing Condition Severities with an Alarm Profile” on p. 377 provides information about setting severities by using an alarm profile. The severity of each condition for each entity can be user-defined. FSP 3000R7 R10. Table 10: Severity Level Cleared NotAlarmed Not Reported Minor Major Critical Alarm Color Coding Color Green Cyan Grey Yellow Orange Red Letter Code none N none m M C Comment no alarms are present this alarm is not reported You can find more information under the following topics: “How to View Current Conditions for a Single Entity or NE” on p. “How to Manually Change an Individual Condition’s Severity” on p. “How to Set the Timer for the Fault Cause Persistency Filter” on p. The plus sign is displayed when there are conditions present with more than two different severities. 386 describes how to change the fault cause persistency filter timer. the Information pane displays.Monitoring Faults tions present. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential How to View Current Conditions for a Single Entity or NE This instruction describes how to view current conditions for an entity or a network element. 375 explains how the Element Manager provides a history of events on a per NE basis. “How to Manually Change an Individual Condition’s Severity” on p. see the FSP 3000R7 Detailed System Description.

3 80000014705 Issue: B. all available information about the entity or NE is displayed in the Parameters pane. End of Procedure User Manual 371 . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential In the Current Conditions section the list of current conditions is displayed. FSP 3000R7 R10.Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs Step 2 Select the entity or NE you want to view parameters for in the Entities pane. In response all conditions for the selected entity or NE are displayed. Step 3 Select the Fault tab in the Parameters pane. In response.

This column shows whether the condition is service affecting or not. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . In response. Otherwise the fault timestamps may be converted incorrectly. Date and time data is stored internally in the XML/CSV file in the following format: yyyy-mm-dd and hh:mm:ss:xxx. Condition Location Service Affecting 372 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. The Counters section gives a summary of how many conditions there are. using the AID address to identify it. where xxx indicates three digits for milli-seconds. The total number of conditions is displayed under the table of conditions. using the following columns: Column Name Severity Time Description This column shows the condition severity. The data can be exported to both the XML and CSV format. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. select Fault -> Current Conditions. This column shows the date and time that the event occurred on the NE. The severities are described in Table 10.Monitoring Faults How to View Current Conditions for All Entities in an NE This instruction describes how to view currents conditions for all entities in an NE. the Current Conditions window appears. Opening the exported file requires that the local regional settings for date and time on the computer you are using are the same as were used when the XML/CSV file was created. of each severity type. The table of conditions are displayed. This column shows the name of the condition. From the Main Menu. Note that the sequence that events occur in and the sequence that events are logged in may be different. This column shows from which entity the event originates.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

A check mark indicates that the horizontal scroll bar will be displayed. • • Step 4 FSP 3000R7 R10. • Select Save to save the Event Log as a comma separated file.3 80000014705 Issue: B. • Adjust the column widths to match the content by clicking the icon and selecting Pack All Columns or Pack Selected Column from the list that appears. Step 5 End of Procedure User Manual 373 . • Sort the table based on a column. Turn on display of a horizontal scroll bar by clicking the icon and selecting Horizontal Scroll from the list that appears. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential If appropriate you can: • Select Print to print the Event Log. Turn off display of a column by clicking the icon and selecting the column name from the list that appears. for example a module. • Select Refresh to refresh the list an get the newest information.Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs Step 3 Customize which conditions to display in the Current Conditions table as follows: • Display only conditions of a specific severity by using the Severity drop-down list in the Filter section. This toggles between ascending and descending display. • Display only conditions originating from a specific piece of equipment. Use the Equipment drop-down list in the Filter section. A check mark indicates that the column will be displayed. Select Close to finish viewing the Event Log. by clicking the column title.

The event log can be exported to both the XML and CSV format. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . using the AID address to identify it. • Select Save to save the Event Log as a comma separated file. • Select Refresh to refresh the list an get the newest information.3 80000014705 Issue: B. • Select Print to print the Event Log. 374 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Opening the exported file requires that the local regional settings for date and time on the computer you are using are the same as were used when the XML/CSV file was created.Monitoring Faults How to View the Event Log This instruction describes how to view the event log for an NE. Note that the sequence that events occur in and the sequence that events are logged in may be different. the Event Log window appears. All other events have severity “Information”. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. Date/Time Source Description Step 3 If appropriate you can: • Select Clear to erase the current Event Log and start afresh. Column Name Id Severity Description This field shows the sequential number the NE assigns to each event when it is logged on the NE. where xxx indicates three digits for milli-seconds. From the Main Menu. This field gives a description of the event. Otherwise the fault timestamps may be converted incorrectly. This field shows the date and time that the event occurred on the NE. This field shows from which entity the event originates. This field shows the event severity. select Fault -> Event Log In response. Events that are alarms use the severities described in Table 10. Date and time data is stored internally in the XML/CSV file in the following format: yyyy-mm-dd and hh:mm:ss:xxx.

User Manual 375 . all available information about the entity or NE is displayed in the Parameters pane. In response. the Information pane displays. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the NE Pane. The belonging severity is displayed in the Severity column.Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs Step 4 Select Close to finish viewing the Event Log. In response. Step 3 Select the Fault tab in the Parameters pane.3 80000014705 Issue: B. each condition that is relevant for this entity or NE is displayed in the Condition column. In response all conditions for the selected entity or NE are displayed. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential In the Severities section. End of Procedure How to Manually Change an Individual Condition’s Severity This instruction describes how to manually change the severity for a current condition on an entity or an NE. Select the entity or NE to view parameters for in the Entity pane. FSP 3000R7 R10.

In response.3 80000014705 Issue: B. select the new severity. Step 6 End of Procedure 376 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. the Modify Severities window appears. click the condition in the Severity column. From the list that appears. Step 5 For the condition you want to change severity for. or Cancel to discard it.Monitoring Faults Step 4 Select the Modify button. Select OK to apply the new severity. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .

modify. by applying an alarm profile. This alarm profile will have no effect on existing or future conditions if applied. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The alarm profile resides together with the data base. can be exported. they are sorted according to which entity type they are relevant for. Initially the alarm profile contains all conditions. Changing a condition’s setting in the alarm profile from a specific value back to Default effectively “removes” it from the alarm profile. For example: EQPT contains all conditions related to equipment. or applied an alarm profile. The content of the alarm profile has effect on all future conditions immediately after a condition is entered into the alarm profile (its severity is set different from User Manual 377 . and change the severity value from Default to the new value. An alarm profile created on one NE. Only severity settings with a value different from Default in the alarm profile will have effect on future and existing conditions. and imported to another NE. and to make it easier to navigate to the relevant conditions. This setting indicates that the factory default severity setting shall be used. should be left at the factory default values. with severity set to Default. stored. and applied to that NE. export and import an alarm profile. This section describes how to create. 381 “How to Import a Alarm Profile” on p. This setting indicates that the factory default severity setting shall be used. Thus. is the one that has effect. with severity set to Default. while CH contains all conditions related to channel entities. and is backed-up together with the data base when a data-base backup is done. This alarm profile will have no effect on existing or future conditions if applied. These entity types are classified by their access identifier (AID) alike mnemonics. Thus the severities in the system are the default defined ones unless one has changed the severity for a condition manually. An alarm profile can be used in combination with changing the severity manually for a condition on an entity. The following topics are provided: “How to Modify the Alarm Profile” on p. conditions which you wish to change severities for manually. This behavior secures that any manual severity change for this condition is not overwritten by the alarm profile. Future conditions of this type will however have the factory default severity. The last applied change. The severity of an existing condition of this type will not be changed. either by alarm profile application or individual change. unless a manual severity change has been made. To create a meaningful alarm profile. 380 “How to Export an Alarm Profile” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 383 How to Modify the Alarm Profile Initially the alarm profile contains all conditions. 377 “How to Reset an Alarm Profile” on p. FSP 3000R7 R10.Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs Changing Condition Severities with an Alarm Profile The default assigned severity for a condition type can be changed for all entities to which it is applicable. reset. There are a large amount of conditions in the system. you must select each condition type that you wish to change the severity for.

if relevant. There are two ways of changing the condition’s severity: • To follow the quickest way of modifying the severity. and select it. In response the progress of the entry to the alarm profile is shown in the lower. If you wish to start from scratch with an empty alarm profile file instead of modifying an existing one. and the available severities appear. Step 9 Continue from Step 14. The content of an alarm profile can also be applied to the existing conditions in the system. p. 156. In response a drop-down menu appears with the item Set Severity in it. with the Active Profile tab active. Select the relevant severity by clicking it. 378 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. From the Main Menu.2 “How to Reset an Alarm Profile”.5. go to 6.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the Alarm Profile window appears. select Fault -> Alarm Profile. Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Move the mouse pointer over the Set Severity item. This instruction describes how to create an alarm profile on the NE. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . go to Step 6 • To follow the standard way of modifying an item. go to Step 10 Right-click the severity for this condition in the Severity column. Step 3 Use the AID Type drop-down list to select the relevant group of conditions to display in order to find the condition you wish to change severity for.1. Browse the list until you find the relevant condition. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the NE Pane.Monitoring Faults Default). In response. left corner of the Alarm Profile window.

Repeat Step 3 through Step 14 for each condition that you wish to change the severity for by using the alarm profile. In response the Modify Alarm Profile Severities window appears. Step 11 The condition you selected in Step 4 is already selected. you can select a different condition now. see “How to View Current Conditions for All Entities in an NE” on p. Select OK to apply the new severity value. and the progress of the entry to the alarm profile is shown in the lower. You can check that the alarm profile had effect on existing conditions by looking at the list of current conditions for the NE. In response the Modify Alarm Profile Severities window is closed.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 372 for guidance.Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs Step 10 Select Modify to change the severity. and select a new severity from the drop-down list that appears. If it is not visible: Select Refresh to update the content of the Alarm Profile window. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 14 Ensure that your change is visible in the Alarm Profile window. If you happened to have made the wrong selection. If you wish to apply the alarm profile to all existing conditions in the NE: Select Severity Re-synch. left corner of the Alarm Profile window. Click the displayed severity for the selected condition. Step 12 Step 13 FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 15 Step 16 End of Procedure User Manual 379 .

Monitoring Faults How to Reset an Alarm Profile Initially the alarm profile contains all conditions. In response.3 80000014705 Issue: B. select Fault -> Alarm Profile. 381 for guidance. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the NE Pane. This instruction describes how to reset the alarm profile to its initial state. with severity set to Default. This setting indicates that the factory default severity setting shall be used. Select the Manage Profiles tab. Step 4 380 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. From the Main Menu. with the Active Profile tab active. and change the severity value from Default to the new value. This means that the alarm profile no longer has any effect on the existing and future conditions. This alarm profile will have no effect on existing or future conditions if applied. See “How to Export an Alarm Profile” on p. you must select each condition type that you wish to change the severity for. you can reset the alarm profile to its initial state. the Alarm Profile window appears. To create a meaningful alarm profile. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Step 3 Consider whether it makes sense to backup the existing alarm profile before resetting it. If you wish to erase all changes you have made to the alarm profile.

The activation date and time for the alarm profile will be updated. This allows you to apply the same severity changes to all NEs in a network. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential An alarm profile can be exported from one NE. In response: • • The alarm profile file will be reset to factory defaults. End of Procedure How to Export an Alarm Profile FSP 3000R7 R10. This can be seen by the activation date in the Active alarm profile section. that is.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Double-click the NE in the Managed Elements pane.Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs Step 5 Select Reset to Factory Default in the Active alarm profile section. Step 6 Every setting in the existing alarm profile will be erased. since this is equivalent to importing a new alarm profile. or No to stop it. In response a warning window appears. and imported to each other NE in the network. Alarm profiles are part of the data base and are thus backed up when a data base back-up is done. User Manual 381 . all severity entries are erased by setting them back to be Default. This instruction describes how to export an alarm profile to an external storage place. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Ensure that you have access to a remote file server that the NE can reach. Select Yes to continue the reset. It is not necessary to export an alarm profile in order to back it up.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential 382 User Manual . FSP 3000R7 R10. In response.Monitoring Faults Step 3 From the Main Menu. select Fault -> Alarm Profile.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the Alarm Profile window appears. Step 4 Select the Manage Profiles tab. with the Active Profile tab active.

ALP Download the alarm profile file to a remote file server by selecting the Download button and entering the required information. See “How to Step 8 FSP 3000R7 R10. Double-click the NE in the Managed Elements pane. NE IP address. This instruction describes how to import an alarm profile to an NE. Step 6 Select Yes to start the backup. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Download Files to the NE” on p. For example: F7008020_080905_1246_192_168_165_195.3 80000014705 Issue: B. software package version number. 453 for guidance on using this window. date (yymmdd). In response the progress of the copying is displayed in the lower. and is built up by the following elements: F7. End of Procedure How to Import a Alarm Profile An alarm profile can be exported from one NE. time (hhmm).Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs Step 5 Select Backup to move a copy of the alarm profile file to the file download area of the NE. move the alarm profile from the remote file server to a safe storage place. Step 9 If required. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Move the file that you wish to import to a remote file server that the NE can reach. left corner of the Manage Profiles tab. The file name has the extension ALP. User Manual 383 . and imported to each other NE in the network. This allows you to apply the same severity changes to all NEs in a network. so you later can import it to other NEs. In response a warning window appears. Step 7 Select the alarm profile that now is in the NE File Area list. and activate it.

the alarm profile will appear in the NE File Area list. select Fault -> Alarm Profile. Step 4 Select the Manage Profiles tab.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 384 User Manual . When the download is complete. See “How to Download Files to the NE” on p. FSP 3000R7 R10. the Alarm Profile window appears. 453 for guidance.Monitoring Faults Step 3 From the Main Menu. with the Active Profile tab active. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 5 Select Download to move a copy of the alarm profile file from the remote file server to the file download area of the NE.

Step 9 FSP 3000R7 R10. In response the progress of the transfer is displayed in the lower. date (yymmdd). left corner of the Manage Profiles tab. Download the alarm profile file to a remote file server by selecting the Download button and entering the required information. In response the progress of the transfer is displayed in the lower. software package version number. and is built up by the following elements: F7. See “How to Download Files to the NE” on p. Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Select Yes to start the transfer. Step 7 Transfer the alarm profile into the standby file area on the NE by selecting Install. NE IP address. time (hhmm).Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs Step 6 Select the correct alarm profile file in the NE File Area list. In response a warning window appears. Step 10 Make the alarm profile in the standby area active in the active area by selecting Activate. Ensure that the alarm profile now can be seen in the Active alarm profile section. Step 8 Select Yes to start the transfer. For example: F7008020_080905_1246_192_168_165_195.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The alarm profile has now been imported and activated on the NE.ALP The version number and creation date can in addition to the file name be used to identify the correct version. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Ensure that the alarm profile now is present in the Standby alarm profile section. 453 for guidance on using this window. Only alarm profiles that are in the Active area are active. User Manual 385 . In response a warning window appears. The file name has the extension ALP. left corner of the Manage Profiles tab.

move the alarm profile from the remote file server to a safe storage place. 386 User Manual . The FCPF raises alarms only after being present for a configurable amount of time (Alarm Activation Time). i. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The frequency of a single alarm event shall not be higher than 1 second.e. It becomes effective for all modules within 60 seconds but is non-service affecting (NSA). To be able to reconstruct actions on system wide parameters. In response. normally it is not necessary to change the factory default values.Monitoring Faults Step 14 If required. It clears them only after they are gone for the configured amount of time (Alarm Deactivation Time).e. so you later can import it to other NEs. End of Procedure How to Set the Timer for the Fault Cause Persistency Filter This instruction describes how to configure the activation and deactivation times of the fault cause persistency filter (FCPF). Requirements: FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B. However. the sum of activation and deactivation times shall always be > 1 second in order to prevent toggling alarms. changes to these soak periods will be recorded in the database change log. i. These configurable FCPF soak periods will take effect system wide. concerning all modules of that NE. Procedure Step 1 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. the Information pane displays.

3 80000014705 Issue: B.5 seconds. the Modify Operation window appears. Step 3 Select the Modify button. The alarm de-activation time is configurable between 0 .10 seconds with granularity of 500 ms. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 4 Enter the new alarm activation time in the Alarm Activation Time field. Step 5 Enter the new alarm de-activation time in the Alarm Deactivation Time field. In response. The default value for the alarm activation time is 2.10 seconds with granularity of 500 ms. In response. The alarm activation time is configurable between 0 . User Manual 387 . FSP 3000R7 R10. all available information about the system is displayed in the System pane.Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs Step 2 Select the System tab in the Parameters pane. The default value for the alarm activation time is 10 seconds.

thirty-one 24 hours records and fifty-two 1 week records. 398 “How to Print Historic Performance Records” on p. representing a 1 day. Information about Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) can also be found in the FSP3000R7 Detailed System Description. Element Manager provides thresholds that can be set for physical layer performance measurements. However. The results of the monitoring are logged in records with recording intervals of 15 minutes. In addition. so that an alert (Threshold Crossing Alert) is generated in the case a performance measurement crosses this threshold (see “How to Configure TCA Thresholds” on p. 321). 400 “How to View Physical Layer Measurements” on p. 1 month and 1 year history respectively. This includes information about which performance parameters are monitored for each layer and each module. and at the data layer for ports and services.Monitoring Performance Step 6 Select OK to apply the changes. 400 “How to View Thresholds for Threshold Crossing Alerts” on p. The following topics are provided: “How to View Channel Performance per NE” on p. 400 “How to View Physical Layer Measurements” on p. 392 “How to View Reconfigurable Filter Performance” on p. They are thus only viewable as instantaneous measurements. The Network Element stores the last ninety-six 15 minutes records. Performance monitoring is available for all active modules. the different types of performance monitoring are not available for all modules. 395 “How to Reset Performance Records” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 24 hours or 1 week for physical layer monitoring and in intervals of 15 minutes and 24 hours for data layer monitoring. the FSP3000R7 provides instant measurements of some physical layer parameters that are not logged in records. 389 “How to View Single Channel Performance” on p. or Cancel to discard them. descriptions of each performance parameter and a detailed description of what information is logged in the records. A detailed description of performance management in the FSP3000R7 can be found in the FSP3000R7 Detailed System Description. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . 390 “How to View ROADM Performance” on p. 402 388 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. 399 “How to Export Historic Performance Records” on p. End of Procedure Monitoring Performance The FSP3000R7 supports monitoring of performance at the physical layer for modules and ports. This functionality is an aid for the person responsible for monitoring performance.

The options and sections that appear in this window.3 80000014705 Issue: B. this can be 15 minutes or 24 hours for data layer monitoring and 15 minutes. 24 hours or 1 week for physical layer monitoring.Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs How to View Channel Performance per NE This instruction describes how to view instantaneous measurements and performance records for all channels in an NE. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 5 Select the relevant Intervals radio button to specify which interval you want to view records for. depend on whether you are monitoring performance at the physical or data layer. User Manual 389 . The drop-down list is populated from the provisioned channels. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Select the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane hierarchical list. From the Main Menu. the Performance Data window will appear. Channels are identified by their AID address. The available options in this list depend on what is selected for Monitoring Point. select Performance -> Performance Data. by using the Monitoring Type drop-down list. In response. Depending on the selected Monitoring Type. FSP 3000R7 R10. Select which channel to view performance data for. Step 4 Select which type of performance data to view. by using the Monitoring Point drop-down list. the performance records for the selected monitoring point and type are displayed in the Performance Data window. In response.

Procedure Step 1 Select the relevant channel in the Entities pane. Each column contains a performance counter. In response all monitored data is displayed.Monitoring Performance Step 6 Select from the following: • For data layer monitoring: expand the Current Record section to view the current records for this performance data type and expand the Threshold section to view thresholds for the counters. Step 9 To view the historic records in a chart. The counters and thresholds are described in the FSP 3000R7Detailed System Description. To conclude viewing performance records. expand the History Record section. End of Procedure How to View Single Channel Performance This instruction describes how to view instantaneous measurements and performance records for one single channel. 390 User Manual . The time and height of the records is indicated along the relevant axis. In addition there is a column that indicates the validity of each record. select the Table tab in the History Records section. select Close. The counters and thresholds are described in the FSP 3000R7Detailed System Description. A maximum of 16 records are shown in the chart view. This section then displays a table. where each row represents a record of performance counters. with one colored line for each performance counter. In order to update it: Select the Refresh button. Step 7 Step 8 To view the historic records for this performance data type. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential This section then displays a chart. In response. FSP 3000R7 R10. The counters and thresholds are described in the FSP 3000R7Detailed System Description. Step 2 Select the Monitoring tab in the Parameters pane. all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameters pane. Step 10 Step 11 The information in the Performance Data window is not automatically updated. To view the historic records in a table. • For physical layer monitoring: expand the Current section to view the high and low threshold values and current value.3 80000014705 Issue: B. select the Chart tab in the History Records section.

Step 6 Step 7 To view the historic records for this performance data type. where each row represents a record of performance counters. This section then displays a table. The options and sections that appear in this window. • For physical layer monitoring: expand the Current section to view the high and low threshold values and current values. User Manual 391 . Make a decision: • For data layer monitoring: expand the Current Record section to view the current records for this performance data type and expand the Threshold section to view thresholds for the counters. by using the Monitoring Type drop-down list. expand the History Record section.Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs Step 3 Select which type of performance data to view. Each column contains a performance counter. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 4 In the History section. The available options in this list depend on which channel you selected in Step 1. the performance records for the selected monitoring point and type are displayed. The performance counters are described in the FSP 3000R7Detailed System Description. select the Table tab in the History Records section. this can be 15 minutes or 24 hours for data layer monitoring and 15 minutes. To view the historic records in a table. The counters and thresholds are described in the Step 5 FSP 3000R7Detailed System Description. Depending on the selected Monitoring Type.3 80000014705 Issue: B. depend on whether you are monitoring performance at the physical or data layer. FSP 3000R7 R10. In addition there is a column that indicates the validity of each record. select the relevant Intervals radio button to specify which interval you want to view records for. 24 hours or 1 week for physical layer monitoring. In response.

Monitoring Performance Step 8 To view the historic records in a chart. This provides the operator with an overview for monitoring channel power in the Network Element. • To view performance data for the network side channels (VCHs) of a ROADM module: Select the Channel PMs tab. FSP 3000R7 R10. End of Procedure How to View ROADM Performance This instruction describes how to view instantaneous measurements of optical transmit and receive power for the ROADM network channels and associated VCHs. This section then displays a chart. In response the ROADM Performance Data window appears. with one colored line for each performance counter.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 392 User Manual . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Procedure Step 1 Right-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane and select ROADM Performance Data. The performance counters are described in the FSP 3000R7Detailed System Description Step 9 Step 10 The information in the Monitoring tab is not automatically updated. In order to update it: Select the Refresh button. The time and height of the records is indicated along the relevant axis. A maximum of 16 records are shown in the chart view. select Close. To conclude viewing performance records. and continue from Step 3. select the Chart tab in the History Records section. Step 2 Make a decision: • To view performance data for the ports of a ROADM module: Select the Port PMs tab.

3 80000014705 Issue: B. where this is ROADM number 1: MOD-1-6. The window displays the following information: FSP 3000R7 R10. An enabled cross-connection has administrative state In Service. which results in only channels which are used in cross-connections that are enabled being listed. This field shows the item that is being measured. slot 6. slot 6. The value is updated when you select Refresh. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Column Name AID Admin State Description This column shows the AID of the port. For example ROADM of type ROADM-C80 in shelf 1.Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs Step 3 Select which ROADM module to display by using the ROADM Module drop-down list.severity. #1. Step 5 Select which channels to view measurements for by using the Channels drop-down list. ROADM-C70. Only ports that are In Service may be used to create a cross-connection. User Manual 393 . The options are: • • All. regardless of whether they are used in a cross-connection or not. ROADM-C70. This field shows the measured value. Monitoring Type Current Step 4 Select which ROADM module to display by using the ROADM Module drop-down list. In Service. #1. where this is ROADM number 1: MOD-1-6. which results all channels being listed. For example ROADM of type ROADM-C80 in shelf 1. the syntax is OM-<shelf>-<slot>-<Client|Network|Upgrade> This field shows the admin state of the port.

Monitoring Performance Step 6 Select the performance item that you wish to view measurements for by using the Monitoring Type drop-down list. The value UAS indicates that no cross-connection using this channel exists. This field shows the admin state of the cross-connection that uses this channel. The window displays the following information: Column Name AID Frequency CRS Admin State Description This column shows the AID of the port. To conclude viewing performance records. either 50 GHz or 100 GHz spacing. In response. This field shows the channel spacing that is used for each channel. This field shows the configured setpoint for this channel. In order to update it: Select the Refresh button. the specified items are displayed. End of Procedure 394 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. the syntax is OM-<shelf>-<slot>-<Client|Network|Upgrade> This column shows the frequency of the channel. select Close. This field shows the measured power level for the channel.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Channel Spacing Setpoint Current Step 7 Step 8 The information in the window is not automatically updated. allowing traffic to flow through. In Service indicates that the cross-connection is active. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 3 Determine the port that a particular channel is provisioned on by selecting the Channel tab. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE in the NE pane.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Select Performance -> Reconfigurable Filters. In response the Reconfigurable Filters table appears. FSP 3000R7 R10.Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs How to View Reconfigurable Filter Performance This instruction describes how to view optical power monitoring performance for the ports on the reconfigurable filters. User Manual 395 . and how to view information of which channels are provisioned on which ports.

Column Name Frequency [THz] AID Description FSP 3000R7 R10. In response the channel table fills up.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential This shows the frequency of the channel in Terahertz. Select the Port tab. This is the access identifier of the corresponding filter module port that carries the channel. The following information is displayed for each channel. For example: “#1 (3 modules)”. Step 5 Step 6 Make a note of the AID for the relevant channel. 396 User Manual . This list contains all of the supported filter groups (“#1” – “#8”) with the number of CCM modules in the filter group in parenthesis.Monitoring Performance Step 4 Use the Filter Group/ROADM Number drop-down list to select the relevant filter group to display channels for.

The optimal setpoint is determined by the corresponding channel module’s receive power range. This is the target optical transmit power of the channel and is set to achieve the desired launch power for the connected channel module. The following information is displayed for each table entry: Column Name AID Admin State FSP 3000R7 R10. the Reconfigurable Filters table is updated with the power monitoring information of all the ports on this module. Select Close to return to the main menu. This is the current optical power measurement for the port. This indicates whether the entry is transmit optical power (Tx) or receive optical power (Rx).3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response.Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs Step 7 Based on the port AID you found in Step 5. Monitoring Type Active Channels Setpoint [dBm] Current [dBm] Step 8 Step 9 Use the Refresh button to update the table. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Description This is the access identifier of the port entity used by the corresponding filter module. End of Procedure User Manual 397 . This shows the administrative state of the relevant port. This indicates the number of channels provisioned to carry traffic on the port but does not count channels provisioned on the disabled (DSBLD) client ports. use the Module drop-down list to select the corresponding filter module.

by selecting the Current only option. This instruction describes how to reset data-layer performance records. • A reset of both current and historic records for this entity. Step 4 Select Reset. In response the Modify window appears. so as not to include counting during the provisioning period. 398 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. by selecting the Current + historic option. In response. the performance records for the selected monitoring point and type are displayed. In response. all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameters pane. the data-layer performance records should be reset.Monitoring Performance How to Reset Performance Records After provisioning an entity for which data-layer performance monitoring is performed. Procedure Step 1 Select the relevant entity in the Entities pane. Step 5 Use the Data-layer PM reset drop-down list to specify either: • A reset of only the current records for this entity. The available options in this list depend on which entity you selected in Step 1. Step 2 Step 3 Select the Monitoring tab in the Parameters pane.3 80000014705 Issue: B. by using the Monitoring Type drop-down list. In response all monitored data is displayed. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Select which type of data-layer performance records to view.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 5 Step 6 Specify the printer to use and configure the printer properties as appropriate. 389. End of Procedure How to Print Historic Performance Records This instruction describes how to print a performance record. or “How to View Single Channel Performance” on p. Select the Print button. FSP 3000R7 R10. Select Close to finish. If you wish to print a table of records: Select the Table tab in the History section. as described in “How to View Channel Performance per NE” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs Step 6 Select OK to start the reset. the Print window appears. End of Procedure User Manual 399 . In response. Procedure Step 1 Display the relevant performance record. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 If you wish to print a chart of records: Select the Chart tab in the History section. 390. then print.

Step 2 Select the Monitoring tab in the Parameters pane. Specify a name for the file and a location. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 If you wish to export a chart of records: Select the Chart tab in the History section. 400 User Manual . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Procedure Step 1 Select the relevant module or pluggable transceiver in the Entities pane. End of Procedure How to View Physical Layer Measurements This instruction describes how to view measurements at the physical layer for a single entity. If you wish to export a table of records: Select the Table tab in the History section. as described in “How to View Channel Performance per NE” on p. In response all monitored data is displayed. 389 or “How to View Single Channel Performance” on p.Monitoring Performance How to Export Historic Performance Records This instruction describes how to export a performance record. then export.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 390. In response. Select the Save button. all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameters pane. Procedure Step 1 Display the relevant performance record. FSP 3000R7 R10. In response. the Save window appears.

In response. In response all monitored data is displayed. Step 4 User Manual 401 . For example. select Optical Power Rx. Procedure Step 1 Select the relevant port in the Entities pane.Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs Step 3 To view the physical layer measurements. expand the Monitoring section. Step 2 FSP 3000R7 R10. all available information about the port is displayed in the Parameters pane. In response. the stored reference values for this port are displayed in the table. Step 4 The information in the Performance Data window is not automatically updated. select the Reference radio button from the Intervals area. In order to update it: Select the Refresh button.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The displayed measurement types are described in the FSP3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual. End of Procedure How to View Optical Power Reference Values This instruction describes how to view the stored optical power reference values for a port. In the History Records section. Step 3 Use the Monitoring Type drop-down list to select the optical power reference item to view the value for. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Select the Monitoring tab in the Parameters pane.

In order to update it: Select the Refresh button.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 2 Select the Monitoring tab in the Parameters pane. expand the Thresholds section. In response all monitored data is displayed. Step 3 Step 4 To view the thresholds that are applied to the physical measurements to create threshold crossing alerts. End of Procedure How to View Thresholds for Threshold Crossing Alerts This instruction describes how to view the thresholds that are used to create Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) for a single entity. In order to update it: Select the Refresh button. all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameters pane. End of Procedure 402 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . In response. The information in the Performance Data window is not automatically updated.Monitoring Performance Step 5 The information in the window is not automatically updated. Procedure Step 1 Select the relevant module or pluggable transceiver in the Entities pane.

See “Description of States” on p. Step 3 The information in this tab is not automatically updated.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In order to update it: Select the Refresh button. The following topics are provided: “How to View States for an Entity” on p. In response the states for the entity is displayed. 465 for a full description of all the states for FSP3000R7. 404 How to View States for an Entity This instruction describes how to view states for a single entity. 403 “How to View States for an NE” on p. End of Procedure User Manual 403 . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Select the State tab in the Parameters pane. Procedure Step 1 Select the relevant entity in the Entities pane. all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameters pane. which shows whether the entity is prepared for traffic or not.Chapter 5 Monitoring NEs Monitoring States Each entity has an administrative state. Step 2 FSP 3000R7 R10. The operational state shows the actual state of the entity. In response.

From the Main Menu. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. The rows can be expanded and collapsed. Step 3 Step 4 The information in this window is not automatically updated.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In each row. End of Procedure 404 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. the states for one entity are displayed.Monitoring States How to View States for an NE This instruction describes how to view states for all entities in an NE. Select Close to finish viewing states. the State Summary window appears. There is one column for each state and secondary state. In order to update it: Select the Refresh button. select Configuration -> State Summary.

3 80000014705 Issue: B. Updating NE Software in a Network. Transferring Files To/From the NE. as well as an example. which describes how to update application software and FWP for all NEs in a GNE based network. The following topics are provided: FSP 3000R7 R10. which contains the instructions for backing up and restoring the configuration database. which describes how to transfer software package files. Updating Firmware Packages in an NE. About FTP and SCP. Backing Up and Restoring the Database. Rebooting. which describes how to update application software and FWP for all NEs in a network. Updating NE Software in a GNE-based Network. which contains instructions for updating FWP on an NE. database backup files or alarm profile files by downloading or uploading them. which gives a brief overview of what the FTP protocol is. User Manual 405 . top-level instruction for moving the necessary files to and from an FTP server. which describes how to reboot the NE and how to make a cold and warm start of a module.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs This section contains instructions on how to maintain software on Network Elements as well as how to back up and restore the Network Element configurations in the internal database. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential About Software and Database Files. which describes software and database files and how updating of these is handled on the Network Element.

It starts with 1 and continues into letters in alphabetical sequence. The NCU software is the part of the NE software that runs on the NCU. Z is increased for maintenance releases and can be a number from 1 to 9 or a letter from A to Z. The following sections are provided: “The Software Package” on p. • The NCU software files. 409 “NE Software Version versus File Names” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Each NCU type supports a different 406 User Manual . It is named F70XXYYZ. It is a software generic and contains all code that runs on an NE. and are increased for major and minor releases. Figure 23: Software Package FSP 3000R7 R10. It includes the Linux operating system and environment and the FSP 3000R7 applications. 409 “Software Downgrade and Switchback” on p. 408 “Software and Database Compatibility” on p. 411 The Software Package The NE software is the complete software load for the NE.YY.CON and contains the following information: o o o the names of the NE software files with their version number and size the names of all firmware package (FWP) files in the FWP set and the FWP version the type of NCU that each FWP is supported by. The XX and YY represent numbers between 1 and 99.About Software and Database Files About Software and Database Files This section gives background information about how NE software packages and database files are handled on the network element. The release number syntax is XX. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The NE software is a package containing the following files: • The configuration file.Z. 406 “Handling of Files” on p. This file is interpreted for the correct transferal of all required software. The NE software version number is equal to the release number. respectively. if necessary.

The FWP set files are named as follows: o o S70XXYYZ.PGM FSP 3000R7 R10. These FWP files are made available through the Customer Portal at http://www.PGM for all other NCU types • The firmware package (FWP) set files. Each NCU type supports a different set of modules. except encryption modules.The FWP set contains the individual FWPs for all modules that are supported by the NE software.advaoptical.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs set of modules. The user can select which FWP to activate on the individual modules. two software files are provided. It contains code for all processors on the module as well as FPGA code. To save space and to avoid overloading the NCUs. These files are not included in the regular software package. Each FWP is the software that runs on a particular module type. To save space and to avoid overloading the NCUs. The FWP set file is named as follows: o C70XXYYZ.com/ and they are only retrievable for those customers who have ordered encryption hardware modules.PGM for the NCU-II O70XXYYZ. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 407 .The NCU software files are named as follows: o o H70XXYYZ.PGM for the NCU-II T70XXYYZ.PGM for all other NCU types • The firmware package (FWP) set files for encryption modules. two FWP files are provided.

and the active area becomes the standby area. Thus. These files all originate from an NE software package. It is used to download software and database files from external storage to the NE. the active or standby area contains a database framework with default values. The standby area originates from the default factory installation or from a restoration of a backed up database. the FWP files for each module type. The active area contains the files that are currently used by the NE. the previously active version is contained in the standby area until a different file version is installed in the standby area. and is cleared on reboot.About Software and Database Files Handling of Files The NE software and database files are stored in two areas on the NCU: in the active and in the standby area. The file area is an intermediate storage area located on a RAM disk (RDISK) on the NCU. In addition. The NE starts using the new versions when the contents of the standby area are activated. The standby software files and database files can be activated individually. and to upload backup database files to external storage. 408 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. The standby area is used to prepare a change in software and/or database versions by installing the new file versions to the standby area. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Figure 24: Overview of Software and Database File Handling The NE software in the active or standby area consists of one NCU software file. The database file in the active area contains the current configuration of the running system. and the configuration file.3 80000014705 Issue: B. which means that the standby area becomes the active area.

When a software update is performed. Please consult ADVA Optical Networking Technical Services if you are contemplating such an action. Database backup files can alternatively be stored in a file area on the SCU. all previous settings can be reused. Downgrade of software and using the database of a newer version is not allowed (Figure 28). and vice versa. By switching to the formerly active database as well. in which the settings of the equipment are not altered by it. It will therefore not have an impact on a running system. SCP uses Secure Socket Layer (SSH). Thus the switchback can be done without losing connectivity or settings from the database. The NCU-II is an example of this. Refer to the FSP 3000R7 User Guide for help on fixing the problem. with factory default settings only. In order to prevent a database from making service affecting (SA) changes to the installed modules. NEs with an NCU including a 1 GB CompactFlash (CF) installed have an FTP and SSH server on board. an external FTP or SSH server is required to upload files to the NE. Software and Database Compatibility The NE software and database that shall be activated on an NE must have the same version. FSP 3000R7 R10. The auxiliary database uses the default IP address. For all other NEs. to restore contact. An auxiliary database would be created. This auxiliary database functions as a security mechanism.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs Downloading and uploading files may be done using File Transfer Protocol (FTP) or Secure Copy (SCP). the first time a software update User Manual 409 . You will have to be on site. It then switches to an auxiliary database. the first step taken by the system is to preserve the former software database. It would result in the creation of an auxiliary database and permanent loss of the database formerly located in the standby area. Services could be affected by this. This requires an SCU with hardware revision 2. but the action is not supported. and restored from this area on the SCU. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Software Downgrade and Switchback Downgrade and switchback are subject to the following: • Switchback to the former software is always possible after an update (Figure 26).3 80000014705 Issue: B. and reconnect to the NE via a serial connection. In addition. the version of the database is automatically updated to the version of the NE software.01 or higher. and thus management contact with the NE will be lost. • • During activation of a software update. a situation in which functionality of the software is not supported by the database could arise. Download and activation of an older software is possible. the NCU detects when it is inserted into a new network element. An external FTP server must support passive FTP mode. which is a valid update path. as well as when a new CompactFlash (CF) has been inserted. The format update is necessary for the database to match the features of the new software version. This is done by copying the former database to the active area and migrating its format to the new software version in the process. Otherwise.

Figure 26 illustrates this. when the software versions in the Active and Standby areas are switched.3 80000014705 Issue: B. First-time Activation If you decide to use the former software after already using the new software. Figure 27 illustrates this.About Software and Database Files is activated. after a software update you can switch back to the former software by activating it (activate STBY). the former software including its database file is fully intact. Figure 27: NE Software Activation Keeping Current Database 410 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. the former software database is copied to the standby area. In other words. it is possible to keep the currently used database (in the Active area) for the new software while not touching the database in the Standby area. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Figure 26: Switchback to Previous NE Software and Database However. Figure 25 illustrates this. Figure 25: NE Software Update.

storing it on the SCU is advantageous. It is possible to setup automatic database backup to the SCU or to a remote file server. with factory default settings only. the XXYYZ in the file name indicates the version of that file. but it is always possible for the NCU to reach the SCU. if the SCU has hardware revision 2.2. If there is a problem with the current database. Since the backed up database file contains the settings for all the NE’s IP connections.PGM.PGM.2 as an example.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs Downgrade of software and using the database of a newer version is not allowed. FSP 3000R7 R10. Using R9. Figure 28 illustrates this. O7009021. An auxiliary database would be created. Here no available compatible database can be found and thus an auxilary database must be used. After one maintenance NCU software update and two FWP set updates the release number would be 9. and T7009021. S7009021. The backup database file can be uploaded to a remote file server for safe storage there. you may not be able to connect to the remote file server. will not be recognized after a downgrade to an User Manual 411 .01 or later. the release 9. and then at a later time restore the database to an NE.3 80000014705 Issue: B.PGM.1 NE software package consists of the following files: F7009021.4.CON. H7009021. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The release number of the NE software package is updated when the version number of any of the other files in the NE software package is updated. and always as a precaution before you do any updates to software on the NE.2. A backup database file that was created and stored on the SCU while running software release 9. Figure 28: NE Software Switchback With Auxiliary Database NE Software Version versus File Names For all NE software files.2 or later. If you enable automatic database restore then the database backup file on the SCU will automatically be restored to the NCU if you need to replace it. Backing Up and Restoring the Database It is possible to back up the current database. and uses the same syntax as for the release number. Backing up the database should be done regularly. or it can be stored on a file area on the SCU.

453 412 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. but the older software can not recognize it and therefore will not display it. 421 The above sections are supported by the following sections in Transferring Files To/From the NE: “How to Upload Files from the NE” on p. This is outside the scope of this User Manual. 415 “How to Restore the Database” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 413 “How to Set Up Scheduled Backup of the Database” on p. 419 “How to Enable Automatic Database Restoration” on p.The following topics are provided: “How to Manually Back Up the Database” on p.Backing Up and Restoring the Database older software release. for information see the FSP 3000R7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual. 448 “How to Download Files to the NE” on p. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . It is possible to restore a database from a source NE to a target NE. This section contains instructions for backing up and restoring the database. The backup database file will still be present on the SCU.

This section displays the filename. Requirements In order to store the database backup file on the SCU. In addition it displays any comment that exists for this database file. This section displays the database files in the file area. In response. you should make sure that it is part of a regular backup plan. and viewing the file User Manual 413 . Standby software database. and store it either in an external storage place. NE File Area. it does not support storage of a backup database file.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs How to Manually Back Up the Database This instruction describes how to manually back up the database.01. size and creation date for the database file that is in the standby area. the NE must have an SCU with hardware revision 2. If you have an SCU with hardware revision older than 2. size and creation date for the database file that is in the active area. version number.01 or higher.3 80000014705 Issue: B. the Backup/Restore window is displayed. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the NE to back up the database for. or in the file area on the SCU. ver- • • sion number. This section displays the database files of either the file area on the NCU (RDISK) or on the SCU. If you store the database backup file on an external storage place. In addition it displays any comment that exists for this database file. This section displays the filename. FSP 3000R7 R10. select Configuration -> Backup/Restore. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The Backup/Restore window is divided into three sections: • Active software database. From the Main Menu. in the Managed Elements pane. in a tabular form. This information can be found on the SCU’s Inventory tab in the Parameter pane.

01 or newer. you use the Location radio button to display either files in the RDISK area or on the SCU. If the backup database file was made and stored on the SCU while running software release 9. the file size and the time the file was placed in the file area. select the Backup button in the Active Software database section. If the database backup file is not visible.Backing Up and Restoring the Database area on the SCU is not possible. left corner of the Backup/Restore window. Progress is shown in the lower. The backup database file is however in place.0. 414 User Manual . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 5 Confirm that you want to back up the database by selecting Yes. this section displays the file name. and the software running now is an older release. This can be useful when keeping track of this database file through backup and restore at a later time. Step 6 Verify that the database backup file is now in the NE File Area table. FSP 3000R7 R10. the database file is copied either to the NCU’s file area or on the SCU. Step 4 If you have an SCU installed with hardware revision 2.3 80000014705 Issue: B. decide from the following: • To back up the database to the NE File Area (RDISK). Otherwise. In response. If you have an SCU installed with hardware revision 2. select Refresh to update the Backup/Restore window. if your SCU hardware is older than 2. The name of the backup file uniquely identifies the NE it belongs to.1. In response. select the Backup button in the Active Software database section.DBS The date and time is written in the format yymmdd_hhmm. either by download or by backup.01 or newer.2 or later. The syntax is: F7<version number>_<date>_<time>_<IP address>. • To back up the database to the SCU. and indicates the time the file was placed in the file area. For each backup database file that has been placed in the file area. a Backup confirmation window matching your choice is displayed. select the Backup to SCU button in the Active Software database section. add a comment to the database file in the Active software database section by selecting the Edit Comment button. Step 3 Optionally. the database file will not be visible in this section.

where XXYYZ reflects the FSP3000R7 product release number. This means that you may choose to set up the schedule. Requirements • • The NE must have access to an FTP or SSH server (depending on which method is chosen) for the backup to an external storage location.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs Step 7 Make a decision: • If you have backed up the database file to SCU. This information can be found on the SCU’s Inventory tab in the Parameter pane PS User Manual 415 . which can be different from the Element Manager’s time zone. but postpone enabling it. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential This instruction describes how to set up scheduled backup of the database.DBS. Make a note of the database backup file name.01 or higher. the NE must have an SCU with hardware revision 2. If you store the database backup file in an external storage location.1 the file name is F701011. 448. with storage of the file in one of the following places: • • an external storage location in the file area on the SCU The file is named F70XXYYZ. Note The schedule you set up must be enabled. go to Step 8 Everything in the file area on the NCU is deleted when the NE is rebooted. • If you have backed up the database file to the NE’s file area. Follow the description in “How to Upload Files from the NE” on p. you should make sure that it is part of a regular backup plan. while files stored on the SCU are not. Close the Backup/Restore window by selecting the Close button.DBS. Select the newly created database backup file in the NE File Area.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Upload the database file from the file area to the storage place you decided on in Step 8. either an external storage location or on the SCU. For example for product release R10. The date and time you define in the schedule are in the NE’s time zone. which is displayed in the NE File Area table.1. Decide where to upload the backup database file to. In order to store the database backup file on the SCU. go to Step 12. Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 End of Procedure How to Set Up Scheduled Backup of the Database FSP 3000R7 R10.

the Automatic Backup window is displayed. From the Main Menu.Backing Up and Restoring the Database Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the NE to back up the database for. In response.3 80000014705 Issue: B. in the Managed Elements pane. If you decided to set up backup to a remote server in Step 3: Enter the following parameters to enable the NE to connect to the remote server: a) Select Modify in the Remote File Server Settings section. Step 3 Step 4 Make a choice between setting up scheduled backup of the database to a remote file server or to the SCU. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . 416 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. b) Select the file transfer protocol to use from the Protocol Copy drop-down list. select Configuration -> Automatic Backup.

h) Select OK to apply your entries. a successful IP communication relies on the availability of routes for these IP addresses in all the routers along the path between the IP hosts. If the network operator has configured his network to route the IP range in which the IP addresses of the physical IP interfaces reside. Step 5 Define the schedule for backup to the SCU or a remote file server. • Select System IP if the system IP address should be used. FSP 3000R7 R10. or Cancel to abort them. Some network operators may configure their network in such a way that only the IP range in which the System IP addresses reside will be routed through their network. In this case it must be made sure that the FSP 3000R7 NE uses the System IP to identify itself as the source in the IP header of packets it is sending. the default IP address as chosen by the IP stack can be used. select the row SCU. User Manual 417 . • • If you decided on SCU in Step 3. select the row Remote File Server. g) Enter the password for the user account on the FTP or SSH server in the Password field. It depends on the remote server whether the case of this entry as entered is taken into account before validation by the remote server. Since both IP hosts identify each other by the IP addresses in the IP header of the IP packets. the NE's FTP or SCP client identifies itself with an IP address. Use the Own IP drop-down list to specify the IP address to use in the IP header as follows: • Select Default-IP if the IP address that the IP stack would choose by default should be used (this is the IP address of the interface through which the packet is sent).3 80000014705 Issue: B.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs c) During a file transfer. If you decided on remote file server in Step 3. It depends on the remote server whether the case of this entry as entered is taken into account before validation by the remote server. Do this by selecting the appropriate row in the Backup to column in the Schedule table. Otherwise leave this field empty. In a bi-directional IP communication the two IP hosts involved need to be able to reach each other. e) If the database backup file shall be stored in a sub-directory of the FTP or SSH server’s root directory. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential d) Enter the IP address of the FTP or SSH remote server in the IP Address field. enter that sub-directory in the Path Name field. f) Enter the user account name for accessing the FTP or SSH file server into the User Name field.

3 80000014705 Issue: B. e) Enable this schedule by selecting Yes in the Enable Schedulerfield. • Select Add Timestamp to embed a time stamp in the file name. Step 7 Define the backup schedule as follows: a) Enter the interval between each backup in the Schedule DB Interval field.DBS.1 NE with IP address 192.DBS.Backing Up and Restoring the Database Step 6 Select Modify.168. The schedules are by default set to No (disabled). f) Select OK to apply your entries. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . c) Enter the time that the first backup shall take place in the DB Start Time field. The interval options are one to six days. or Cancel to abort them. The time you enter is in the NE’s time zone. month and day (YY-MM-DD). a backup file taken on Aug 19th 2010 at 12:15 for an R10. minutes and seconds (HH:MM:SS). b) Enter the date that the first backup shall take place in the DB Start Date field. the NE’s IP address is embedded using the syntax <file name>_<YYMMDD_HHMM>_<IP address>. In response the Schedule Remote File Server Backup or Schedule SCU Backup window appears. Use the format year. d) Specify whether the database backup file name shall embed a time stamp or not by using the File Name Timestamp drop-down list. 418 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. In addition to a timestamp. It is also only available when you have completed the remote file server specification in Step 4.154. For example. • Select Omit Timestamp to omit a time stamp in the file name. The date you enter is in the NE’s time zone.220 gets the name F701011_100819_1215_192_168_165_220. Use the format hours. each week or every second week. This example shows the Schedule Remote File Server Backup window. This field is only available when you are setting up scheduled database backup to a remote file server.

If the database backup file is stored in an external storage place. only the database version in the Standby Area is activated. Step 8 to find out whether the database backup file is stored in an external storage place or on the SCU. download the database backup file as described in “How to Download Files to the NE” on p. select Refresh to update it if necessary. Select the NE you want to restore the database for. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 2 Step 3 User Manual 419 . Procedure Step 1 Check your notes from How to Manually Back Up the Database. The content of this table is not automatically updated. and then activating the Standby Area. FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 9 Close the Automatic Backup window by selecting the Close button. not the software version. 453. in the Managed Elements pane. This involves placing the backup database file into the Standby Area. When the Standby Area is activated by the database restore facility.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs Step 8 You can check the date that the next backup will take place in the Next backup column of the table in the Schedule section. End of Procedure How to Restore the Database This instruction describes how to restore the database from its storage place.

Compare with the filename you made a note of in How to Manually Back Up the Database. check the All files check box. select one of the following: PS . Step 6 Confirm that you want to install the database to the Standby Area. 420 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. In response. the database file will be copied to the Standby Area. Step 10. the Backup/Restore window is displayed. If you have an SCU with hardware revision older than 2. In response. If the database backup file is located on an external server: Select the RDISK radio button in the NE File Area section. select Configuration -> Backup/Restore. • • If the database backup file is located on the SCU: Select the SCU radio button in the NE File Area section. the Install dialog is displayed. In response.01.Backing Up and Restoring the Database Step 4 From the Main Menu.3 80000014705 Issue: B. it does not support storage of a backup database file. To locate the database backup file. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Verify that the correct database backup file is present in the file area. select the relevant file and then select Delete. and then select the Install button. Note Step 5 Select the correct database backup file in the NE File Area. by selecting Yes. If you need to remove old files.

You can find this information in the Backup/Restore window. Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Ensure that the correct database backup file now is present in the Standby software database section. the database file should appear in the Standby software database section. This feature must be enabled before backing up the old NCU’s database and removing the old NCU. The feature should be disabled after the new NCU is operational. FSP 3000R7 R10. If you wish to Activate the selected database and reboot the NE. a database mismatch alarm will be raised to indicate this. This instruction describes how to enable automatic restoration of a database back-up file stored on the SCU. Step 11 Select Yes to activate the standby database.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs Step 7 Select Refresh to update the Backup/Restore window. it is useful to allow the database back-up file on the SCU to be automatically restored to the replacement NCU when this NCU is inserted in the shelf. Step 13 End of Procedure How to Enable Automatic Database Restoration When replacing an NCU. If the database file in the standby area is not compatible with the currently installed NE software. If the database file that is now installed in the Standby Area is planned to be activated at a later time: Go to Step 13. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 12 Verify that the active and standby database versions have been updated. In response. See the FSP 3000R7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual for a description of how to replace an NCU. Select the Close button to close the Backup/Restore window. select the Activate button.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Automatic database restoration is disabled similarly. User Manual 421 .

Step 5 End of Procedure 422 User Manual .3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response the database related information is displayed in the Parameter pane. FSP 3000R7 R10. In response. Select OK to apply the change.Backing Up and Restoring the Database Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant Network Element in the NE Pane. Step 3 Select the Modify button. select Disable. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 4 Use the Enable Auto Restore drop-down list and select Enable to enable the automatic database restoration. the Modify window appears. or Cancel to discard the change. To disable it. Select the Database tab.

installed in slot A of shelf 1 in the NE. only chained connections of SCUs and ROADMs were supported.5 or later: • If any user-defined thresholds for optical input power on client or network facilities have been set. see “Updating NE Software in a GNE-based Network” on p. If the NE consists of multiple shelves.0 to 7. and they are outside the specifications: They are reset to new default values.1. PS Do not reseat the NCU during NE software installation.2. FSP 3000R7 R10. A working NCU. If the existing optical input power thresholds on the client or network facilities are outside the specifications of the pluggable transceivers: They are reset to new default values. for example because the maintenance time slot is too small. In releases prior to Release 8.1.0. but you for some reason are not able to finish the process. 434 describes how to fall back to the previous NE software and database version. For networks which use a Gateway Network Element (GNE). including firmware for the modules.1. the following is required for a successful FWP update: o • • o Correctly cabled SCUs.1. User Manual 423 . The FTP server must support passive mode.2 ring connected SCUs and ROADMs are supported. they are accepted. • Sufficient free space in the NE’s file area. This leads to two effects when updating an NCU software version <7.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs Updating NE Software in a Network This section describes how to update all software in a network. 435. you may need to manually delete old files to ensure that this requirement is met. Although this area is cleared during a reboot. If any NE in the network is running NCU software version previous to 7. The plugs on the SCUs must be provisioned. you need a fall-back solution.3 80000014705 Issue: B. be aware that NCU software versions 7. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential • Requirements • • You must have all files in the NE software package available in the same location. Note In the case that you have started an NE software update. Otherwise. Starting from Release 8. The NE software package must be located on a remote file server or computer where an FTP or SSH server is running which the NE can reach. a different approach must be used.x and later are able to handle optical input power thresholds according to the specification of the pluggable transceivers. “Switching Back to Previous NE Software Version” on p. In this case.

follow the update instructions in the Provisioning and Operations Manual published for that release. Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 End of Procedure The following subsections are provided: “How to Install NE Software” on p. 425 “Activating the NE Software” on p. 425. Backup the NE database.Updating NE Software in a Network • The valid update path to R10.1. 428 “Switching Back to Previous NE Software Version” on p. Store it away from the NE.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 429. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select an NE in the network in the Managed Elements pane. Activate the NE software as described in “How to Schedule Activation of the NE Software” on p.2 requires that the NEs are already running R9. 434 424 User Manual . In order to update from an older release to R9. 413. Step 5 Update the individual firmware packages for the relevant modules/module types. 413. Step 3 Step 4 Install the NE software as described in “How to Install NE Software” on p. This is a precaution in case something goes wrong when updating the NE software. as described in “Updating Firmware Packages in an NE” on p. Backup the NE database as described in “How to Manually Back Up the Database” on p. See “How to Change Equipment Capabilities” on p. Repeat Step 1 to Step 8 for each NE in the network. if relevant. as described in “How to Manually Back Up the Database” on p. 435. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 6 Check if the equipment capability of any modules on the NE should be increased in order to access all new features supported by the NE software version (refer to the release notes).1. For security reasons you may want to disable the FTP client. 364 for guidance on changing the equipment capability.3 or later. FSP 3000R7 R10. This activation also makes the individual firmware packages (FWP) available for installation. FTP server or SSH server.

NCU software and FWP set file versions that are stored in the active and standby areas of the NE. In response. From the Main Menu. GNE related information is provided where necessary. as well as an optional descriptive comment. the Software Control start window is displayed. This includes downloading the software files to the NE and installing them in the Standby Area. Note PS User Manual 425 . select Configuration -> Software Control. the NE software is already installed and you can stop this procedure. This description also applies to installing NE software that is located in a gateway NE (GNE) file area (RDISK) to an NE. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Select the NE in the Managed Elements pane. The date and time each the software packages where installed and activates are also displayed. FSP 3000R7 R10. If the NE software package version you wish to update is listed in the STBY Program Versions (Standby) field. See “How to Enable/Disable the FTP Client” on p. <FWP set version>).Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs How to Install NE Software This instruction describes how to install the NE software. Ensure that the FTP client is enabled. 241.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The Active Software Package and Standby Software Package sections display an overview of the NE software. The syntax used is: <NE software version> (<NCU software version>.

In response.Updating NE Software in a Network Step 4 Select the Install Software Package radio button. the Download window appears. 426 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. the Install Software Package page appears. and then select Next to continue. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . In response. Step 5 Install the new NE software files to the Standby Area by selecting the Install from External button. This window remembers the entries which were used the last time a download was made to this NE.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 8 Specify which file to download as follows: a) Enter the IP address of the NE software package location into the Server field. FSP 3000R7 R10. see “About FTP and SCP” on p. The user must therefore ensure that the known hosts table includes the SCP host (see “How to Configure Known Hosts” on p. Use the Protocol drop down list. 459 for a brief overview. the default IP address as chosen by the IP stack can be used.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs Step 6 Specify which file transfer protocol to use when downloading the NE software to the target NE. c) Enter the name of the NE software configuration file (F70XXYYZ. If you are not familiar with FTP or SCP. the transfer will fail. a successful IP communication relies on the availability of routes for these IP addresses in all the routers along the path between the IP hosts. If the network operator has configured his network to route the IP range in which the IP addresses of the physical IP interfaces reside. In a bi-directional IP communication the two IP hosts involved need to be able to reach each other. the NE's FTP or SCP client identifies itself with an IP address. Step 7 During a file transfer. In this case it must be made sure that the FSP 3000R7 NE uses the System IP to identify itself as the source in the IP header of packets it is sending.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The options are FTP or SCP. Select System IP if the system IP address should be used. SCP is a more secure protocol. 242). If the SCP host is unknown. Use the Own IP drop-down list to specify the IP address to use in the IP header as follows: • • Select Default-IP if the IP address that the IP stack would choose by default should be used (this is the IP address of the interface through which the packet is sent).CON) into the File Name field. User Manual 427 . Some network operators may configure their network in such a way that only the IP range in which the System IP addresses reside will be routed through their network. enter that sub-directory in the Path Name field. b) If the NE software package is located in a sub-directory of the FTP or SSH server root directory. Since both IP hosts identify each other by the IP addresses in the IP header of the IP packets. Otherwise leave this field empty.

Step 10 Select OK to start the installation. software application and FWP set. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential If there is little storage space left in the file area (RDISK). This may take up to 30 minutes. Whether the case (lower/upper) of a user name or password as entered is taken into account depends on the remote server. During the process. Step 11 When the installation is complete. the user names and passwords for accounts on an FSP 3000R7 NE are converted to all uppercase before they are saved or validated. enter the user account name and password to gain access to the server. In response to OK. it will not take the case of the user name and password as entered into account. Installed File (Standby) section will display the versions of the software package. account user names and passwords are case-sensitive. add a comment to the NE software file in the Installed (Standby) section by selecting the Change Comment button and writing a comment in the Modify window that appears. Close the Software Control wizard by selecting Finish. Please refer to the manual of the remote server in question. or by scheduling the activation. Go back to the Software Control main page by selecting Back.g. If this remote server is running on an FSP 3000R7 NE (e. the transfer and installation of the NE software files will start. After interpretation the correct NCU software file as well as the FWP set will be transferred and installed. Instead. in combination with using the All files check box to see all file types. Step 13 Step 14 End of Procedure Activating the NE Software The NE software that is stored in the Standby Area can be activated manually. Step 12 Optionally.Updating NE Software in a Network Step 9 In the Login and Password fields. delete old files using Delete or Delete All. software application and FWP set. due to TL1 standards restrictions. verify that the standby area now contains the correct versions of the software package. depending on your bandwidth. The following sections are provided: How to Schedule Activation of the NE Software 428 User Manual . you will see progress messages in the bottom left corner of the Install Software Package page. FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The configuration file will be transferred and interpreted. this can prevent a successful download. acting as a GNE). or Cancel to discard your entries and return to the Install Software Package page. For most other remote servers. In that case. The Install Software Package page.

PS FSP 3000R7 R10. 425 and install the correct software package. The date and time you define in the schedule are in the NE’s time zone. Note Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Select the NE to activate software for in the Managed Elements pane. The date and time of when each of the software packages were installed or activated are also displayed. It is possible to define a schedule. as well as an optional descriptive comment. The Active Software Package and Standby Software Package sections display an overview of the NE software. select Configuration -> Software Control. From the Main Menu. it repeats the software version and also contains the date when this version had been introduced.3 80000014705 Issue: B. This is the version of the software that will be installed if the standby area is activated. Ensure that the standby area contains the NE software version you need. return to “How to Install NE Software” on p. In response.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs How to Manually Activate the NE Software How to Schedule Activation of the NE Software This instruction describes how to schedule activation of the NE software that is stored in the Standby Area. which can be different from the Element Manager’s time zone. b) Check the comment attached to the software package in the field Comment. <FWP set version>). Follow these steps: a) Check the version of the software package in the Standby Software Package section. The syntax used is: <NE software version> (<NCU software version>. and FWP set file versions that are stored in the active and standby areas of the NE. NCU software. Unless edited. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 4 User Manual 429 . c) If it is not the correct version. the Software Control start window is displayed. but postpone activation of the schedule to a later time.

month and day (YY-MM-DD). Step 7 Enter the date the application software shall be activated in the Activation Date field. Step 6 Select Modify to specify when and how activation shall take place. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . 430 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Use the format hours. The default date occurs in the past. minutes and seconds (HH:MM:SS). In response the Activate Standby Software Package page is displayed. so no activation will take place until these settings have been modified.Updating NE Software in a Network Step 5 Select the Scheduled Activation of Standby Software Package radio button and select Next. The date you enter is in the NE’s time zone. This window shows the default settings for when and how an activation will take place.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Use the format year. The time you enter is in the NE’s time zone. Step 8 Enter the time the application software shall be activated in the Activation Time field.

At the specified date and time (in the NE’s time zone). You are returned to the Software Control window. by using the Scheduled DBRST drop-down list: • Select Keep Current Database if the configuration values in the currently active database shall be used together with the updated application software. Scheduled Activation page. Follow the steps: a) Open the Software Control window again. check that the NE is now running the new NE software version. the NE’s IP address will change. This is only relevant if you are switching back to the previous NE software version and you need to reset the database. The activation and reboot process might take up to 5 minutes and the network connection will be lost. The scheduled activation will not take place until it has been activated. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 12 If you have activated the scheduled activation. If the factory default IP address is not within the same IP network as the computer running the Element Manager. the Element Manager will lose contact with the NE. Step 10 Step 11 FSP 3000R7 R10. as this selection ensures that a NE software and database switchback is always possible.3 80000014705 Issue: B. You will then have to be on site to re-connect to the NE again. This is the default setting. As a result. • Select Set Database to Factory Default if the currently active database shall be replaced by the factory default database. The connection is recovered again as soon as the NE is rebooted and ready for operation. the NE software will be activated and the NE rebooted. or Cancel to cancel them. b) Find the NE software version in the Active Software Package section. Set the Scheduled Activation field to Yes to activate the schedule. Note Step 13 End of Procedure PS User Manual 431 .Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs Step 9 Specify what shall happen with the database when the application software is activated. or No to leave it un-activated. select Finish to Close the Software Control wizard. Select OK to apply your entries. When the NE is ready for operation again.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Select the NE to activate software for in the Managed Elements pane. 432 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. <FWP set version>). The Active Software Package and Standby Software Package sections display an overview of the NE software.Updating NE Software in a Network How to Manually Activate the NE Software This instruction describes how to manually activate the NE software that is stored in the Standby Area. The syntax used is: <NE software version> (<NCU software version>. Select the Activate Standby Software Package radio button and select Next. and FWP set file versions that are stored in the active and standby areas of the NE.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response the Activate Standby Software Package page is displayed. In response. From the Main Menu. The date and time of when each of the software packages were installed or activated are also displayed. NCU software. the Software Control start window is displayed. as well as an optional descriptive comment. select Configuration -> Software Control.

This is the version of the software that will be installed if the standby area is activated. b) Find the NE software version in the Active Software Package section. When the NE is ready for operation again. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Specify what shall happen with the database when the application software is activated. the Element Manager will lose contact with the NE. by selecting the Activate and Reboot button. it repeats the software version and also contains the date when this version had been introduced. If the factory default IP address is not within the same IP network as the computer running the Element Manager. the NE’s IP address will change. return to “How to Install NE Software” on p. The activation and reboot process might take up to 5 minutes and the network connection will be lost. • Select Set Database to Factory Default if the currently active database shall be replaced by the factory default database.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs Step 4 Ensure that the standby area contains the NE software version you need. Select Yes in the Confirmation window that appears. 425 and install the correct software package.3 80000014705 Issue: B. You will then have to be on site to re-connect to the NE again. c) If it is not the correct version. and reboot the NE. as this selection ensures that a NE software and database switchback is always possible. Step 5 FSP 3000R7 R10. b) Check the comment attached to the software package in the field Comment. Step 6 Note Step 7 Step 8 End of Procedure PS Close the Software Control wizard by selecting Finish. User Manual 433 . As a result. the specified database values. by using the When this version is Activated drop-down list: • Select Keep Current Database if the configuration values in the currently active database shall be used together with the updated application software. Follow the steps: a) Open the Software Control window again. check that the NE is now running the new NE software version. This is only relevant if you are switching back to the previous NE software version and you need to reset the database. The connection is recovered again as soon as the NE is rebooted and ready for operation. Follow these steps: a) Check the version of the software package in the Standby Software Package section. This is the default setting. Unless edited. Activate the selected software file.

the former software and the belonging database file is intact in the standby area. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential PS . downgrade the individual firmware packages for the relevant modules/module types. 435. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 If you are not already logged in. In this case the content of this area is the former NE software version. you may switch back to the former NE software. as described in “Updating Firmware Packages in an NE” on p. This procedure describes how to switch back to the previous NE software and database. An activation of NE software always activates the NE software in the standby area. 432.3 80000014705 Issue: B. switch back will not be possible. after a software update you can switch back to the former software by activating the standby area. this final reboot is required. Although the NE was rebooted as a consequence of the NE software activation. The option Use Standby Database secures that the database associated with the former NE software version is restored. Figure 26 illustrates this situation. Even after already using the new software. In other words. Note Step 3 Step 4 End of Procedure 434 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. The activation and reboot process might take up to 5 minutes and the network connection will be lost.Updating NE Software in a Network Switching Back to Previous NE Software Version If you for some reason do not have time to complete an already started NE software update process. Activate the NE software as described in “How to Manually Activate the NE Software” on p. The connection is recovered again as soon as the NE is rebooted and ready for operation If necessary. Reboot the NE to complete the switch-back. If another NE software version has been installed to the standby area in the meantime. and in Step 5 select the option Use Standby Database. log in to the relevant NE.

Instead. In that case follow the procedure described in “Updating NE Software in a Network” on p. on all modules of a specific type at once or all modules in the NE at once. FWP downgrades are always service effecting.1. Only the GNE has visibility of an external file server. FWP updates may be service affecting. Note PS User Manual 435 . Figure 29: GNE-based Network Example FSP 3000R7 R10. in order to update the NE software on the NEs. Updating Firmware Packages in an NE The Element Manager lets you update firmware packages (FWPs) on a single module at a time. the NE software must be downloaded to the GNE’s file area. 423. except for legacy modules. Please read the FSP 3000R7 Provisioning and Operations Manual for a full description.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs Updating NE Software in a GNE-based Network In a Gateway NE (GNE)-based network. the Element Manager cannot be used to update NE software in such a network configuration. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The Element Manager can only be used to perform software updates in this network example if it can reach the NEs. Both the NEs and the GNE then install the NE software from the GNE’s file area. Therefore. If this is not possible. Downgrade to an older FWP is supported. but not to older versions than those valid for R9. an NE only has visibility of the GNE and the other NEs in this network.3 80000014705 Issue: B. use a Telnet or SSH session and the Craft Console.

you will corrupt the module firmware. The user must then perform a protection switch and another update in order to update all modules in the system. This is covered in “How to Update Firmware for Multiple Modules” on p. 436 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. take the necessary precautions for a service hit. As an FWP update can be service affecting. must already be in the active area (activated). the following items are required: • • • • The NE software package.Updating Firmware Packages in an NE The Element Manager allows you to conditionally update. ring connected SCUs and ROADMs are supported. to be done only on the modules with services that are out of service. 437 “How to Update Firmware for Multiple Modules” on p. installed in slot A of shelf 1. specify that the FWP for a module shall be updated as long as this update does not affect any services on the module. then FWP update is not possible. You can. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential PS . Do not remove hardware or power off during a FWP update. 441. The following restrictions apply: • • If an update of NE software or another FWP update is in progress. This means you can allow a FWP update that will affect services.3 80000014705 Issue: B. This is true even if the user specifies that effects on the service is accepted. • A computer with an FTP or SCP server and a terminal program. containing the relevant FWP versions. 436 “How to Update Firmware for a Single Module” on p. In releases previous to Release 8. if the update is service affecting. This allows you to quickly update FWPs on a number of modules and control whether this process will affect service or not. Starting from Release 8. Legacy modules with only one firmware image will then not be possible to restart without a special emergency recovery procedure. The plugs on the SCUs must be provisioned. FWP update on multiple modules in a channel card protected or client path protected system is only performed on the inactive modules.2. If you attempt this. for example. only chained connections of SCUs and ROADMs were supported. without having to check specifically the effects each new version update has on services. A working NCU.2. to a newer version: “Requirements” on p. Modules that have not been assigned to the database (administrative state UAS) and modules with a mismatch (secondary state MEA) will not be updated. the following is required for a successful FWP update: o o Correctly cabled SCUs. If the NE consists of multiple shelves. • Note The following sections describe how to update the FWP on each module. 441 Requirements Before updating FWP.

Specify the correct Permitted Effect to avoid this. Step 3 Select the Update Equipment Firmware (FWP) radio button. User Manual 437 . In response. the Install Equipment Firmware (FWP) page appears. select Configuration -> Software Control. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The Active Software Package and Standby Software Package sections displays which software package versions that are stored in the active and Standby Areas of the NE. An FWP update can be service affecting. Note Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the NE you want to update FWP for in the Managed Elements pane.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Take the necessary precautions for a service hit. From the Main Menu.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs • Release notes How to Update Firmware for a Single Module This instruction describes how to update the firmware package (FWP) on one single module. and then select Next to continue. PS FSP 3000R7 R10. the Software Control start window is displayed.

438 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. which means that service is affected when the update is installed. This column contains information about whether making this update will affect service. In response. or not. Undefined.3 80000014705 Issue: B. NSA. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . which means that service is Update Effect affected when the update is activated. which means that service is not affected. This column contains the version of the FWP that is currently in use on the module This column contains the version of the FWP that is available and ready for installation on the module. The following abbreviations are used: • • • • SA Activate.Updating Firmware Packages in an NE Step 4 Select the Single FWP Update radio button in the Update Mode section. which means that the NE cannot determine the effect of the update on the services. the Install Equipment Firmware (FWP) page displays relevant information for updating the FWP for a single module at a time. Each module is described by the following items: Column Name Equipment FWP Rev NCU ACT FWP Rev Description This column shows the equipment in the system. SA Install.

This column shows the status of any firmware package upgrade. which means that the NE cannot State determine the effect of the update on the services. 400. see “How to Export Historic Performance Records” on p. • Otherwise go to Step 7. which means that service is not affected. which means that service is STBY Update Effect affected when the update is activated. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 5 Check whether the new FWP results in a changed set of performance monitoring counters for the module. • If the set of performance counters for a port is changed by the FWP update: All historic records for all counters for that port will be deleted. This column contains information about whether making this update will affect service. Undefined.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The following abbreviations are used: • • • • SA Activate. SA Install. or not. which means that service is affected when the update is installed. the module will automatically revert to this version. The records can then later be displayed by the FSP NM.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs Column Name NCU STBY FWP Rev Description This column shows the version of the FWP that was used prior to the currently active version. Preserve the historic records for all affected ports on the specific module by either: • Exporting the historic records to a CSV file. This information can be found in the release notes. If anything goes wrong with the update and the new FWP version does not work as it should. NSA. Step 6 User Manual 439 . • Using the FSP NM to collect the records. This content can however not be presented via the Element Manager later. the options are • Idle Reject (rejection of a downgrade) In progress Complete • • • FSP 3000R7 R10. Go to Step 6.

In response. 440 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Either download the FWP as described in “Transferring Files To/From the NE” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B. • Install the NE software that has the relevant FWP set version. the Update Equipment Firmware (FWP) page appears. 448. b) For each module identified. c) If the NCU ACT FWP Rev column does not display the FWP version that you want to install. d) If the NCU ACT FWP Rev column displays the FWP version that you want to install: Select the module you want to update FWP for. or download the NE software that contains the correct FWP version as follows: • Select Back to get back to the Software Control page. and then selecting Next to continue. check whether the NCU ACT FWP Rev column contains the correct FWP version. you must download it. the Update of equipment page appears.Updating Firmware Packages in an NE Step 7 Select a module to update FWP for. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Step 8 Select Next to continue. • Select Back to get back to the Software Control page. It is recommended that you update FWP for SCUs after you have updated FWP for all other modules. as described in “How to Install NE Software” on p. • Return to the Update Equipment Firmware (FWP) by selecting the Update Equipment Firmware (FWP) radio button. 425. Do as follows: a) From the Select Equipment table. identify the module(s) to update FWP for.

which indicates that the Element Manager is waiting for access to the update process on the NE. The following messages are used: • • • • • Pending. Specify the correct Permitted Effect to avoid this. which indicates that the process has failed and the FWP has not been updated. the Status field will display the status for each module. Resynchronize your system: a) Select the NE you want to reboot in the Managed Elements pane. Take the necessary precautions for a service hit. the reboot of the modules may not yet be completed. Failed. which indicates that the Element Manager update process successfully finished. Finished. and select Yes in the Confirmation window that appears. Updating which indicates that the Element Manager is checking if an NCU software update or FWP update is already ongoing. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential End of Procedure How to Update Firmware for Multiple Modules This instruction describes how to update firmware (FWP) for several modules at the same time. Checking Status. User Manual 441 . b) Select Configuration -> Resynchronize on the Main Menu. or all modules of one type. Either all modules in the NE. However. which indicates that the process hasn’t started yet. Note PS PS The update cannot be stopped. c) Select Yes in the Confirmation window that appears. During the update. An FWP update can be service affecting. Select Finish to close the Software Control window. Note Step 10 Step 11 FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs Step 9 Select Start Upgrade to start the update process.

From the Main Menu.3 80000014705 Issue: B. select Configuration -> Software Control. 442 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . The Active Software Package and Standby Software Package sections displays which software package versions that are stored in the active and Standby Areas of the NE. the Software Control start window is displayed.Updating Firmware Packages in an NE Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the NE you want to update FWP for in the Managed Elements pane. In response.

check that the FWP version that is available is the correct version. b) If the NCU ACT FWP Rev column does not display the FWP version that you want to install. Step 5 For each module type that you wish to update: Check whether the new FWP results in a changed set of performance monitoring counters for the module. In response. check whether the NCU ACT FWP Rev column contains the correct FWP version. and then select Next to continue. Go to Step 6 • Otherwise go to Step 7 User Manual 443 . In response. • Select Back to get back to the Software Control page. Either download the FWP as described in “Transferring Files To/From the NE” on p. or download the NE software that contains the correct FWP version as follows: • Select Back to get back to the Software Control page. Do as follows: a) For each module type. • Return to the Update Equipment Firmware (FWP) by selecting the Update Equipment Firmware (FWP) radio button.3 80000014705 Issue: B. as described in “How to Install NE Software” on p. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 4 For each module type that you wish to update FWP for. This information can be found in the release notes. the Update Equipment Firmware (FWP) page appears. 448. FSP 3000R7 R10. the Update Equipment Firmware (FWP) page appears. 425.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs Step 3 Select the Update Equipment Firmware (FWP) radio button. and then selecting Next to continue. you must download it. • If the set of performance counters for a port is changed by the FWP update: All historic records for all counters for that port will be deleted. • Install the NE software that has the relevant FWP set version.

400. The SCUs will be updated last. It is recommended that you update FWP for SCUs after you have updated FWP for other modules. The options are: • All types. The records can then later be displayed by the FSP NM. which indicates that FWP for all modules of this type will be updated. • <module types>.3 80000014705 Issue: B. if their current version differs from the version in the Standby Area. the Install Equipment Firmware (FWP) page displays relevant information for updating FWP for multiple modules at a time.Updating Firmware Packages in an NE Step 6 Preserve the historic records for all affected ports on the specific module by either: • Exporting the historic records to a CSV file. if their current version differs from the version in the Standby Area. In response. • Using the FSP NM to collect the records. which means that FWP for all modules in the NE will be updated. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . for example VSM. see “How to Export Historic Performance Records” on p. This content can however not be presented via the Element Manager later. Use the Select all equipment of this type drop-down list. Select the Multiple FWP Update radio button in the Update Mode section. Step 7 Step 8 Select which module type to update FWP for. 444 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.

FSP 3000R7 R10. • NSA. and the update is not service affecting for the selected modules or module types. • SA. The exception is for modules that are part of a channel card protection group. then these modules will be updated. If you select: • NSA. the Update of equipment page displays the module type you selected as well as the revision of the FWP that will be installed and activated. The modules in such a group that are inactive will be updated. and the update is service affecting or non service affecting for the selected modules or module types. while the modules that are active are not updated. and the update is service affecting for the selected modules or module types.3 80000014705 Issue: B. then these modules will be updated.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs Step 9 Select Next to continue. then these modules will not be updated. User Manual 445 . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 10 Restrict the update by using the Permitted Effect drop-down list. In response.

the Update of equipment page shows the progress.Updating Firmware Packages in an NE Step 11 Select Start Update to start the update process. The Permitted Effect restriction setting may result in this number being less than the total number of modules of this type in the NE.3 80000014705 Issue: B. This field does however not indicate whether the new FWP is in use yet. Number of equipment to update Installed This field shows the number of modules of the selected type that will be updated. This field shows the installation progress for the FWP. In response. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Field Name Description . That information is found in the table below. 446 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. and select Yes in the Confirmation window that appears.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential If the Update of equipment page status table shows that boot up has failed for one of more modules: a) Select back to return to the Update Equipment Firmware (FWP) page. Now the previously active modules are inactive. which indicates that the Element Manager is waiting for access to the update process on the NE. Do as follows: • For each of the protection groups. o Update Failed. Step 13 If the NE has channel card protected services: Only the inactive modules have been updated. The following messages are used: o Pending. o Updating which indicates that the process is ongoing. which indicates that the process has failed and the FWP has not been updated. However. as described in Step 5 through Step 9. You must perform a single module FWP update (see “How to Update Firmware for a Single Module” on p. In that case.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs Field Name Equipment Status Description This column shows the Access Identifier (AID) for each module that is updated in this process. perform a manual protection switch. o Checking Status. and can be updated by multiple equipment updating. contact Technical Support. • Start the FWP update of this module type again. The module will in this case run the standby revision FWP. as described in Step 5 through Step 9. 437) on the module to complete the FWP update. the process is halted. which indicates that the Element Manager update process successfully finished. Now you must update the active modules. Select Finish to close the Software Control window. This column shows whether the new FWP has been successfully started. b) Select the module type again.3 80000014705 Issue: B. c) Start the FWP update of this module type again. the reboot of the modules may not yet be completed. which indicates that the process hasn’t started yet. Step 14 User Manual 447 . Step 12 FSP 3000R7 R10. o Finished. d) If the module is part of a channel card protection group: A protection switch may have occurred during the update process. e) If the reboot of the module still fails.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential How to Upload Files from the NE This instruction describes how to use the Upload window to upload files from the NE’s file area to another storage place. The principle is the same for all file types. database backup files or alarm profile files to an NE. an upload is done. 448 “How to Download Files to the NE” on p. This section describes how to transfer NE software files.Transferring Files To/From the NE Step 15 After updating the FWP you should re synchronize your system: a) Select the NE you want to reboot in the Managed Elements pane. but there are some differences. 448 User Manual . The following topics are provided: “How to Upload Files from the NE” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B. it is necessary to transfer files to or from the NE. b) Select Configuration -> Resynchronize on the Main Menu. Note PS Do not reseat the NCU during the file transfer. c) Select Yes in the Confirmation window that appears. This storage place can be an external server. a download is done. or the SCU. while when transferring files from the NE. 453 FSP 3000R7 R10. or from an NE. End of Procedure Transferring Files To/From the NE When making database backups or importing and exporting an alarm profile. When transferring files to the NE.

01 or newer. Step 3 If you wish to upload an alarm profile file: a) From the Main Menu. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential c) Select the relevant alarm profile package file to upload. select Fault -> Alarm Profile. If your NE does not have an SCU with hardware revision 2. b) In the NE File Area section. c) Select the relevant database backup file to upload. This is because storage on the SCU is not supported in this case. If you wish to upload a database backup file: a) From the Main Menu.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select the NE in the Managed Elements pane. User Manual 449 . the Alarm Profile window is displayed. In response. in the NE File Area section. • Select RDISK to display the files stored on the NCU. select Configuration -> Backup/Restore. • Select SCU to display the files stored on the SCU. FSP 3000R7 R10. the Backup/Restore start window is displayed. in the NE File Area section. b) Select the Manage Profiles tab. The NE File Area will display the files stored on the NCU. select the relevant Location radio button option to display the file you wish to upload. In response. Step 4 Open the Upload window by selecting the Upload button. the NE File Area section will not display Location radio buttons. the Upload window appears.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response.

Transferring Files To/From the NE

Step 5

The files that shall be uploaded from the NE can be destined to three different places, depending on the file type. Use the Destination drop-down list to specify this. • If the file is destined for an external FTP or SCP server: Select the option Remote File Server. This is relevant for a database backup file or an alarm profile file. • If the file is destined for an external FTP client: Select the option Use FTP Server on NE. This option is only available for database backup files, and only if the NE has an NCU with a 1 GB CompactfFash (CF) installed. In this case there is a local FTP server on board the NE, which can organize the transfer to the external FTP client. The NCU-II is an example of this. The FTP server on an NE is by default disabled, and must be enabled for this option to be available. • If the file is destined for the SCU: Select the option SCU. This option is only available for database backup files, and only if the NE has an SCU with hardware revision 2.01 or newer. Make a decision: Then Continue from Step 7 Continue from Step 14 Continue from Step 19

Step 6 If

Step 7

Select from the Protocol drop-down list which protocol to use when uploading. The options are FTP or SCP. SCP is a more secure protocol. If the SCP host is unknown, the transfer will fail. The user must therefore ensure that the known hosts table includes the SCP host. If you are not familiar with FTP, see “About FTP and SCP” on p. 459 for a brief overview.

Step 8

During a file transfer, the NE's FTP or SCP client identifies itself with an IP address. In a bi-directional IP communication the two IP hosts involved need to be able to reach each other. Since both IP hosts identify each other by the IP addresses in the IP header of the IP packets, a successful IP communication relies on the availability of

450

User Manual

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

If you selected Remote File Server in Step 5 If you selected Use FTP Server on NE in Step 5 If you selected SCU in Step 5

Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs

routes for these IP addresses in all the routers along the path between the IP hosts. Some network operators may configure their network in such a way that only the IP range in which the System IP addresses reside will be routed through their network. In this case it must be made sure that the FSP 3000R7 NE uses the System IP to identify itself as the source in the IP header of packets it is sending. If the network operator has configured his network to route the IP range in which the IP addresses of the physical IP interfaces reside, the default IP address as chosen by the IP stack can be used. Use the Own IP drop-down list to specify the IP address to use in the IP header as follows: • • Step 9 Select Default-IP if the IP address that the IP stack would choose by default should be used (this is the IP address of the interface through which the packet is sent). Select System IP if the system IP address should be used.

Specify which file to upload as follows: a) Enter the IP address of the FTP or SSH server in the Server field. b) If the file shall be placed in a sub-directory of the FTP or SSH server root directory, enter that relative path in the Path Name field. Otherwise leave this field empty.

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Note

If the relative path has already been defined in the external server configuration, do not enter anything in the Path Name field. Otherwise, the upload may fail. In the Login field, enter the user account name to gain access to the FTP/SCP server. It depends on the remote server whether the case of this entry as entered is taken into account before validation by the remote server.

Step 10

Step 11

Step 12

Step 13

PS

In the Password field, enter the password to gain access to the FTP/SCP server. It depends on the remote server whether the case of this entry as entered is taken into account before validation by the remote server. Select OK to start the upload, or Cancel to discard your entries and return to the Backup/Restore window. Progress is displayed in the lower, left corner of the Backup/Restore window. Go to Step 22.

User Manual

451

Transferring Files To/From the NE

Step 14

In response to your selection of Use FTP Server on NE in Step 5, the Upload window changes.

Step 15

Enter the user account and password for the NE into the Login and
Password fields.

Whether a user name and password's case (lower/upper case) as entered is taken into account depends on the remote server.
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

The remote server running on the FSP 3000R7 NE (e.g. acting as a GNE), will not take the case of the user name and password as entered into account. Instead, due to TL1 standards restrictions, the user names and passwords for accounts on an FSP 3000R7 NE are converted to all uppercase before they are saved or validated. Step 16 Select OK to start the upload, or Cancel to discard your entries and return to the Install Software Package window. In response, the Upload window first displays the progress of initializing the FTP server, then the Save window appears.

452

User Manual

Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs

Step 17

Browse to the location to which you wish to transfer the file and then select Save. Progress is displayed in the lower, left corner of the Backup/Restore window.

Step 18 Step 19

Go to Step 22. In response to your selection of SCU as the destination for the upload in Step 5, the Upload window changes.

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

The Upload file section displays the file name of the backup database file. Check your notes in “How to Manually Back Up the Database” on p. 413, Step 10 to ensure that this is the correct file. Step 20 The backup file name will not be preserved when stored on the SCU, therefore you should write down that the SCU now will contain the backup file name displayed in Step 19, and store this information. Select OK to start the upload, or Cancel to discard your entries and return to the Backup/Restore window. Progress is displayed in the lower, left corner of the Backup/Restore window. Step 22 The duration of an upload process to a remote file server depends on the bandwidth of the management connection. When the upload is complete, the Upload window closes.

Step 21

End of Procedure

How to Download Files to the NE
This instruction describes how to use the Download window to download files to the NE.

Note

PS

Do not disconnect the NCU during the file transfer.

User Manual

453

Transferring Files To/From the NE

Procedure
Step 1 Step 2 Select the NE in the Managed Elements pane. If you wish to download a database backup file: From the Main Menu, select Configuration -> Backup/Restore. In response, the Backup/Restore start window is displayed. If you wish to download an alarm profile file: Do as follows: a) From the Main Menu, select Fault -> Alarm Profile. In response, the Alarm Profile window is displayed. b) Select the Manage Profiles tab. Step 4 Open the Download window by selecting the Download button. In response, the Download window appears.

Step 3

Step 5

The files that shall be downloaded to the NE can be located in three different places, depending on the file type. Use the Source drop-down list to specify where the file is located. • If the file is located on an external FTP or SCP server: Select the option Remote File Server. This is relevant for a database backup file or an alarm profile file. • If the file is located on an internal FTP client: Select the option Use FTP Server on NE. This option is only available for and database backup files, and only if the NE has an NCU with a 1 GB CompactfFash (CF) installed. In this case there is a local FTP server on board the NE, which can organize the transfer from the external FTP client. The NCU-II is an example of this. The FTP server on an NE is by default disabled, and must be enabled for this option to be available. • If the file is located on the SCU: Select the option SCU. This option is only available for database backup files, and only if the NE has an SCU with hardware revision 2.01 or newer.

454

User Manual

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs

Step 6 If

Make a decision: Then Continue from Step 7 Continue from Step 15 Continue from Step 20

If you selected Remote File Server in Step 5 If you selected Use FTP Server on NE in Step 5 If you selected SCU in Step 5 Step 7

Select which protocol to use to transfer the file from its location. Use the Protocol drop down list. The options are FTP or SCP. SCP is a more secure protocol. If the SCP host is unknown, the transfer will fail. The user must therefore ensure that the known hosts table includes the SCP host. If you are not familiar with FTP or SCP, see “About FTP and SCP” on p. 459 for a brief overview.

Step 8

During a file transfer, the NE's FTP or SCP client identifies itself with an IP address. In a bi-directional IP communication the two IP hosts involved need to be able to reach each other. Since both IP hosts identify each other by the IP addresses in the IP header of the IP packets, a successful IP communication relies on the availability of routes for these IP addresses in all the routers along the path between the IP hosts. Some network operators may configure their network in such a way that only the IP range in which the System IP addresses reside will be routed through their network. In this case it must be made sure that the FSP 3000R7 NE uses the System IP to identify itself as the source in the IP header of packets it is sending. If the network operator has configured his network to route the IP range in which the IP addresses of the physical IP interfaces reside, the default IP address as chosen by the IP stack can be used. Use the Own IP drop-down list to specify the IP address to use in the IP header as follows: • • Select Default-IP if the IP address that the IP stack would choose by default should be used (this is the IP address of the interface through which the packet is sent). Select System IP if the system IP address should be used.

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Step 9

Enter the IP address of the SCP or FTP server you use, into the
Server field.

Ask IT personnel in your organization for this IP address if you do not know it. Step 10 Specify the location of the update file on the external server by entering the relative path on the external server into the Path Name field. If the relative path has already been defined in the external server configuration, do not enter anything in the Path Name field. Otherwise, the download may fail.

Note

PS

User Manual

455

Transferring Files To/From the NE

Step 11 Step 12

Enter the name of the update file, into the File Name field. In the Login field, enter the user account name to gain access to the FTP/SCP server. It depends on the remote server whether the case of this entry as entered is taken into account before validation by the remote server.

Step 13

In the Password field, enter the password to gain access to the FTP/SCP server. It depends on the remote server whether the case of this entry as entered is taken into account before validation by the remote server.

Step 14

Select OK to start the upload, or Cancel to discard your entries and return to the Backup/Restore window. Progress is displayed in the lower, left corner of the Backup/Restore window.

Step 15 Step 16

Go to Step 23. In response to your selection of Use FTP Server on NE in Step 6, the Download window changes.

Step 17

Enter the user account name and belonging password to gain access to the FTP/SCP server in the Login and Password fields. Whether a user name and password's case (lower/upper case) as entered is taken into account depends on the remote server. The remote server running on the FSP 3000R7 NE (e.g. acting as a GNE), will not take the case of the user name and password as entered into account. Instead, due to TL1 standards restrictions, the user names and passwords for accounts on an FSP 3000R7 NE are converted to all uppercase before they are saved or validated.

456

User Manual

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs

Step 18

Start the download by selecting OK. In response, the Download window first displays the progress of initializing the FTP or SSH server, then the Select window appears.

Step 19
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Browse to the location where the file you wish to transfer to the NE is located, select the relevant file and then select Select. Progress is displayed in the lower, left corner of the Backup/Restore window.

Step 20 Step 21

Go to Step 23. In response to your selection of SCU as the destination for the download, the Download window changes.

The Download file section displays the name of the database file that is present on the SCU. However, the original name of the database file was not preserved when it was stored on the SCU. Therefore the name always is shown as “SCU.DBS”. You must consult the notes you made in “How to Manually Back Up the Database” on p. 413, Step 10 to know which file this is.

User Manual

457

Rebooting

Step 22

Select OK to start the download, or Cancel to discard your entries and return to the Backup/Restore window. Progress is displayed in the lower, left corner of the Backup/Restore window.

Step 23

The duration of the download process depends on the bandwidth of the management connection. For example, a software package file is typically around 50 MB, and downloading can take from a few minutes or up to 50 minutes on a slow connection. When the download is complete, the Download window closes.

End of Procedure

Rebooting
It is possible to reboot the NE, as well as make a cold or warm start on individual modules. The following topics are provided: “Rebooting the NE” on p. 458
FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

“Re-initiating a Module” on p. 459

Rebooting the NE
This instruction describes how to reboot the NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Step 2 Select any equipment in the Entities pane. From the Main Menu, select Configuration->Reboot NCU. In response a warning window will appear.

Step 3

Start the reboot by selecting Yes or cancel by selecting No. In response the NE will be rebooted. The reboot takes approximately 5 minutes. If you are on site with the NE, you can observe that the reboot is complete and the NE ready for management access again. The NE indicates this by four consecutive beeps and the MOD LED of the NCU shining solid green.

End of Procedure

458

User Manual

Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs

Re-initiating a Module
This instruction describes how to re-initiate a module, by performing either a cold or a warm start.

Procedure
Step 1 Step 2 Double-click the relevant NE in the Managed Elements pane. In response, the Information pane displays. Select the module in the Entities pane. In response, all available information about the entity is displayed in the Parameters pane. Step 3 Step 4 Select the State tab in the Parameters pane. In response the current states for the module are displayed. Select the Reinit button. In response the Reinit window appears.

FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B, © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential

Step 5

Use the Effect drop-down list to select a warm or cold start: • The option NSA is non-service affecting, and results in a warm start of the module. • The option SA is service affecting, and results in a cold start of the module. Select OK to continue. In response the Equipment Removed alarm is raised. This alarm is cleared when the restart is completed. Observe this from the Current Conditions table.

Step 6

End of Procedure

About FTP and SCP
These client/server protocols allow an user to transfer files to and from a remote network site. SCP is a more secure protocol than FTP. An FTP or SCP site is a computer that is running FTP or SCP server software.

User Manual

459

and how to use it to move files. 460 “How to Move a Database Backup from an External Server” on p. You will need this IP address again when using the Element Manager to move the files to the NE. Step 5 Logout from the FTP or SSH server. You should ask the IT personnel in your organization for the exact instructions for the software packages that your organization uses. 461 How to Move Files to an External Server The following instruction is general and provided solely to give an impression of the steps to follow when moving a file from a local computer to the FTP or SCP server. The following topics are provided: “How to Move Files to an External Server” on p. FSP 3000R7 R10. To do this you need a user account name and the belonging password for the server. Step 2 Authenticate yourself to gain access to the files on the FTP or SCP server. 460 User Manual . You will need this information again when using the Element Manager to move the files to the NE. in the FTP or SSH server.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Ask the IT personnel in your organization for the necessary commands to do this. or the database backup file you have stored locally. Procedure Step 1 Connect to the FTP or SSH server. Thus the user can get access to files stored on the FTP or SCP server. Most organizations have an FTP or SCP server already. Ask the IT personnel in your organization for the necessary commands to do this.About FTP and SCP An FTP or SCP client is the application on the user’s computer that allows the user to access the FTP or SCP server. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential To do this you need the IP address of the server. A number of software packages for FTP or SCP clients/servers exist. Step 3 Navigate around the folders and files on the server to identify the location you wish to place a NE Software Package or database backup file. Ask the IT personnel in your organization for this. Consult the IT personnel in your organization to learn whether you have an FTP or SCP server. Step 4 Place the NE Software Package that you received from ADVA Optical Networking Optical Networking. Ask the IT personnel in your organization for this.

Step 5 Step 6 Logout from the FTP or SSH server. that is part of a regular backup plan. Ask the IT personnel in your organization for the necessary commands to do this.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 4 Move the database backup file in the FTP or SSH server to a location in your organization’s LAN. End of Procedure User Manual 461 . Procedure Step 1 Connect to the FTP or SSH server. To do this you need the IP address of the server. Step 3 Navigate around the folders and files on the server to identify the location you wish to place the database backup file.Chapter 6 Maintaining NEs Step 6 Disconnect from the FTP or SSH server. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Authenticate yourself to gain access to the files on the FTP or SCP server. The Software Package files and/or database backup files are now ready for the Element Manager to fetch. Ask the IT personnel in your organization for the necessary commands to do this. To do this you need a user account name and the belonging password for the server. Step 2 FSP 3000R7 R10. You should ask the IT personnel in your organization for the exact instructions for the software packages that your organization uses. Ask the IT personnel in your organization for this. Ask the IT personnel in your organization for this. End of Procedure How to Move a Database Backup from an External Server The following instruction is general and provided solely to give an impression of the steps to follow when moving a database backup file from the FTP or SCP server to a local computer. Disconnect from the FTP or SSH server.

462 About FTP and SCP User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .3 80000014705 Issue: B.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Communication Ports Description of use SNMP requests SNMP traps In the message log you can see the message Listening to UDP Port 162 when Element Manager has been started. the message log will show the message Error binding to UDP Port 162. User Manual 463 . This indicates that port 162 is busy. If any other utility has been started and uses port 162.Appendix A Communication Port Overview Ports used for communication between Element Manager and NEs: Table 11: UDP Port 161 162 FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .3 80000014705 Issue: B.464 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.

when all alarms on the module or any pluggable transceiver causing the “Outage” or “Supporting Entity Outage” operational states are cleared. The following topics are provided: Administrative States. FSP 3000R7 R10. User Manual 465 . You may not perform any operation or configuration that affects service. You may not perform any operation or configuration that affects service. normal surveillance can take place.Appendix B Description of States This is a description of all states the network element can have. When the administrative state changes to any state other than “In Service”. indicating Out of Service. Automatic In Service When equipment is set to this administrative state (AINS). These condition names all begin with “OOS”. Administrative States The administrative state is user settable and controls configuration and operation of each entity. which describes the administrative states for the network element and which implications these states have. indicating that the administrative state has changed. Transition from this state to “In Service” takes place automatically. You can only set an entity’s administrative state to “In Service” if the entity that supports it is also “In Service”. In Service While in this administrative state (IS). alarms are not reported.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Operational States. You can only set a the administrative state of a piece of equipment to “Automatic In Service” if any equipment that supports it is also “Automatic In Service” or “In Service” and the entity that it supports is not “In Service”. an informative condition is raised. which describes the operational states for the network element and which implications these states have.

but not provisioned to the internal database. and performance monitoring records are invalid. You can only set an entity’s administrative state to “Maintenance” if the entity that supports it is not “Disabled” and the entity that it supports is not “In Service” or not “Automatic In Service”. Contact your local technical support team if there is any uncertainty. consider the consequences when using this state. Management While in this administrative state (MGT). and performance monitoring records are invalid. You can only set an entity’s administrative state to “Management” if the entity that supports it is not “Disabled” and the entity that it supports is not “In Service” or not “Automatic In Service”. As a consequence. That is. when all alarms causing the “Outage” or “Supporting Entity Outage” operational states have been cleared for a specific time period. Performance monitoring is disabled. Therefore. consider the consequences when using this state. If traffic on the entity is affected then this is shown by a corresponding "OOS Tx Disabled (OFF)" or "OOS Rx Disabled" condition. 466 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. You can only set an entity’s administrative state to “Automatic In Service” if the entity that supports it is also “Automatic In Service” or “In Service” and the entity that it supports is not “In Service”. Disabled While in this administrative state (DSBLD). That is. alarms are not reported and performance monitoring records are invalid. the administrative state is therefore displayed in parentheses behind the entity name in the list of entities. only inventory information is available for this entity.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Therefore. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . you may perform service affecting operations. You can only set an entity’s administrative state to “Disabled” if the entity that it supports is “Disabled” or “Unassigned”. you may perform service affecting configurations. In the management tools. Transition from this state to “In Service” takes place automatically. Maintenance While in this administrative state (MT). Unassigned You enter this administrative state (UAS) automatically when an entity is installed. You may perform service affecting configurations.Administrative States When facilities are set to this administrative state (AINS). it might lead to payload traffic loss in which alarms are not reported. You may not perform any operation or configuration that affects service. Contact your local technical support team if there is any uncertainty. all alarm notifications from the entity are stopped. it might lead to payload traffic loss in which alarms are not reported.

and there is no secondary state present. and together with this and the current list of conditions. For the entity with the associated Mismatch state: all autonomous standing conditions except MEA are cleared and performance monitoring records are nulled and invalid. and there is no secondary state present. In the management tools. the cause for the outage can be found. This operational state is entered when the entity’s administrative state is either “Disabled” or “Unassigned”. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Secondary States Unequipped This autonomous state (UEQ) indicates that the equipment it is associated with is not present in the NE. or that this equipment is disallowed in this position. Normal This operational state indicates that the entity is running normally. FSP 3000R7 R10. but that this is not due to a defect. Unavailable This operational state indicates that the entity cannot pass traffic. This state will be accompanied by a secondary state. the state is displayed in parenthesis behind the entity name in the Entity List. all autonomous standing conditions are cleared and performance monitoring records are nulled and invalid. User Manual 467 . This operational state is entered when the entity’s administrative state is “Disabled”. For the entity with the associated Unequipped state: all autonomous standing conditions except “Removed” are cleared and performance monitoring records are nulled and invalid.Provisioning is allowed according to the current administrative state for the entity. For supporting equipment. Mismatch This autonomous state (MEA) indicates that the equipment it is associated with does not match the equipment that was assigned during provisioning. the state is displayed in parenthesis behind the entity name in the Entity List. Outage This operational state indicates that service is affected on this entity. Abnormal This operational state indicates that a signal degrade condition is present on the entity.Appendix B Description of States Operational States An entity’s operational state is influenced by the administrative state and current conditions. all autonomous standing conditions are cleared and performance monitoring records are nulled and invalid.3 80000014705 Issue: B. For supporting equipment. In the management tools. Provisioning is allowed according to the current administrative state for the entity.

The equipment. This state is associated with the working facility. This specific event can be found in the Current Conditions list. The supporting equipment has a fault condition. and cross-connected to a PPP/IP entity on the NCU module. is unable to perform their provisioned tasks. The supporting equipment does not match the assigned supporting equipment. the list of conditions for this facility will detail the failure. This facility enters this state as a consequence of an event. Facility Failure This state (FAF) indicates that the associated facility has a failure. it indicates that switching from the working to the protection facility is inhibited. for example: • • • • • The supporting equipment is unequipped. and is the hot standby entity. The entity has an outage of management communication Port related secondary states: Busy This state (BUSY) indicates that an ECC is provisioned. Auto Locked-Out This state (LKDO) indicates that the associated facility is autonomously suspended. and the equipment supported by this equipment. the condition name begins with “LKDO”. Standby Hot This state (STBYH) indicates that the entity is part of a protection group. PROTN Switch Inhibited When this state (PSI) is true.Operational States Fault This state (FLT) indicates that the associated equipment has a fault.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Protection related secondary states: Active This state (ACT) indicates that the associated protection group is active. Supporting Entity Outage This autonomous state (SGEO) has a variety of root-causes. The list of conditions for this equipment will detail the fault. The equipment supported by this equipment will have the SGEO state associated with it. but not cross-connected to a PPP/IP entity on the NCU module. Idle FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential This state (IDLE) indicates that an ECC is provisioned. 468 User Manual .

FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential User Manual 469 . Operation related secondary states: Loopback This state (LPBK) indicates that a loopback is set on the associated facility. it indicates that switching from the protection to the working facility is inhibited. Diagnostic This state (DGN) indicates that service affecting diagnostic activity is being performed on the port. Forced On This state (FRCD) indicates that the laser transmitter of the entity is forced on.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Appendix B Description of States WKG Switch Inhibited When this state (PRI) is true.

3 80000014705 Issue: B.470 Operational States User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .

Appendix C RADIUS Authentication Setup This appendix is written for the administrator of an Element Manager managed network configuration. 472 “Defining RADIUS Servers” on p.3 80000014705 Issue: B. When RADIUS authentication is used to access the Element Manager. In addition it describes how these settings can be distributed to other Element Manager installations. This appendix contains the following sections: “Setting up RADIUS Authentication” on p. 475 “Configuring SNMP Access Profiles” on p. 472 “Enabling RADIUS Authentication” on p. define the RADIUS servers and SNMP access profiles for an Element Manager installation. and where RADIUS shall be used as the authentication method. This can only be done if the NEs support SNMPv3. the Element Manager uses SNMP access profiles to access the SNMP agents on the managed NEs. 486 User Manual 471 . as well as any IP subnet restrictions for the Element Manager installation. FSP 3000R7 R10. 476 “Configuring IP Subnet Restrictions” on p. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential The appendix describes how to enable use of RADIUS authentication.

472 User Manual . 491.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 475. Procedure Step 1 Ensure that RADIUS servers have been configured and are reachable for the Element Manager. Enable use of RADIUS authentication on the Element Manager. and how to add each of them to the list of RADIUS servers that will be used for authentication. Configure the SNMP profiles that match the RADIUS privilege levels for the NEs. 476. Requirements • You must be logged in with an account with administrator privilege level. 472. See “Configuring SNMP Access Profiles” on p. 486. specify IP subnet restrictions for the Element Manager. Setting up RADIUS servers is outside the scope of this document.Setting up RADIUS Authentication Setting up RADIUS Authentication This instruction describes how to setup and enable use of RADIUS authentication for the Element Manager. If relevant. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential End of Procedure Defining RADIUS Servers This procedure describes how to define RADIUS servers that can be used for authentication. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Specify the RADIUS servers that the Element Manager shall contact for authentication. See “Enabling RADIUS Authentication” on p. See “Configuring IP Subnet Restrictions” on p. however an overview of how this can be done for one RADIUS server type is given in Appendix D “Configuring a RADIUS Server” on p. See “Defining RADIUS Servers” on p. FSP 3000R7 R10.

The default value is 1812. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Enter the IP address for the RADIUS server into the IP Address field. Enter the port that the RADIUS server uses to communicate with the Element Manager with. and is normally suitable.3 80000014705 Issue: B. This could however depend on the RADIUS server application that is used. In response the Add RADIUS Server window appears. This IP address much be reachable for the Element Manager. • To modify a RADIUS server go to Step 11. • To remove a RADIUS server go to Step 19. Step 2 FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 6 Enter into the Timeout field how long time the Element Manager shall try to connect to a RADIUS server before giving up. select Add. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Make a choice: • To add a RADIUS server go to Step 3.Appendix C RADIUS Authentication Setup Procedure Step 1 Select Security->SNMPv3 via RADIUS. please check the documentation for that application to confirm. In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window appears. User Manual 473 . To add a RADIUS server.

please check the documentation for that application to confirm. in the Retries field. Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Select OK to apply your entries or Cancel to discard them. Step 12 Enter the port that the RADIUS server uses to communicate with the Element Manager with. It can be enabled at a later time as well. The maximum number of retries is 5. This could however depend on the RADIUS server application that is used. and is normally suitable. select Modify. Step 15 Step 16 474 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . Step 13 Step 14 Enter into the Timeout field how long time the Element Manager shall try to connect to a RADIUS server before giving up. The default value is 1812.3 80000014705 Issue: B. It can be enabled at a later time as well. To modify an already defined RADIUS server. in the Retries field. Enable use of this RADIUS server by placing a check mark in the Enabled check box. This RADIUS server will not be used by the Element Manager until it has been enabled for use. Enable use of this RADIUS server by placing a check mark in the Enabled check box. In response the Modify RADIUS Server window appears. The maximum number of retries is 5. Enter the maximum number of times the Element Manager shall retry connecting to a RADIUS server. This RADIUS server will not be used by the Element Manager until it has been enabled for use. Enter the shared secret the Element Manager shall use when connecting to the RADIUS server into the Shared Secret and Retype Shared Secret fields.Defining RADIUS Servers Step 7 Enter the maximum number of times the Element Manager shall retry connecting to a RADIUS server. Enter the shared secret the Element Manager shall use when connecting to the RADIUS server into the Shared Secret and Retype Shared Secret fields.

modify the shared secret the Element Manager shall use when communicating with the RADIUS server. RADIUS tab. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential This procedure describes how to enable use of RADIUS authentication for the Element Manager installation. b) Use the Shared Secret and Retype Shared Secret fields to change the shared secret. End of Procedure Enabling RADIUS Authentication FSP 3000R7 R10.Appendix C RADIUS Authentication Setup Step 17 If relevant. In response the Shared Secret and Retype Shared Secret fields appear. b) Select Remove. Do as follows: a) Place a check mark in the Change Shared Secret field. do as follows: a) Select it in the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window. Step 18 Step 19 Select OK to apply your changes or Cancel to discard them.3 80000014705 Issue: B. To remove a RADIUS server from the list. Requirements • You can be logged in with any privilege level. In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window appears. Step 20 Select OK to close the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window. User Manual 475 . Procedure Step 1 Select Security->SNMPv3 via RADIUS.

© 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . a default one and multiple ones for specific IP subnets. When authenticating a user the Element Manager will connect to the RADIUS servers listed in this window.3 80000014705 Issue: B. it will use the SNMP access parameters defined in that SNMP access profile. The Element Manager will only attempt to connect to enabled servers. Step 3 Select OK to apply your changes or Cancel to discard them. and in the sequence that they are listed here.Configuring SNMP Access Profiles Step 2 Enable RADIUS authentication by placing a check mark in the Use RADIUS for authentication check box. This section describes how to configure the two SNMP access profile types for the Element Manager. Requirements • You must be logged in with administrator privilege level. 478 “Adding an SNMP Access Profile for an IP Subnet” on p. the Element Manager will use the default SNMP access profile. and if this address is part of a IP subnet for which an SNMP access profile exists. The following sections are provided: “Adding a Default SNMP Access Profile” on p. In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window appears. 476 “Clearing a Default SNMP Access Profile” on p. 476 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. 484 Adding a Default SNMP Access Profile This procedure describes how to add the default SNMP profile. End of Procedure Configuring SNMP Access Profiles Two types of SNMP access profiles can be defined. 482 “Removing an SNMP Access Profile for an IP Subnet” on p. The Element Manager cannot manage NEs unless the default SNMP access profile has been configured. The Element Manager checks the IP address of the NE that a user connects to. If no such specific SNMP access profile is found. This allows the administrator to set up different SNMP access parameters for different sub nets. 479 “Modifying an SNMP Access Profile for an IP Subnet” on p. Procedure Step 1 Select Security->SNMPv3 via RADIUS.

User Manual 477 . In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window displays the SNMP tab. 214 for instructions on adding user accounts on NEs.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The security level and authentication type cannot be changed and are set to AuthPriv and MD5 respectively. FSP 3000R7 R10. Notice that you will have to log in to Element Manager using local authentication when following the procedure in this case.Appendix C RADIUS Authentication Setup Step 2 Select the SNMP tab. In response the Modify Default Profile window appears. This user account name must exist on each NE that shall be accessed. Step 3 Step 4 Select the Default SNMP Access profile radio button. See “Handling Network Element User Accounts” on p. before the Element Manager can actually access it. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 5 Enter the user account name the Element Manager shall use when sending SNMP Get and Set requests to the NEs in the network configuration. This password must be upper case and minimum 8 characters long. Select Modify. Step 6 Enter the authentication password in the Authentication Password field. in the User field.

In response the SNMP tab content changes. Requirements • You must be logged in with an account with administrator privilege level. Step 8 Select OK to apply your entries. Procedure Step 1 Select Security->SNMPv3 via RADIUS. In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window appears. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential End of Procedure Clearing a Default SNMP Access Profile This procedure describes how to clear the default SNMP profile. or Cancel to cancel them.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Configuring SNMP Access Profiles Step 7 Enter the privacy password in the Privacy Password field. FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 9 Select OK to close the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window. This password must be upper case and minimum 8 characters long. 478 User Manual . The privacy type that will be used is AES 128.

Requirements • You must be logged in with an RADIUS account with administrator privilege level. End of Procedure Adding an SNMP Access Profile for an IP Subnet This procedure describes how to add an SNMP profile for an IP subnet. In response the SNMP tab content changes. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 5 Select OK to close the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window. In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window displays the SNMP tab.Appendix C RADIUS Authentication Setup Step 2 Select the SNMP tab. FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 3 Step 4 Select the Default SNMP Access profile radio button. User Manual 479 . Select Clear.3 80000014705 Issue: B.

In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window displays the SNMP tab. In response the SNMP tab content changes. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential . In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window appears.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Select the SNMP tab.Configuring SNMP Access Profiles Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select Security->SNMPv3 via RADIUS. 480 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 3 Select the SNMP Access profiles for IP subnets radio button.

Notice that you will have to log in to Element Manager using local authentication when following the procedure in this case. User Manual 481 . Enter the user account name the Element Manager shall use when sending SNMP Get and Set requests to the NEs in the IP subnet. This user account name must exist on each NE that shall be accessed. Step 9 Enter the privacy password in the Privacy Password field. The security level and authentication type cannot be changed and are set to AuthPriv and MD5 respectively. 214 for instructions on adding user accounts on NEs.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The privacy type that will be used is AES 128.Appendix C RADIUS Authentication Setup Step 4 Select Add. FSP 3000R7 R10. See “Handling Network Element User Accounts” on p. In response the Add Profile window appears. This password must be upper case and minimum 8 characters long. Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Enter the IP address for the IP subnet into the IP Address field. This password must be upper case and minimum 8 characters long. Enter the sub net mask for the IP subnet into the Subnet Mask field. before the Element Manager can actually access it. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 8 Enter the authentication password in the Authentication Password field. in the User field.

3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response the SNMP tab content changes. In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window appears.Configuring SNMP Access Profiles Step 10 Select OK to apply your entries. Procedure Step 1 Select Security->SNMPv3 via RADIUS. or Cancel to cancel them. Step 11 Select OK to close the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Modifying an SNMP Access Profile for an IP Subnet This procedure describes how to modify an SNMP profile for an IP subnet. End of Procedure FSP 3000R7 R10. 482 User Manual . Requirements • You must be logged in with an account with administrator privilege level.

In response the SNMP tab content changes. FSP 3000R7 R10.Appendix C RADIUS Authentication Setup Step 2 Select the SNMP tab. Step 3 Select the SNMP Access profiles for IP Subnets radio button. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 4 Select Modify.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window displays the SNMP tab. User Manual 483 . Modify Profile window appears.

This password must be upper case and minimum 8 characters long. Step 6 Enter the authentication password in the Authentication Password field.3 80000014705 Issue: B. See “Handling Network Element User Accounts” on p. This user account name must exist on each NE that shall be accessed. The security level and authentication type cannot be changed and are set to AuthPriv and MD5 respectively. FSP 3000R7 R10. Step 8 Select OK to apply your entries. This password must be upper case and minimum 8 characters long. in the User field. In response the SNMP tab content changes. The privacy type that will be used is AES 128. or Cancel to cancel them. Requirements • You must be logged in with an account with administrator privilege level.Configuring SNMP Access Profiles Step 5 Modify the user account name the Element Manager shall use when sending SNMP Get and Set requests to the NEs in the IP subnet. End of Procedure Removing an SNMP Access Profile for an IP Subnet This procedure describes how to remove an SNMP profile for an IP subnet. Step 7 Enter the privacy password in the Privacy Password field. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 9 Select OK to close the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window. 214 for instructions on adding user accounts on NEs. Notice that you will have to log in to Element Manager using local authentication when following the procedure in this case. 484 User Manual . before the Element Manager can actually access it.

In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window displays the SNMP tab. In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window appears.Appendix C RADIUS Authentication Setup Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select Security->SNMPv3 via RADIUS. In response the SNMP tab content changes. In response the IP sub net information is removed from the list. Select the SNMP tab. User Manual 485 .3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 4 Step 5 Select the IP sub net to remove SNMP access parameters for in the list. Select Remove. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 3 Select the SNMP Access profiles for IP subnets radio button. FSP 3000R7 R10.

489 FSP 3000R7 R10. 488 “Enabling Restricted IP Subnets Access” on p. Any change to the list of restricted IP subnets after this feature has been enabled. when the list has been enabled. A number of IP subnets can be added to the list. the user will be denied the possibility to manage this NE. If the IP subnet restriction feature already is enabled. in which case a matching SNMP profile must be created. Users will only be able to manage NEs that are in these IP subnets. addition of an IP subnet takes effect the next time the Element Manager is started. the Element Manager checks whether any restricted IP subnets have been defined for this Element Manager. End of Procedure Configuring IP Subnet Restrictions It is possible to restrict the users to only be able to manage NEs that are in one or more specific IP subnets. requires a re-start of the Element Manager to take effect. PS 486 User Manual . When an user defines an NE to manage or starts the Element Manager.Configuring IP Subnet Restrictions Step 6 Select OK to close the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window. 486 “Removing a Restricted IP Subnet” on p. If it is not. the Element Manager checks whether the NE that is being defined for management is within the restricted subnet(s).3 80000014705 Issue: B. but if the use of restricted IP subnets has not been enabled. If a restricted subnet has been defined. The following sections are provided: “Adding a Restricted IP Subnet” on p. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Adding a Restricted IP Subnet One or more IP subnets can be added to the IP subnet restrictions list. This procedure describes how to add an restricted IP subnet. This section describes how to define restricted IP subnets for the Element Manager. Note Requirements • You must be logged in with an account with administrator privilege level. they will have no effect. A restricted IP subnet can also require use of specific SNMP access parameters. Otherwise the NE can be managed.

In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window displays the IP Subnet Restrictions tab. Enter the sub net mask for the IP subnet into the Subnet Mask field. User Manual 487 . Select the IP Subnet Restrictions tab. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 3 Select Add. In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window appears.Appendix C RADIUS Authentication Setup Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Select Security->SNMPv3 via RADIUS. FSP 3000R7 R10.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response the Add IP Subnet Restriction window appears. Step 4 Step 5 Enter the IP address for the IP subnet into the IP Address field.

Configuring IP Subnet Restrictions Step 6 Select OK to apply your entries. Step 7 Select OK to close the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window. If the IP subnet restriction feature already is enabled. or Cancel to cancel them. In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window appears.3 80000014705 Issue: B. In response the IP Subnet Restrictions tab content changes. End of Procedure FSP 3000R7 R10. removal of an IP subnet takes effect the next time the Element Manager is started. PS 488 User Manual . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Removing a Restricted IP Subnet This procedure describes how to remove an already defined IP subnet from the list of IP subnet restrictions. Procedure Step 1 Select Security->SNMPv3 via RADIUS. Note Requirements • You must be logged in with an account with administrator privilege level.

Step 5 Select OK to close the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window. User Manual 489 . In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window appears. Step 3 Step 4 FSP 3000R7 R10. The Element Manager must be restarted afterwards for the change to take effect. Requirements • You must be logged in with an account with administrator privilege level. In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window displays the IP Subnet Restrictions tab. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Select the relevant IP subnet in the list. Select Remove. Procedure Step 1 Select Security->SNMPv3 via RADIUS.Appendix C RADIUS Authentication Setup Step 2 Select the IP Subnet Restrictions tab.3 80000014705 Issue: B. End of Procedure Enabling Restricted IP Subnets Access This procedure describes how to enable use of restricted IP subnets. In response the IP subnet is removed from the IP subnet restrictions list.

the next time you start the Element Manager. Select OK to apply your changes and close the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window.Configuring IP Subnet Restrictions Step 2 Select the IP Subnet Restrictions tab.3 80000014705 Issue: B. Step 6 Make a choice: • Select OK for your entry to be stored. FSP 3000R7 R10. It will take effect. • Select Cancel to cancel your entry and return to the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window for further configuration. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Place a check mark in the Enable IP Subnet Restrictions check box. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential In response a warning window appears. End of Procedure 490 User Manual . In response the SNMPv3 via RADIUS window displays the IP Subnet Restrictions tab.

FSP 3000R7 R10. If necessary. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Install and start a RADIUS server.3 80000014705 Issue: B. specify the privilege levels that are supported by the FSP 3000R7s (clients) that will use this RADIUS server. It also describes how to test that it works for authentication.Appendix D Configuring a RADIUS Server This appendix describes how to configure a RADIUS server that can be used for remote authentication of Element Managers. including name. The FreeRADIUS server application is available from http://freeradius. password and user level for each of them. In the RADIUS server. 495 User Manual 491 . Define the IP address for the Element Managers (clients) that will use this RADIUS server and the shared secret that the RADIUS server and Element managers (clients) will use. Step 5 End of Procedure The following supporting sections are provided: “Installing and Starting a RADIUS Server” on p. modify the port that the RADIUS server uses to communicate with the Element Manager. It is one of the most widely deployed RADIUS servers in the world. 494 “Defining the Element Manager IP Addresses” on p. In principle any RADIUS server application can be used. Define as many RADIUS user accounts as needed.org/. 492 “Specifying Privilege Levels” on p. this appendix is based on using the FreeRADIUS server application for Windows. 493 “Modifying the Port for RADIUS Authentication” on p. This procedure describes how to configure a RADIUS server so it can be used for authentication of users.

This is necessary because the daemon must build a memory table of all default attributes contained in the configuration files.“Defining RADIUS User Accounts” on p. 495 Installing and Starting a RADIUS Server This procedure describes how to install and start a RADIUS server application. Note Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Run the installer Setup Wizard on a computer that is reachable for the network elements. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential End of Procedure PS 492 User Manual . An icon will appear in the system tray of your taskbar to show it is running. Start the RADIUS server application.3 80000014705 Issue: B. You must stop and restart the server whenever changes are made to the RADIUS server’s configuration file. The default directory structure created by the installer looks like the following: Figure 30: FreeRadius Server Directory FSP 3000R7 R10.

Appendix D Configuring a RADIUS Server Specifying Privilege Levels The privilege levels. This dictionary file uses FreeRADIUS compatible syntax. Provision and Monitor.org/assignments/enterprise-numbers VENDOR Adva 2544 Example of RADIUS Dictionary File Optical Networking Dictionary for ADVA Fiber Service Platform #note this is the syntax for Freeradius. the other definitions are for the FSP 2000 Element Manager and can remain in this file. and values for the FSP 3000R7 shall be defined in a dictionary file. Lines starting with # are comments. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential VALUE VALUE VALUE VALUE VALUE ATTRIBUTE # #ATTRIBUTE VALUE VALUE VALUE VALUE VALUE VALUE Adva Adva-UUM-User-Level 102 Root Admin Provision Operator Reserved Monitor integer 5 4 3 2 1 0 Adva Adva-User-Level 100 Super Admin Provision Reserved Retrieve 102 integer integer 5 4 3 1 0 Adva Adva-User-Level 100 integer Adva Adva-User-Level Adva-User-Level Adva-User-Level Adva-User-Level Adva-User-Level Adva-User-Level Adva-UUM-User-Level Operate_Control 2 Adva-UUM-User-Level Adva-UUM-User-Level Adva-UUM-User-Level Adva-UUM-User-Level Adva-UUM-User-Level Adva-UUM-User-Level Note that only the text in bold is required for the FSP 3000R7 Element Manager. and therefore the dictionary file for the NE can be used.iana.3 80000014705 Issue: B. The privilege levels Root. ATTRIBUTE # #ATTRIBUTE VALUE FSP 3000R7 R10.com # see http://www. The privilege levels for the FSP 3000R7 are the same as for the NEs.advaoptical. User Manual 493 . Provision and Monitor correspond to the Element Manager user account names Administrator. This dictionary file is located in the directory /usr/local/data/ on the NE. Figure 31: # # # # http://www. their attributes.

conf. change the number accordingly. If using FreeRADIUS under Linux. place the dictionary file in the location /usr/share/freeradius. Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Download the dictionary file from a network element to your management computer. This means to send rejects immediately. a) For FreeRADIUS on Windows. add the following line to the dictionary file: $INCLUDE dictionary. b) For FreeRADIUS on Linux. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Modifying the Port for RADIUS Authentication .3 80000014705 Issue: B. Copy the dictionary file to the RADIUS server. If the NE is configured for any other port. If necessary. use Notepad (for example) to edit the dictionary file as necessary so its syntax conforms with that required by your RADIUS server.conf to define which port the network element will listen on. End of Procedure 494 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10. using SCP or FTP. Step 3 Modify the “reject_delay” setting to “reject_delay = 0”.This procedure describes how to provide the RADIUS server with the FSP 3000R7’s privilege levels. Modify the default entry port = 0 to port = 1812. Use a text editor to open and modify the file as follows: Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Open the file located in C:\FreeRADIUS.net\etc\raddb\radiusd.net\share\freeradius. place the dictionary file in the location C:\FreeRADIUS.adva. Step 3 Step 4 End of Procedure The RADIUS server uses the file radiusd.

Procedure Step 1 Make a note of the following information for the account: • RADIUS user account name • RADIUS user account password • Element Manager privilege level for the RADIUS user account.3 80000014705 Issue: B. you must open the file that contains the list of clients that are allowed to make requests to the RADIUS server. containing: • client IP-address/mask for the Element Manager client • the shared secret the Element Manager will use when communicating with the RADIUS server.18. • the shortname for the Element Manager is optional and used for logging purposes only. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential Step 3 End of Procedure Defining RADIUS User Accounts This procedure describes how to define a RADIUS user account for an Element Manager user. Use a text editor to open and modify the file as follows: Procedure Step 1 Open the file clients.Appendix D Configuring a RADIUS Server Defining the Element Manager IP Addresses To define the IP address of the Element Managers that will use the RADIUS server. This is an example of content: client 172. add an entry in the same fashion.0/16 secret = advasecret123 shortname = TS-LAB-Network Step 2 For each Element Manager client. Element Manager versus RADIUS Privilege Levels RADIUS Privilege Level Super Admin Retrieve Step 2 Table 12: EM Privilege Level Administrator Provision Monitor User Manual 495 .conf located in C:\FreeRADIUS.0.net\etc\raddb\. Save the edited file and close it. For each client you must enter the network element (client) IP address along with the shared secret between the server and the client. Look up which RADIUS privilege level that corresponds to the Element Manager privilege level. FSP 3000R7 R10.

net” service on the Windows PC to apply settings. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .conf located in C:\FreeRADIUS.3 80000014705 Issue: B.Step 3 Step 4 Use a text editor to open the file users. Define the Element Manager’s RADIUS user account by adding the following text: • <RADIUS user account name> Auth-Type := Local • User-Password == “RADIUS user account password>” • ADVA-UUM-User-Level = “<RADIUS privilege level>” For example: David Auth-Type := Local User-Password == “David’s secret” ADVA-UUM-User-Level = “Root” Step 5 Restart the “FreeRADIUS.net\etc\raddb\. End of Procedure 496 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.

Index A admin state 118 alarm history log 168. 76 color coding 370 disable reporting 370 inhibiting 370 severity 374 Area ID 118 FSP 3000R7 R10. 195. 208. 373. 212. 191. 208. 195. 373. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential C change password 59 comma separated file 168. 191. 374 alarms 61.3 80000014705 Issue: B. 212. 374 community 54 E Entity pane 63 entity pane pane entity 63 equipment pane 63 events 76 F FSP Network Manager (FSP NM) 31 see also Network Management System User Manual 497 .

76 L Loopback 230 FSP 3000R7 R10. 118 NE 40. 62. 76 O OSPF routing 118 P pane entity 63 equipment 63 information 63 498 User Manual . © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential M maximum transmit rate 117 memory 75 modes integrated mode 31 N NE Pane 63 Network Management System (NMS) 31.3 80000014705 Issue: B.G Graphical User Interface (GUI) 61 H help 77 I information pane 63 IP address 53.

62 users 35 User Manual 499 .Index NE 63 parameter 63 parameter pane 63 password 35 change 59 polling mechanism 40 proxy ARP 118 R response messages 76 routing metric 118 Routing Table 274 S security password 35 SNMP 61.3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential T TCA Thresholds 321 Trace 316 trap recipients 53 troubleshooting 40. 66 U User Datagram Protocol (UDP) 54. 44 settings 51 traps 62 SNMP Provider 76 communication with 40 standalone 31 System Interface 230 System IP address 230 FSP 3000R7 R10. 44. 62 agent 76 community 41.

3 80000014705 Issue: B. © 2011 ADVA Optical Networking ADVA Confidential .500 User Manual FSP 3000R7 R10.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful